EE Raceway Modeling

Reference Guide

Document Number DPDS3-PB-200005B DPDS3-PB-200005C

Version PDS 7.2 PDS 7.2

Date February 2003 February 2003

Pages 1-594 595-643

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies.

Trademarks
Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. ACE, DBACCESS, DIALOG, DMRS, EE CMS, EE Power, EE Raceway, EE Schematic, EE Wiring Diagram, IGDS, and SEE are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright
 1984-2003 Intergraph Corporation All Rights Reserved Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization. RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software — Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished — rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. Document Purpose ................................................................................................................ Document Prerequisites / Audience ...................................................................................... Related Documents/Products ................................................................................................ About this Document ............................................................................................................ Ordering Information ............................................................................................................ Additional Information ......................................................................................................... General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. About the Reference Guide .......................................................................................................... Basic Workstation Skills .............................................................................................................. 2. Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................ Assumptions ......................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Upgrading the Workstation .......................................................................................................... Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. Databases ..................................................................................................................................... 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment ......................................................................................... Using the Electrical Engineer Menus ........................................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Enter ............................................................................................................................................. Product Menu ............................................................................................................................... Copy ............................................................................................................................................. Delete ........................................................................................................................................... Archive ......................................................................................................................................... Restore ......................................................................................................................................... Database Utilities ......................................................................................................................... RIS schema utilities .............................................................................................................. Update Project Schema .........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

17 17 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 25 25 26 27 27 27 28 29 33 35 36 39 40 42 43 44 46 48 50 51 52

3

_ _______________
Update Reference Schema .................................................................................................... 4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment ......................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Design .......................................................................................................................................... Process ......................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. EDEN ........................................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. Entering Time in Batch Mode .............................................................................................. Report ........................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. Overview ............................................................................................................................... Utilities ......................................................................................................................................... Copy ...................................................................................................................................... Delete .................................................................................................................................... Undelete ................................................................................................................................ Purge ..................................................................................................................................... Rename ................................................................................................................................. Send ...................................................................................................................................... Receive ................................................................................................................................. Archive ................................................................................................................................. Restore .................................................................................................................................. Output ................................................................................................................................... 5. EE Graphics Interface Elements .................................................................................................. Start-up Sequence ........................................................................................................................ Screen Display ............................................................................................................................. EERWAY Command Menu Bar .................................................................................................. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment .................................................................... Identifying Elements .................................................................................................................... Working Units and Precision Key-ins ......................................................................................... Working Units in MU:SU:PU .............................................................................................. Precision Key-ins .................................................................................................................. 55 59 61 63 64 64 65 67 68 69 70 70 72 73 73 75 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 89 91 92 93 96 97 103 104 104 105

4

_ _______________
6. Workflow and Procedures ............................................................................................................ The Drawing Process ................................................................................................................... System Manager Setup ......................................................................................................... Drawing Setup ...................................................................................................................... Define Systems and Set Active Systems .............................................................................. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................ Set Symbology ...................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters ........................................................................................................... Set Propagation Parameters .................................................................................................. Place One-Line ..................................................................................................................... Propagation ........................................................................................................................... Sketch and Eden Modes ........................................................................................................ Manual Fitting Placement ..................................................................................................... Seamless Tubing Representations ........................................................................................ Databases ..................................................................................................................................... Reference Database ............................................................................................................... Project Database ................................................................................................................... Reports ......................................................................................................................................... Interference Detection .................................................................................................................. 7. Precision Input Form .................................................................................................................... View ...................................................................................................................................... Maximize/Minimize ............................................................................................................. Cancel ................................................................................................................................... Reject .................................................................................................................................... Accept ................................................................................................................................... Move/Move To Toggle ......................................................................................................... Display Fields ....................................................................................................................... Active Point Coordinates Display ........................................................................................ Justification Point ................................................................................................................. Height and Width .................................................................................................................. Construct Point ............................................................................................................................ Midpoint/Any Point on Segment ................................................................................................. Extend/Reduce Run ..................................................................................................................... Distance and Direction ................................................................................................................. Runtime Setup .............................................................................................................................. 8. Design Commands ....................................................................................................................... Commands ............................................................................................................................ Using the Design Commands .......................................................................................................

Table of Contents

107 108 109 110 110 110 110 111 111 112 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 117 118 119 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 125 126 127 129 129 131

5

_ _______________
When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Place One-Line ............................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Route Around Vessel ................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Insert RCP .................................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Rotate Cross Section .................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Drop Point .......................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Equipment Pointer .............................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Define Active Point ...................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters .................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Manual Fitting .................................................................................................................... Conduit Sizing ............................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ........................................................................................... Insert One-Line Vertex ................................................................................................................ Place Field Routed Raceway ....................................................................................................... Define Duct Cross Section ........................................................................................................... Place Stub Up ............................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ 131 131 131 131 132 134 135 136 138 138 140 140 142 142 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 155 156 160 161 164 167 169

6

_ _______________
9. Modify Commands ...................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Commands ...................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Modify Element Commands ........................................................................................................ Using the Modify Element Commands ................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Annotate Element ................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ................................................................................................................. Copy Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Clone Element ...................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Segment ...................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Vertex ......................................................................................................... Propagate Element ................................................................................................................ Edit/Insert Manual Fitting ..................................................................................................... Modify One-Line .................................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule ............................................................................................................ Combine Coincident RCPs ................................................................................................... Delete Duplicate One-Lines .................................................................................................. Delete Element ...................................................................................................................... Remove RCP ........................................................................................................................ Delete Fitting ........................................................................................................................ Remove One-Line Vertex ..................................................................................................... Minimize Joints .................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

173 174 174 174 174 174 175 177 177 177 177 177 178 179 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 194 198 204 207 209 211 212 214 216 217 219 220

7

_ _______________
Change System Parameters ................................................................................................... Modify Group Commands ........................................................................................................... Topics ................................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Group Commands ................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Define Group ........................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Copy Element by Group ....................................................................................................... Annotate Element by Group ................................................................................................. Clone Element by Group ...................................................................................................... Propagate by Group .............................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule by Group ............................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Add Systems Group .............................................................................................................. Replace Systems by Group ................................................................................................... Minimize Joints by Group .................................................................................................... Delete Element by Group ..................................................................................................... 10. Setup Commands ....................................................................................................................... Using the Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Raceway Defaults .................................................................................................................. Define System .............................................................................................................................. Define One-Line Type ................................................................................................................. Set Symbology Control ................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Symbology Control ...................................................................................................................... Set Text Defaults .......................................................................................................................... Set Conduit Sizing Attributes ...................................................................................................... Create Cell Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Create Cell Commands ......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ 221 223 223 225 225 225 225 225 226 230 231 233 239 241 243 244 245 246 248 251 253 255 255 255 255 255 256 258 260 262 263 264 266 268 269 270 270

8

_ _______________
Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Create Model Cell ................................................................................................................. Create Equipment Pointer Cell ............................................................................................. Create Drop Point Cell .......................................................................................................... Model Commands ........................................................................................................................ Using the Model Commands ................................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Lock Model ........................................................................................................................... Move Model Annotation ....................................................................................................... Unlock Model ....................................................................................................................... Annotate Model .................................................................................................................... 11. Runtime Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... Using the Runtime Setup Commands .......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type Parameters ......................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................................................................... Set Active System ........................................................................................................................ Propagation Setup ........................................................................................................................ Set Active Levels ......................................................................................................................... Display Element Information ....................................................................................................... 12. Utilities Commands .................................................................................................................... Using the Utilities Commands ..................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Toggle Construction Display On/Off ........................................................................................... Highlight Element by Sector/Word ............................................................................................. Highlight Sector/Word With Filename .................................................................................

Table of Contents

270 270 270 271 274 277 280 281 281 281 281 281 282 283 284 285 287 288 288 288 288 288 289 294 295 297 299 301 303 305 305 305 305 305 306 307 307

9

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID ................................................................................................... Highlight ASID ID With Filename ....................................................................................... Highlight Element by Link .......................................................................................................... Highlight Link With Filename .............................................................................................. Highlight Propagation Errors ....................................................................................................... Display Sector/Word Value ......................................................................................................... Display Element Type and ASID ID ........................................................................................... Display Link ................................................................................................................................. Display System and One-Line Type ............................................................................................ Active Coordinate System ........................................................................................................... 13. Database Commands .................................................................................................................. Using the Database Commands ................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ Report ........................................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. 14. Raceway Processes ..................................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Batch File Option ............................................................................................ Unload Design ............................................................................................................................. Unload Sheet ................................................................................................................................ Cleanup Database ......................................................................................................................... Create Interference Envelope (default name) .............................................................................. Create Interference Envelope (given name) ................................................................................. 15. Eden Processes ........................................................................................................................... Compile EDEN Symbol ............................................................................................................... Delete EDEN Symbol .................................................................................................................. 309 309 312 312 314 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 322 322 322 322 323 325 326 327 329 331 332 335 336 338 340 342 344 347 349 351

10

_ _______________
Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN Symbol Library ......................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN User Functions .......................................................................................................... Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries ................................................................................................... Compress EDEN Symbol Library ............................................................................................... Extract EDEN Symbol From Library .......................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Extract EDEN User Function From Library ................................................................................ Edit EDEN Symbol File .............................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ 16. Integrated Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Integrated Commands .................................................................................................. When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Review PDS Attributes ............................................................................................................ Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.2 Reference PDS Model .............................................................................................................. Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.3 Window to Named PDS Item ................................................................................................... Options .................................................................................................................................. 16.4 Review PDS Clash ................................................................................................................... Parameters ............................................................................................................................. Appendix A: Appendix B: Error Messages ........................................................................................................... System/Application Manager Information .................................................................

Table of Contents

352 353 354 355 357 359 361 362 363 366 367 369 370 370 370 370 370 371 371 372 372 374 374 375 375 377 415 417 422

Customizing ................................................................................................................................. EE Environment Variables ..........................................................................................................

11

_ _______________
Appendix C: EE Databases .............................................................................................................. 425 426 427 427 428 430 430 430 432 432 433 433 433 434 435 435 436 437 437 438 438 439 440 440 441 443 444 445 446 448 449 449 449 450 451 454 454 454 455 456 457 458 Relational Interface System (RIS) ............................................................................................... Database and RIS Procedures ...................................................................................................... For New Users ...................................................................................................................... Update Schema (create_db) Process ............................................................................................ Reference Schema - General Description .................................................................................... Default Attributes ................................................................................................................. Keys ...................................................................................................................................... Codelists ............................................................................................................................... Approval Status Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Cardinal Codelist Table ........................................................................................................ Drawing Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................... Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table ....................................................................................... One-Line Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................. RCP Type Codelist Table ..................................................................................................... System Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Three-Line Type Codelist Table ........................................................................................... Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Units Codelist Table ............................................................................................................. Vendor Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table .......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table ............................................................................ Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table ......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table ...................................................................................... Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table ......................................................................... Yes-No Codelist Table ......................................................................................................... Fitting Environment Rules .................................................................................................... Project Schema - General Description ......................................................................................... Updating Schemas ....................................................................................................................... Updating a Project Schema ................................................................................................... Updating Reference Schemas ............................................................................................... Schema Names ...................................................................................................................... Modifying the Reference Schema ................................................................................................ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ............................................................... approv_status ........................................................................................................................ away_part .............................................................................................................................. away_spec ............................................................................................................................. cardinal ................................................................................................................................. cond_body ............................................................................................................................. cond_fill_calc .......................................................................................................................

12

............................. drawing ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ mscodelist ............................................................................... to_support ..................................................................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_code ....................................................... ee_units ................................................................................................... envelope ...................... vendor ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... light_fixture .................................................... cond_spec ................... ee_pcbl_insul ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... tl_subtype ................................................................................... cabsch_spec .............................................................. ee_pseudo_cable ............ manual_part ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. tl_fit_env .................................................................................................................. ee_pcbl_size ............................................................................................................................................................................. ee_cond_x_area ..................................... EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ................. Table of Contents 459 460 461 461 462 462 463 463 464 464 464 465 465 465 466 466 467 467 467 468 469 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 476 477 478 478 479 480 480 480 481 481 482 483 484 484 485 487 487 489 491 491 13 ........................................................................................................................... drawing ........................ tray_spec ......................................................................................................................................................... one_line ............................................................................................................... ee_yes_no ......... tl_qual ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... wway_spec ............................................... tl_type ..........................................................................................................................................................................................._ _______________ cond_part .............................. ee_pcbl_config ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... wway_part .................................................................................................................... ol_type ............................................... ee_graphic_only ............................................................................................................................................. ee_pcbl_color ................................................................ ee_unique .................................................................................................................... drop_point .......................... drawing_type .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... rcp_type ............................................................ to_equip ........................ pullbox .................................................................... project ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... mscolumns .............. rcp ............................................................................................................................................................................................ duct_spec . ee_system ............................................................................................................................................................................................... tray_part ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ cndsch_spec ................................................................................................................................. panel ........................................................... drop_point ............................................................................................................................................................... mscatalog ......................................................................................... ee_pcbl_volt ................................................................................................................................

................................................................................... mscatalog ........................................................................dat .............................................................................. eden..................................................................................................................................................... fitting ........................................................................ straight .................................................................................................... rcp_to_drw .................................dat ...................................... Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files ............................................................................. ee_pseudo_cable ................................................................... EE Raceway File Structure .................................................................................................................................................................... Appendix F: EE File Structure ................ Appendix D: Specification .............. 14 ..................................................................................................................................................... Update Reference Schema ........................................._ _______________ duct_fill ..................................................................................... ol_to_sys ......................................................................................... one_line ...................................................................................................... rcp_to_sys ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ EE Nucleus File Structure ......... print.........................................................................................................dat ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Available Fittings ..................unl Files ......................................... process................... Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation ..............dat ................................................................. report................................................................................dat ........................................................................................................................ str_to_sys ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Symbol Processor File .............................................................................................. Sample .............................................. envelope .......................................... fit_to_sys .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. rule_chk......... to_support .................................................................................................................................dat ............................................ project ................................................................................................................. manager................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ rcp ......................................................................................................................................... ee_system ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. mscolumns ................................................................... sys_to_drw .................................................................................. panel_to_drw ...................................................................................................................................... panel ............. 492 492 493 493 494 495 496 497 498 498 500 500 501 501 502 502 503 504 505 505 507 507 509 510 512 513 513 519 520 524 531 531 533 534 535 536 537 Preparing the Specifications ...................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Create Schema Form ................ Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) ......................................................................................... Associated Software/Files ..................................................................................................................................................... Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) ............................................................................................................................................................... Associated Software/Files ................................................................................................................................................................................................... Drop Schema Form ..... Appendix I: rway......... Information Output: .......................................... Information Output: ................ Appendix J: Reports ................................................................................. Table of Contents 539 543 545 545 547 547 547 547 548 548 548 549 549 549 550 550 551 551 552 552 552 553 554 555 556 556 557 557 558 559 559 560 560 Schema Information Form ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Associated Software/Files ........................._ _______________ Appendix H: alias......................................................................................... Alter Schema Form ......................................................................................................................... Associated Software/Files ..................... Information Output: .................................................................................................................. Information Output: ........ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) .... Set Form ......................................................................................... Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager ..................................................... Table Information Form ..............................................................................................................cmd file ........................................................... 15 .................................. Data Definition Form ......................................................................... RIS Report Processing ........................................ Drop Table Form ................ Create Table Form ..................... Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) .............................................................................................................................................................................................. Project Drawing List (drwlst) ................................................................................................................................................................................................cmd ................ Associated Software/Files ............................................................................................. Information Output: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Schema File Form ................................................. Alter Table Form ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume ...................................... Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) .........................

..... 561 565 566 567 571 573 581 In this Appendix ......................... Appendix N: EE Configure .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Glossary ...._ _______________ Appendix L: Appendix M: RIS Schema Definition File ................................................. Database Edit Functions ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... EE Manager ............. Index ................................

up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’s products.) Mailing Address Intergraph Process. If you are outside the United States. Intergraph General Information All countries — 1-256-730-2000 Training Registration 1-800-766-7701 (U. services.com/ppo/services/support. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www.asp. Table of Contents Support For the lasest Support Services information. Our web address is: http://www.S. use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.S. If you are outside of the United States. 17 . Intergraph Directory The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated.intergraph.intergraph. convenient.S. Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison.com.com.com. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.intergraph. please call your local Intergraph office. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph._ _______________ If You Need Assistance Intergraph Online Our web site brings you fast.A. and direction. please call your local Intergraph office. Alabama 35758 U.

_ _______________ Documentation Contacts We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. let us know. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process. Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed. AL 35758 18 .

This document is designed as a reference. Knowledge of 3-D design systems is helpful but not necessary. along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. modify. these include Informix. a glossary. numbered sections. appendices. you should be familiar with a text editor. grouped according to function. it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow. Document Prerequisites / Audience This document is intended for designers who have a working knowledge of the standard interactive graphics system. much of this document is devoted to a description of those commands. Related Documents/Products MicroStation  software is required to operate EE Raceway. such as vi or EMACS. Because the design process is controlled by executing commands. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific EE Raceway function. Oracle. EE Raceway is a MicroStation graphics based software and lets you design. Information about MicroStation capabilities can be found in the following documents: MicroStation Reference Guide MicroStation User’s Guide Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate EE Raceway._ _______________ Preface Document Purpose Preface This document is a reference guide for Intergraph Corporation’s Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Modeling tm software package. It is recommended that you work through the EE Raceway Modeling Course Guide to learn the basic concepts of the product. and an index. Currently. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide About this Document This document contains front matter. and model electrical raceway systems in a three-dimensional environment. 19 . Also. and Ingres.

February 2003 Section 1 Section 2 Sections 3 & 4 Provides an overview of the product and the document. Describes the typical workflow using EE Raceway. Lists any exceptions made to the certification. Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed. 20 .txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. For a fixes release. forms. Section 5 Section 6 Sections 7-16 Ordering Information To order documents: Within the United States. Provides special notices to the customer. Provides installation instructions. Describes the graphics environment for the product. Describe the command groups and operating sequences of each command within the command groups._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Describe the product environment. This includes information on the screen display. contact the Intergraph subsidiary or distributor from whom you purchased your workstation. Additional Information The following informational files are delivered with the EE Raceway software in the win32app\ingr\eerway directory. This includes information on accessing the product and creating and manipulating product files. For international locations. File Name readme. menus. and on-line Help. the files which have been modified are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. Lists the names and dates of the files in the current release. contact your Customer Engineer or Sales Account Representative.

For example. 21 . For example. For example. or groups of related information. Choose File > Open to load a new file. For example. which is an explanation of what the software is doing. phrases. For example. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words. The text is placed in the viewing plane. Preface Typefaces Italic Indicates a system response. Key in original.dat to load the ASCII file. or dialog box title.rpt file. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name._ _______________ General Conventions This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases. parameter name. Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message. The ASCII report is stored in the layout. Bold Indicates a command name. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in. which requires an action be taken by the user.

Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form. 22 .February 2003 Symbols This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note — Important supplemental information. then K. More information — indicates there is additional or related information. Need a hint — used with activities and labs. Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators. ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC. To press the Escape key.k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z. Keyboard Conventions The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises. Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information. which map menu selections to key combinations.

To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. Preface Double-click Type Key in 23 . Double-click on the file original. For example. To key a character string into a text box.dat to load it into the new surface. right-button chord. For example. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor. In a dialog box._ _______________ Terminology Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. such as selecting toggle buttons. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. then click Delete to remove it from the directory. you tentative-select by pressing a left-button. Click Apply to save the changes. Select the line string to define the graphic template. pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. you would select items to define parameters. For example. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action. In addition. Select the file original. After selecting an item. Selecting does not initiate an action. If you are using the Windows NT operating system. you click the action you want to affect the item.dat from the list box. For example.

February 2003 24 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Separate sections outline the preparation and responsibilities for the system and/or application manager. You can also use EE Raceway models as background drawings for designs created in other PDS facility design disciplines. 25 . Material takeoff – Extracts a list of material required to construct a raceway model. Interference detection – Creates the raceway component interference envelope files for input to the PDS interference detection task. modify. including: Model building – Uses either a centerline or a three-line component graphic to build a three-dimensional raceway model. It describes the basic workflow for creating an electrical raceway model. EE Raceway serves a variety of general purposes._ _______________ 1. and model electrical raceway systems in a threedimensional environment. provides descriptions of EE Raceway commands and processes. Introduction About the Reference Guide This document. Introduction 1. the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide. Introduction EE Raceway allows you to design.

These and other skills can be learned in Microstation Training materials: Fit view Window area Zoom in & out File design Compress Update Toggle between virtual screens Turn views on & off 26 .February 2003 Basic Workstation Skills The following basic workstation drafting skills are necessary to use the EE Raceway Modeling product._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The software covered includes baseline and application software. Installation Instructions This section is an instruction sheet both for initial installation and for updating the workstation software. EMACS. all projects have been archived. or Ingres. You must be familiar with a text editor. or Notepad. If you are updating. Download/Install Overview This chapter covers the following topics pertaining to installation/upgrading: Upgrading the Workstation Installation Procedure Databases 27 ._ _______________ 2. You will need to consult individual documentation for these products for detailed information. such as vi. 2. On-line Informix. Products will be used with any one of the following databases: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. Oracle. and EE Raceway Modeling. You must be familiar with the PDS Loader. Electrical Engineer (EE) Nucleus software. Installation Instructions Assumptions The following assumptions have been made in the writing of this section.

followed by the EE application products. For the purposes of this installation. — Placing both project and reference databases remotely on a server. or remotely on a server. The chapter also outlines the basic workflow for database setup and refers you to appropriate database documentation. you should load system nucleus software. Based on these two setups._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . it describes the applications software necessary for each of three possible configurations: the stand-alone workstation.February 2003 Upgrading the Workstation This section describes the loading procedure and details the software you will need to operate your system. the workstation as server. you have three options: — Placing both project and reference databases locally on each workstation. Additionally. 28 . — Placing the project database locally on each workstation and the reference database remotely on a server. and the server-client workstation. you must select the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) you plan to use and decide where to locate it on your system. First. There are several things you must do before loading any software to your workstation. A database can reside locally on each workstation. You must also know before beginning to download products that the order in which you load them is very important. followed by system application software (including EE Nucleus).

Double-click on setup. and serial number (as delivered). First. company. including a valid serial number. 2. Download/Install 3. based on your system configuration. Pressing Enter will have no effect until all fields have been entered. The Continue button will remain inactive until a valid serial number has been keyed in. Select Continue to invoke the Intergraph Registration Data form. follow these steps to download all of the desired products to a Windows NT/2000/XP system. 4. This will invoke the product selection form.exe to invoke the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. This may be a networked drive. 29 . the loader delivered to stand-alone EE Raceway sites may vary slightly._ _______________ Installation Procedure This section’s examples assume that you are running the loader delivered with PDS. or it may be on your local system. This form expects your user name. Once you know what application software you need. connect to the drive on which the distribution software resides. Select Continue when the button is no longer inactive. 1. Installation Procedure 2.

or server). you must provide the installation path. When all software to be loaded has been selected. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. If local is selected. you will be asked to select the Installation Type (local. client.February 2003 5. Place an X next to the software you wish to install.) When all information has been provided. you must key in the path to the location to which you want to install the software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select OK. select Load Components. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path.) If client is selected. Among other installation options that vary according to product. This will invoke the installation data form for each selection. 30 . If server is selected. as well as path to the software on the server. you must provide the name of the server which will be hosting the session. A message box will appear. This will return control to the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. and a local path to the icon associated with the software.

Set your user environment variables. This program group contains the EE Manager. EE Readme. Before you can enter the EE environment. 2. and it needs to be placed somewhere that it will not be over-written when you next update the software.cfg file. Download/Install 8. Use the browse command to locate and open the new ee. you will need to set at least the following variables: 31 . Copy the ee. Before executing the software. Double-click on the EE Configure icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. (Your login directory will be fine. the EENUC (Common) program group will be created. The Reset command should always be used at this point to ensure that the environment variables in the display window are those that belong to the file you just selected.cfg file that you copied in the earlier step.txt. When the software has successfully loaded. and not to a previously-selected file.cfg file found in the win32app/ingr/eenuc directory into another directory not in the EE or PDS structure. A message box will display that tells you which products are being loaded. EE Configure. and EE Nucleus icons. EE Help._ _______________ Installation Procedure Select Yes to continue. 6. 9. you will modify this copied file. otherwise select No. you must set the environment variables in your ee.) 7.

select OK to save the modifications to the ee._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 PROJECT_LOCATION EE_SCHEMA EE_REFDB DB_TYPE Select the variable to be set. then select Set. After all variables have been set properly for your environment. To modify the value of that variable. 32 . This will close the EE Configure utility. This displays the current value and description for that variable.cfg file. and no more changes are needed. key the desired value into the Value field.

— For detailed information about creating and updating databases. Download your RDBMS product and the Relational Interface System (RIS) software. see your individual RDBMS documentation for installation instructions and general information about the product. — You will do this through the EE Environment and the RIS Schema Manager product. and 202 for reference schema. 1. 4. See the RIS Reference Manual for information about this process or look in the RISNOTES*. Also. see Appendix C of this reference guide or refer to your individual RDBMS documentation. — For information about using the RIS Schema Manager product. Download/Install 33 . Only after these entries are in the table will the user be able to update the project and reference database for use with PDS. — Decide where on the system to locate your databases. — Refer to the Software Requirements section for information on database location options. 2. — For information about accessing RIS Schema Manager._ _______________ Databases This section provides an overview of the workflow involved in creating a database and schemas. Create new databases/upgrade existing databases. Create empty RIS schemas. Databases 2. see the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. 3. Also. see the section entitled Database Utilities in this reference guide. In order for the EE Raceway project to integrate to PDS there must be two entries in pdtable_102 corresponding to type_of_rdb_data: 200 for project schema. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager in this reference guide or refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. Select and install the RDBMS you will use. and you should consult your individual RDBMS and RIS documentation for detailed instructions on database setup. — See the section of this guide entitled Software Requirements for information about the RIS products.* file in the /usr#/informix/release directory for details about creating databases in ANSI mode. — Informix users must create all databases in ANSI mode with this release. What follows is a very basic outline.

The Database Utilities section contains instructions for updating both project and reference schemas.February 2003 5. — See the Database Utilities section in this reference guide. Update your project and reference schemas. — You will use the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment to accomplish this._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 34 .

When you key in EE. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) products are accessed through the Electrical Engineer (EE) form. 35 . All EE drawings are organized by project. To enter the Electrical Engineer form. click Electrical Raceway Environment on the main PD_Shell form._ _______________ 3. EE Environment A project is a group of related electrical drawings and their associated database which you create. The Project Menu and other EE Environment menus provide easy access to all the product functions. the Project Menu displays: 3.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select another option. Listing Area .displays messages from the software. 36 .for keying in or displaying data about a project. To edit information you key in to input fields. the necessary information in the input fields in the input/output area. For some options you will need to know net addresses for the input data boxes. check with your system manager. and then to select. These options can display additional forms or menus. use standard EMACS commands.control the EE form.a list of options which require additional input or other selections before you can continue. or key in.February 2003 Using the Electrical Engineer Menus The following areas make up the Electrical Engineer form: Menu Icons . Options List . If you do not know the appropriate addresses. To turn off an active option. The basic procedure for using EE menus is first to select an option from the options list.lists available project and design files Input/Output Area . Message Area .

Message Area Once you have selected and confirmed a option. you are not allowed to print a design file from the Drawing Utility form._ _______________ Scrolling Through Listings The listing area in the EE form provides you access to the projects and design files you will manage using the available menu options. If the bar fills the space above the arrows. in any combination: Confirm (√) accepts the current form settings. provide the necessary input. Remember that the basic procedure for executing a given process is to select a form option. The menus will not allow you to perform illegal operations. Summary The best way to familiarize yourself with the environment form and their functions is simply to practice using the available features. EE Environment Cancel (X) exits the EE application entirely. You can monitor lengthy processes by reviewing the message area. Reset returns you to the previous form and cancels the current form settings. 37 . When listings fill more than one page. For example. 3. the item you select from the listing area will display in the appropriate input field. The bar above the arrows indicates where you are in the listing. operating or error messages will display in the message area at the bottom of the form. When a particular option is active. all of the available listings are currently displayed. Using the Electrical Engineer Menus Icons There are three icons that can display on EE forms. you can scroll up and down the list using the scroll bar. and executes the active process. and then select Confirm (√).

Copy — Copies existing project files to new projects._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — EE Product Menu — Displays (and allows you to select from) those EE applications that are loaded on the workstation. Archive — Archives EE project files to a floppy disk or network nodes.February 2003 Project Menu Options The individual Project Menu options are discussed in the following sections: Create — Creates new EE projects. Delete — Deletes EE project files. Enter — Accesses available EE applications and enters existing EE projects. 38 . Restore — Restores archived EE project files from a floppy disk or network nodes. if there are more than one. Database Utilities — Accesses EE Update Schema utilities and RIS Schema Manager.

The Project name field displays below the scrolling area. Steps 1. Select the Project name field. which itself can span multiple products. and key in the new project name. Create 3. 2. see RIS Schema Manager. Multiple files can exist within a single project. 39 .prj extension is automatically appended to the project file name when you select Confirm (√). EE Environment Field Descriptions Project name — This field allows you to enter the project name in uppercase or lowercase letters. 3. though uppercase letters are automatically converted to lowercase._ _______________ Create This option creates a project in which your design file(s) reside. Your project name should have eight or fewer characters. page 553 . For information about creating a project schema. Select Confirm (√) to create the project. Select Create from the Project Menu option list. A . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Create process. You may also want to create a new project schema when you create a project. so you are not required to key in this extension.

if one has been defined. You may also key project names into this field. 40 . You can override the default selection by keying in the desired schema name. and the schema passwords. You can override the default selection by keying in another schema name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Enter This option accesses a specified project. and is the first step in entering the Electrical Engineer environment. You will need to input the names of the project. if they exist. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_SCHEMA. Project schema — This field is automatically updated with the project schema name associated with the selected project name. depending on the setting of the appropriate Password Echo toggle. Reference schema — This field is automatically updated with the reference schema name associated with the selected project name. Schema password — This field accepts a password for entering the respective schema. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_REFDB. This field may or may not display the password once it has been entered. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. Field Descriptions Project name — This field reflects the project name that is selected in the project listing area. the project and reference schemas.

— OR — Select the Project name field. 4. EE Environment 41 . the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the Drawing Menu. if needed. 2. Select Enter from the Project Menu option list. leave these fields blank. and key in a project name. Select Confirm (√). The EE Product Menu displays. 3. 3. Enter Password Echo — This toggle controls whether or not the password is displayed in the respective password fields. and key in the password. see RIS Schema Manager. Select a project from the listing area. For information about schema passwords. Enter schema passwords if they were created for either schema. Identify the appropriate Schema password field. If no password was defined for the schemas. page 553 . The project listing displays. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. The project schema (defaults to project name) and the current reference schema display automatically. You can make modifications to these fields._ _______________ Steps 1.

(See the chapter entitled EE Raceway Environment for more information about the Design Menu.February 2003 Product Menu The Product Menu form displays all of the available EE products on your workstation. Select the desired EE application from the Product Menu form. Only the EE products you actually have installed on your workstation will be displayed on this menu. The Design Menu displays. only the EE Raceway product is on menu. available for use. then the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the selected product’s Design Menu. Steps 1. If only one EE product exists on your workstation.) 42 . In this example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

3. Select Copy from the Project Menu option list. 4. this cannot be the name of a project that already exists. and key in a project to be copied. Select Confirm (√) to copy the project._ _______________ Copy This option copies all the files within an existing project to a new project. Copy project to — Key in the destination project name. — OR — Select the Copy project from input field. 2. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Copy process. EE Environment Steps 1. and key in the new project name. 3. 43 . Copy Field Descriptions Copy project from — Key in the source project name (or select it from the list). Select a project to be copied from the listing area. You cannot key in the name of an existing project in the Copy project to field. Select the Copy project to input field.

February 2003 Delete This option completely deletes all the files and databases within an existing project. and key in the project name. Select Delete from the Project Menu option list. — OR — Select the Project name field. 44 . 2. Steps 1. 3. a warning displays indicating that you should drop the schema corresponding to the database contained within the project. Select the project name from the listing area. Field Descriptions Project name — Key in (or select from the list) the project to be deleted. If a database exists in the project directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select Confirm (√).

If a database does not exist in the project directory. 3. see RIS Schema Manager._ _______________ Delete Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project and its database. 45 . a warning displays indicating that you are about to delete an entire project. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. EE Environment Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project. For information about dropping a schema. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Delete process. page 553 . while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function.

Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the destination node. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system to receive the project.February 2003 Archive This option stores an entire project and associated database on a network host or on a floppy disk. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. The project name is appended to this path. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the destination node of the project. 46 . The path must exist on the remote node._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the destination node.

Archive 3. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information.EErc file. EE_USERNAME._ _______________ Steps 1. 2. you must have a formatted floppy disk placed in the disk drive. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle.) When archiving using a floppy disk. and key in a project name. Select the storage facility for your project files. 4. EE Environment 47 . using the global symbols EE_NODENAME. contact your system administrator.EErc file. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Archive process. user name. Select the Project name from the scrolling area. — OR — Select the Project name field. (If you need more information about the . and EE_REMDIR. Default values for the remote node name. Select Archive from the Project Menu option list. 3. Select Confirm (√) to begin archiving. and remote directory may be assigned in the user’s .

Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the node of origin. you cannot restore a project that is currently listed in the listing area. The project on the floppy will overwrite the project in your directory.) Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. you can restore a project that is currently listed in your listing area. A password is required if you use the TCP option._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . A password is required if you are using the TCP option. When restoring from a floppy.February 2003 Restore This option retrieves an entire project and any associated database from a network or a floppy disk. 48 . When restoring from a network. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the project’s node of origin. Be sure to verify that archived project will not overwrite existing projects with the same name. You must delete or rename the current project to complete the restore process. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system from which to receive the project. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the node of origin.

Select Confirm (√) to begin restoring. 2._ _______________ Steps 1. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. 3. EE Environment 49 . Select the Project name field. Indicate the storage location for your project. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Restore process. Restore 3. When restoring from a floppy disk. and key in a project name. 4. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. you must have the disk in the disk drive. Select Restore from the Project Menu.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . RIS schema utilities Update Project Schema Update Reference Schema 50 .February 2003 Database Utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager environment and the EE schema updating processes. The Database Utilities options are described in detail in the following sections.

you must have an existing database and user name. select the RIS schema utilities option from the Database Utilities menu. To access the RIS Schema Manager form. RIS schema utilities 3. 2. and maintain project and reference database schemas. Before using this utility. 51 . RIS Schema Manager. see RIS Schema Manager. With this utility you can create. page 553 supplies examples of Create Schema input for several RDBMSs. For more information. Steps 1. Proceed through the necessary RIS Schema Manager processes. EE Environment Normally this is a procedure for a system or application manager. drop. page 553 ._ _______________ RIS schema utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager form. Consult your relational database management system (RDBMS) documentation for specific information about database installation.

see EE Databases. Schema name — Defines the project database’s schema name. select the field and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. To display the schema password input. if one exists. To enter the schema name. You can update the schema with multiple products.February 2003 Update Project Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing project schema. page 425 . Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. To enter the password. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. select the field and key in the name of an existing project schema. Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. though doing so will slow processing time. set the toggle to Echo. For additional information about updating schemas. Password Echo/No echo — This toggle defines if you want to display the schema password input. Application checkboxes – These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Schema password — Defines the schema password. 52 . Error file — Defines the error processing message file name.

The update process displays the message Processing . select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. Return to step 1. When Update project schema finishes processing. it will display one of two message files to the screen: — If the schema is updated without errors. see Process. select the field. You can redefine the defaults by editing this .EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\.. 4. EE Environment 1. Processing toggle — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. and key in the desired filenames. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. For more information about operating modes. and key in the full pathname for those files. Sql and Cmd file — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. 3. Select the Update project schema option from the Database Utilities form. Set up the form to meet your specifications.EErc file. or Batch. Background. or export EE_CUSTOM_SQL and EE_CUSTOM_CMD for the customized SQL and command files. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining your input. To change the displayed default files.msg). page 64 ._ _______________ You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. The Update project schema form displays: 2. 53 . The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\.EErc file.. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. Select Confirm (√) to update the project schema. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). Update Project Schema Steps 3.

You can also access these message files._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form. see Output. page 89 . For more information. using the Output option on the Utilities form. located in the current project’s /tmp directory.February 2003 — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. 54 .err). the system displays an error message file (create_db. 6. 5. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update project schema form.

For more information about operating modes. Application checkboxes — These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. though doing so will slow processing time. To change the displayed default files. see Process. page 425 . Background. You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. Password Echo/No echo — This toggles define if you want to display the schema password. Schema password — Define the schema password. set the toggle to Echo. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. or export EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL and EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD for the customized SQL and command files. Processing mode — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. select the field. and key in the full pathname for those files. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name.EErc file. select the field. if one exists. EE Environment 55 .EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\.EErc file. You can update the schema with multiple products. see EE Databases. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. and key in the desired filenames. To enter information. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). To enter information. and key in the name of an existing reference schema._ _______________ Update Reference Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing reference schema. For additional information about updating schemas. 3. Sql and Cmd File — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. Update Reference Schema Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . page 64 . Schema name — Defines the reference database’s schema name. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. or Batch. To display the schema password input. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. select the field. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options.

. the system displays an error message file (create_db..February 2003 Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . it will display one of two message files. Return to step 1. — If the schema is updated without errors. The update process displays the message Processing . 4. Set up the form to meet your specifications. 2.err). — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining the form parameters. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. The Update reference schema form displays. 56 . 3. Select the Update reference schema option from the Database Utilities form.msg). Select Confirm (√) to update the reference schema. — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. When Update reference schema finishes processing.

_ _______________

Update Reference Schema

You can also access these message files, located in the current project’s /tmp directory, using the Output option on the Utilities form. For more information, see Output, page 89 . 5. 6. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update reference schema form. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form.

3. EE Environment

57

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

58

_ _______________
4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment
When you select the Enter option from the Project Menu, one of two menus display: The EE Environment Product Menu, if you have multiple EE products installed on the workstation (see Product Menu, page 42 for more information). — OR —

Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment

The EE Raceway Design Menu.

4. EERWAY Environment

The rest of this chapter describes all the options on this menu. If you are a new user, you may want to skip all but the Create and Design options.

Commands
The following sections describe each option in detail and show the menu as it displays when each option is selected. Create — Allows you to create a design file.

59

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Design — Allows you to enter a design file and attaches the EE menus. Process — Allows you to list and select EE Raceway processes. It also processes work on design files and/or databases. EDEN — Allows you to design your own symbols for raceway elements. Report — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. Rule — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. Utilities — Allows you to access functions needed to manipulate EE Raceway design, rule, report, and message files.

60

_ _______________
Create
This option creates design files, based on a specified seed file.

Create

When you create a drawing, you are actually copying a seed file (a template). The seed file contains basic information that EE Raceway uses. A seed file can also contain customized information like company borders and logos. EE Raceway is delivered with both a metric (mseed.dgn) and English seed file (seed.dgn). You can also use seed files that were generated in a Plant Design (PDS) environment. EE Raceway will convert PDS seed files to raceway design files the first time you enter the EE Raceway graphics environment.

4. EERWAY Environment

Steps
1. Select Create from the Design Menu. If there is only one seed file, it is displayed as the default. If there is more than one seed file available, the listing area displays all these files. By default, the seed file subdirectory is win32app\ingr\eerway\dgn\seed. You can change this directory by redefining the EERWAY_SEED symbol in the directory or in your login directory. 2. Select the seed file. Choose a seed file either by accepting the default (this happens automatically when you select Confirm (√)) or by selecting a seed file from the scrolling area. 3. Select the drawing name input box and key in a drawing name and, optionally, a file extension.

61

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 A file extension of .dgn is automatically appended to the drawing name if you do not enter your own file extension. 4. Select Confirm (√). The drawing name and its file extension become the filename of the drawing. The drawing is added to the active project. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Create process.

62

_ _______________
Design
This option accesses the graphics environment, taking you into a specified existing design file.

Design

Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Design from the Design Menu. Select the drawing name from the listing area. Select Confirm (√). The system invokes the graphics environment. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Design process.

4. EERWAY Environment

63

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Process
This option accesses all available EERWAY processes. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database.

Overview
This section provides general information about running all processes. See Raceway Processes, page 331 for more information about individual processes. The screen above lists the processes currently delivered with the product. The system manager can add or delete processes from the list by modifying the process.dat file in win32app\eerway\data.

64

_ _______________
When you enter a specific process, an input screen displays.

Process

You must key in any information not already shown as defaults. You can override default values by keying in your own information. All drawings are displayed on the screen scrolling area. An asterisk (*), when placed in the Enter Drawing Name input field, is a wild card character which can be used to list a subset of your drawings. For example, if you enter a*, all drawings beginning with the letter "a" will be displayed. The ? character can also be used as a wild card for a single character. Once you have entered all necessary information, select Confirm (√) to execute the process.

Operating Modes
The Processing toggle allows you to select the operating mode for a process. The default mode is Foreground, but you can toggle between that option and the Background and Batch options. A process in Foreground runs immediately, and you do not regain control until the process is finished. In other words, you cannot perform other functions within the same window in which you are running the process. A process in Background runs immediately, and you regain control immediately. A process in Batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. After providing this information, you regain control immediately.

4. EERWAY Environment

65

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Entering Time in Batch Mode
If you select Batch mode, an input box displays, allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the process to run. The time can be entered as 1, 2 or 4 digits. One- and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours, four digits to be hours and minutes. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). The suffix AM or PM may be appended; otherwise, a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. The system also recognizes the names NOON, MIDNIGHT, NOW and NEXT. Optionally, you can specify a date using either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters). The system recognizes the words TODAY and TOMORROW. If you input no date, the system assumes it should run the job TODAY if the specified hour is greater than the current hour, and TOMORROW if the specified hour is less than the current hour. Legitimate commands include:

0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday

Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Process from the Design Menu. Select a process from the listing area. Select Confirm to invoke the input form for the specified process. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Process option.

66

_ _______________
EDEN
The following screen displays the Eden options delivered with this version of EE Raceway. The system manager can add or delete displayed options by modifying the eden.dat file.

EDEN

Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for straights, fittings, and special parts.

This section provides general information about running all Eden program options. For detailed information about individual Eden options, see Eden Processes, page 347 .

4. EERWAY Environment

67

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 When you select an option from the Eden menu (and confirm the selection using Confirm (√)), an input screen displays.

You must key in all information not displayed as defaults. If necessary, you can override the default values that already display, and key in your own information. Once you have entered all necessary information, select Confirm (√) to begin the option process.

Operating Modes
A box on the right side of the menu allows you to select the operating mode for the selected option. The default mode is foreground. The circular arrow on the right indicates that this box leads to other selections. These selections are the three methods of running an option: foreground, background, and batch. An option in foreground mode runs immediately, and you cannot regain control until the process is finished. In other words, you cannot perform other functions within the window in which the option is running. An option in background mode runs immediately, and you regain control immediately. A process in batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. After providing this information, you regain control immediately.

68

MIDNIGHT. otherwise. it will run the job TODAY. The system accepts the words TODAY and TOMORROW. EDEN The time can be entered as 1. the system assumes that if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. it will run the job TOMORROW. four digits to be hours and minutes. an input box displays.and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. and if the specified hour is less than the current hour. The special names NOON. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday 4. You can specify an optional date in the form of either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (spelled in its entirety or abbreviated to three characters). allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the option to begin processing. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. 2 or 4 digits. NOW and NEXT are also recognized._ _______________ Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select batch mode. One. If you input no date. EERWAY Environment 69 . a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute).

February 2003 Report This option accesses the standard EERWAY reports. See Reports. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. 70 . The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . These reports report on the project and reference databases. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports. You must load the project database before running any reports.dat file (win32app\eerway\data).

allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. Select a report from the listing area. 3. Select Report from the Design Menu. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. an input screen displays. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. EERWAY Environment 71 . Report Key in any information that is not supplied by default. 2. To change the output filename. You can change the name of the output file or error file.) If you want to save reports throughout a project. select the output file box and key in a new name. the new file will overwrite that file. you should name the output files yourself. Steps 1. 4. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Report option._ _______________ When you process a report.

The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. 72 . For instance. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction.February 2003 A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output.

_ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This option accesses the standard EERWAY Rule Checks. 4. You must load the project database before running any rule checks. see Reports. Overview This section contains general information about running all EERWAY rule checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. page 545 . For more detailed information about each rule check. EERWAY Environment 73 . The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk.

Steps 1. 74 .February 2003 When you process a rule check. If you want to save reports throughout a project. the new file will destroy the previously created file. Select Rule from the Design Menu. 2. The name of the rule check report displays at the top. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields. Select a rule check report from the listing area. an input screen displays. you should name the output files yourself. or change that information according to your specifications. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Rule option. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously.

_ _______________ Utilities Utilities This option manipulates files within a project. All manipulations are performed on those files residing in the current project’s directories. 75 . the Drawing Utility Menu displays. 4. Each column will list a different subdirectory. EERWAY Environment Files in the current project sub-directories will be listed in four columns. When you select Utilities from the Design Menu.

chk) . 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .rpt) .All files output by Raceway processes. (<project_name>/eerway/rpt) Rule (. Archive — Archives a file to a network node or floppy disk. (<project_name>/eerway/tmp) Utilities options will operate on all of the above file types. Send — Sends a file to a network node.All report files generated by rule checks reports. (<project_name>/eerway/chk) Message (. Restore — Restores an archived file from a network node or floppy disk. and error files generated by standard reports and rule check reports. Steps 1. Purge — Purges (permanently deletes) a file.February 2003 Drawing (. screen. 76 . Copy — Copies a file. or plotter. Output — Outputs a file to a printer. Enter necessary form information for the active option. (<project_name>/eerway/dgn) Report (. and then select the file(s) on which to perform that option. Select Utilities from the Design Menu. Commands The commands on the Drawing Utility Menu are described in their respective sections later in this chapter. Rename — Renames a file.All drawings. Receive — Receives a file from a network node.tmp) .dgn) . Undelete — Undeletes a file (unmark for purging). Select the desired option from the Drawing Utility Menu. Delete — Deletes a file (mark for purging). 3.All report files generated by standard reports.

— OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the active option._ _______________ 4. Select Confirm (√) to accept the settings and execute the active option. Utilities 4. EERWAY Environment 77 .

Copy file to — This field displays the name that the copy (destination) file will be called. key in a unique destination file name into this field.dgn. and so forth) to the new file. elect a file from the list.February 2003 Copy This option copies an existing file to another file. . Field Descriptions Copy file from — This field displays the name of the file to be copied._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must specify a unique filename for the destination file. 78 . or key in the name of the file to be copied.rpt. Copy DOES NOT automatically append a file extension (.

but can be undeleted (that is. Note that files you delete with this option take up storage space. 4. To physically remove the file from the workstation. you must select the Purge option. EERWAY Environment 79 ._ _______________ Delete Delete This option removes your access to a specified file. have access returned to them) until you actively Purge them.

you cannot undelete them with this option. Once you have removed files using Purge. 80 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Undelete This option returns your access to a file that you removed using Delete.

Purge Field Descriptions Purge Files toggle — This toggle allows you to choose between purging ALL files that have been deleted. place a data point on it. you can select specific files from the list by placing a data point on them. To de-select a selected file. 4. or no files at all._ _______________ Purge This option permanently removes all the files you marked for deletion using the Delete option. selected files that have been deleted. EERWAY Environment 81 . Once you Purge a file. you cannot recover it. When the toggle is set to Select files to purge.

February 2003 Rename This option changes the name of an existing file. You can select the file from the list. 82 . Field Descriptions Rename file from — This field displays the current filename._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Rename file to — Key in the name that you desire to rename the current file. It does not automatically append a file extension (. and so forth) to the new filename. .dgn. or key the name into this field.rpt.

Send Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the remote machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Be sure to include the entire filename including the extension (for example. turn on the IGDS toggle. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be sent.dgn)._ _______________ Send This option copies a file to a network node. EERWAY Environment 83 . Otherwise. 4. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the receiving machine. the setting should be No IGDS. Doing so will store the file in contiguous blocks on the VAX. or key in the appropriate name. test1. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to send the file. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to send the file. The password may or may not be visible in the field. If you are sending a design file to a VAX. You can either select the desired file from the list. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. IGDS/No IGDS toggle — This toggle should be set to the IGDS setting when sending to a VAX system.

Receive will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are receiving. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be received._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 84 . TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines.February 2003 Receive This option copies a file from a network node. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to receive the file. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the sending machine. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the sending machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. otherwise the file will be placed in the <project_name>/eerway directory. or key in the appropriate name. You can either select the desired file from the list. Be sure to specify the complete filename. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to receive the file. specify the local path to the file. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the sending machine. Also. including its extension.

tmp) — This field expects the path to the desired location of the file being received. EERWAY Environment 85 . Receive 4. rpt._ _______________ Local path (dgn. chk.

Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine.February 2003 Archive This option creates a backup copy of a file to a network node or to a floppy disk. The password may or may not be visible in the field. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. page 46 . For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to archive the file. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to archive the file. 86 . Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the desired name of the archive file. Toggle between Network and Floppy by selecting the toggle button. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. see the description of Archive in Archive. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine.

EERWAY Environment Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the name of the archive file to be restored._ _______________ Restore This option copies a backup file from a network node or floppy disk. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. page 48 . This option will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are restoring. see the description of Restore in Restore. 87 . Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to restore the archive file. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to restore the archive file. Use the Network/Floppy toggle to select between the two options. Restore Field Descriptions 4. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol.

February 2003 Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the remote machine. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 88 . The password may or may not be visible in the field. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine.

the selection displayed at the top of the list is the default selection. Output An external data file delivered with the environment (win32app\eenuc\data\print. or user programs may be added to support specific output requirements. 89 . Invalid operations – sending a drawing to the printer. screen. or laser printer._ _______________ Output This option sends files to the printer. NQS options. plotter. Local commands. Field Descriptions 4. The system manager may modify this file to add desired options. for example – are not allowed. If you do not specify an output destination. or select it from the list.dat) controls the available output options. IPLOT commands. EERWAY Environment File name — Key in the name of the file to be submitted to the output process. Output Destination List — Select the appropriate output device.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 90 .

data button <D>. By default. 5. or reset button <R> in reference to the cursor or mouse. If you are not familiar with the following terms: command button <C>. This chapter contains the following sections: Start-Up Sequence Screen Display EERWAY Command Menu Bar Palettes in the EERWAY Graphics Environment Identifying Elements Working Units and Precision Key-ins All of the EERWAY graphics commands are menu-driven. see Document Conventions in the Preface to this document. the panel menu is located on the right side of your screen and the bar menu is at the top. This chapter contains more detailed information about using menus. EE Graphics Interface Elements EE Graphics Interface Elements This chapter describes the graphics environment you will encounter while working in a design file. You can also invoke commands by keying in the command name and pressing <Return>. You will use the panel menus and the bar menu to select the commands._ _______________ 5. EERWAY Graphics 91 . It also documents the on-line Help system and provides other general information needed to work in a design file.

Displays a command window at the bottom of the screen. the system goes through the following processes: Displays all active design file views._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 92 . page 63 ).February 2003 Start-up Sequence When you enter an EERWAY design file (see Design. Initializes RIS with the reference schema.

displays a list of window actions. Screen Display If you have modified the default application menu configuration file. When the correct item highlights.) 1. MicroStation Command Window ._ _______________ Screen Display The screen display you will see when you enter a design file is described below. Only the Lower and Sink actions are available from the command window. 93 . To select an action. (Check with your system manager if you have a customized rway.contains the following six fields that display system messages and your inputs from the keyboard: 5. EERWAY Graphics — Window Menu Button .cmds file. as described in the previous section. your screen display may be different. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. release the data button.

February 2003 — Sink Box .displays elements as you place them. 4. — Key-In Field .displays alphanumeric values you enter from the keyboard.moves the command window below views and other windows of its own type. Working Area . — System Prompt Field . 94 .contains the primary types of commands used in the EERWAY graphic environment. Windows .displays a system prompt that directs you through a command. — Current Command Field . Select the type of command you want to use with a data point to see the pull-down menu of available commands or command palettes.displays startup file information and product name. 3.displays the name of the current active command. — Command Status Field . The number and name of each view appears in the window title area. 2.provide ways for you to change the way you look at your design. All your design work occurs in the screen working area._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Command Menu Bar .

collapses a window. Screen Display 5. When the correct item highlights. Maximize . the window is restored to its previous size and location. If you select the maximize button on a window that is already at its maximum size. Press and hold the data button to move the window.provide ways to manipulate windows. Press and hold the data button to change the height of the window as you move the cursor. Window Menu Button .appear when the cursor is placed at the left or right border.provide ways to move and resize windows. Move Arrows . EERWAY Graphics 95 .collapses a window.enlarges a window to its maximum size. To select an action from the menu.appear when the cursor is placed at the top or bottom border.displays a list of window actions. Close . If you select this entry on a window that is already at its maximum size. Maximize Button . press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. Move . release the data button. the window is restored to its previous size and location.restores a minimized or maximized window to the previous size and location. Minimize .moves a window around the workspace. Vertical Arrows . Press and hold the data button to change both the height and width of the window without changing the position of the opposite corner. Double-clicking on this button deletes the window. Press and hold the data button to change the width of the window as you move the cursor.appear when the cursor is placed at the border corners. Resize Borders . Diagonal Arrows .appear when the cursor is placed over the window border.changes the height and width of the window in the direction indicated by the pointer.enlarges a window to its maximum size. Minimize Button . Horizontal Arrows . Restore . Lower .moves a window to the bottom of the window hierarchy. Size ._ _______________ Window Manipulation Buttons .deletes a window.

Removes all palettes that have been invoked.Invokes the Integrated Commands menu. For instance. which allows access to the following commands: EERWAY Palette . and exits the graphics environment to return control to the EE Raceway menu interface.Executes the File Design command. Compress Design . you can also access command palettes from these pull-down menus. To select a keyword. Integrated Commands . 96 . Bar Commands . which allows access to the most frequently-used MicroStation commands.Invokes MicroStation’s Compress Design command. when applicable. place the cursor over the button and press <D>. Exit . Each keyword on the command menu bar allows access to a menu of options relating to that keyword.Invokes the Bar Commands palette. Using the Command Menu Bar The command menu bar is a logical menu.Invokes the EERWAY command palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Remove Palettes . Each keyword leads to a pull-down menu that contains commands for various EERWAY tasks. selecting File initializes the File pull-down menu.February 2003 EERWAY Command Menu Bar The EERWAY command menu bar appears near the top of the MicroStation command window.

5._ _______________ Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. EERWAY Graphics 97 . Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window.

This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section.February 2003 Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. 98 . Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu.

then selecting Palette from the resulting menu. 5. then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. EERWAY Graphics 99 ._ _______________ Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window.

then selecting Palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. 100 . then selecting Modify Group Commands. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette.

_ _______________ Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. then selecting Palette. EERWAY Graphics 101 . Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. 5.

then selecting Palette. 102 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Database This palette is activated by selecting Database from the MicroStation command window.February 2003 Utilities This palette is activated by selecting Utilities from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette.

you must identify an element to perform certain manipulations. The system highlights the element. For example. To identify an element. the wrong element may highlight. one data point can serve more than one function in the same command._ _______________ Identifying Elements Any structure. When you are moving an element. or shape you place is called an element. In many commands. EERWAY Graphics 103 . place a data point on it. If the correct element highlights. If there is more than one element in the location you want to identify. press <D> again to accept the element. Several of the command descriptions include steps where the accepting data point also serves as the placement point. If the wrong element highlights. the point you place to accept the element becomes the point from which the element is moved. line. Identifying Elements 5. The system then highlights another element. press <R> to reject that element.

you can often use data points. the working units of measurement. EERWAY lets you key in values (called precision key-ins) as well as place data points. we recommend that you use these default settings: Unit 1 Master Unit 1 Subunit 1 Positional Unit Imperial 1 foot = 12 subunits 1 inch = 8000 positional units 1/8000 inch Metric 1 meter = 1000 subunits 1 millimeter = 10 positional units 1/10 millimeter While these are the suggested working units for delivered cell libraries. called MU:SU:PU. Working units are coordinate units corresponding to the position and definition of a point in the design file. if a user-created cell library is being used.) 104 . The following explains the format of MU:SU:PU. you are not limited to using only them. and Positional Units. the smallest degree of accuracy that is possible in the design file (a fraction of an inch) In EERWAY. Subunits. 1 foot) SU — Subunit. The working unit dictates the degree of accuracy for placement of elements in a drawing and determines the scale relationship of elements in the design.February 2003 Working Units and Precision Key-ins When you place elements or manipulate them. Precision key-ins let you accurately place elements by using a working units system based on Master Units. Working Units in MU:SU:PU For Intergraph electrical designs. predetermined values for working units in imperial and metric projects were used to create the delivered cell library. also known as MU:SU:PU. You must understand the MU:SU:PU system before you can use precision key-ins. a division of a master unit (1 inch) PU — Positional Unit. (See your system manager for more information about the working units settings used at your location. are established based on the project type (metric or English). If using this cell library. MU — Master (main) Unit of measurement (for example. You may set your working units to any desired value. but placing data points does not always provide the accuracy you need. Therefore._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

5. if you want to place a point 10 inches directly to the right.5 (1-1/2 master units) = 1:6 (1 master unit and 6 subunits) Working Units and Precision Key-ins Precision Key-ins Precision key-ins let you place points accurately to create elements and shapes with exact lengths and areas.0. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. You specify a distance and an angle from the last point placed. as described below: DI=(distance.5 (1/2 master unit) 1/2 inch = :.5 (1/2 subunit) = :1/2 (1/2 subunit) = :0:4000 (4000 positional units) 18 inches = 1. For example. There are several ways to key in precision points. EERWAY Graphics XY= (absolute coordinates) To place a precision point.1:6. key in its absolute x and y coordinates. key in the delta x and delta y in MU:SU:PU that you want the point to be placed._ _______________ Below are some examples of values and how to key them in: 1/2 foot = :6 (6 subunits) = . key in DI=0:10. key in DX=1:6. direction) To place a precision point. For example. 105 . if you want to place a point 18 inches over and 18 inches up. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. DL= (delta coordinates) To place a precision point. or you can specify the delta values in X and Y to place another point. key in the distance in MU:SU:PU working units and the direction in degrees that you want the point to be placed. Key-ins are entered through the alphanumeric keyboard.

February 2003 106 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

and running reports and processes on the file. as an operator would typically use it. Preparation for the application or system manager is described in System/Application Manager Information. 107 . page 415 . creating a raceway model._ _______________ 6. Workflow and Procedures Workflow and Procedures 6. This section covers the following topics: The drawing process EE Databases Reports Interference detection Because the steps of the workflow are covered in detail elsewhere in the document. Workflow This section describes the overall workflow of EE Raceway Modeling software. This includes setting up the design file. this section will refer you to other documentation wherever possible.

This section is divided into individual descriptions of the steps involved in the drawing process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . it is important to describe basic raceway concepts. In general. These one-line drawings are the centerlines of raceways and through propagation become the threedimensional shapes (three-lines) that occupy the volume of the raceways.February 2003 The Drawing Process Before outlining a typical workflow for drawing a raceway. The following steps comprise the drawing process and this section: System manager setup Drawing setup Place one-lines Propagation 108 . you should perform these steps in the order in which they are described. The figure below displays one-line elements on the left. Typically you begin drawing raceways with one-line elements (one-lines). On the right are the same elements after propagation. EE Raceway Modeling software allows you to place one-lines and then propagate them into three-lines or raceways.

The system manager must also add vendor catalogs (parts. specifications. for example). Workflow Before you begin an individual drawing. see the appendix entitled System/Application Manager Information and the section entitled Installation Instructions. the system/application manager should determine the defaults and parameters that will affect your project and drawing (tray sizes. For additional system manager information._ _______________ System Manager Setup System Manager Setup 6. and vendor names) and the desired systems and one-line types to the reference database (see Specification. You can review the default and parameters settings while in the design file. using the Set Raceway Defaults command (see the section entitled Setup Commands for information about this command). 109 . page 507 for information about adding specifications to the database). Your system manager should also tell you the project name and design filename.

See Symbology Control. page 264 for more information. page 258 for more information. Doing so involves two commands: Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control. ask the system manager to add them to the reference database. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type Just as you must define systems from the reference database in the design file and set an active system. Set Symbology Once you have defined your systems and one-line types. You can change the active one-line type throughout your drawing session. You can also review and modify the default symbology settings with this command. See Set Symbology Control. You must have at least one raceway system defined and active in the design file. The command displays all systems available in the reference database. Use the Define System command to define your system(s) for the design file from the reference database. See Define System. page 260 for more information. Use the Symbology Control command to review and modify the symbology settings for those systems and one-line types you selected with the Set Symbology Control command.February 2003 Drawing Setup Define Systems and Set Active Systems Every one-line type is part of a system that reflects the purpose of the raceway. page 262 for more information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can change the active system throughout the design session. use the Set Active System command to specify the system you want active as you are drawing raceways. Then. The command displays all one-line types available in the reference database. See Set Active System. See Define One-Line Type. you can change the default symbology settings for them. Use the Define One-Line Type command to define one-line types for the design file from the reference database. page 294 for more information. ask the system manager to add them to reference database. you must have at least one one-line type defined and active in order to draw raceways. If you need one-line types that are not available to you. See Set Active One-Line Type. page 295 for more information. Use the Set Symbology Control command to define the matrix of systems and one-line types for the design’s symbology control. Then. use the Set Active One-Line Type command to specify the one-line type you want active as you are drawing raceways. If you need systems not available to you. 110 .

page 297 for more information. page 289 for more information. you should review the active propagation parameters. you are also placing the data associated with that one-line type in the reference database into the design file for loading later into the project database. Workflow Each one-line type has its own set of parameters or catalogs. 111 . These parameters determine how the system defines fittings._ _______________ Set Active Parameters Drawing Setup 6. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. To review and modify this data you will use the Set Active One-Line Parameters command. To review and modify these parameters you will use the Propagation Setup command. what one-lines will be propagated. Set Propagation Parameters Before you propagate one-lines in your model. As you place one-line segments. See Propagation Setup. and whether or not certain commands will automatically propagate one-lines.

and Precision Input Form. A run is a group of connected segments that do not branch or change specification. The following figure displays the parts of a run. To draw a raceway. using the Place One-Line or Place Manual Fitting commands. page 147 . Once you place and accept a run. Place Manual Fitting. until you accept them with the Accept option on the Precision Input form. you can continue placing one-lines. and the Precision Input form. initially in phantom mode. See Place One-Line. An accepted run has a Raceway Connect Point (RCP) attached to each end of the run. See Design Commands. page 119 for more information on these commands. first place one-line segments (centerlines) in connected groups called runs. regardless of type. Each run has a cross section on each end depicting the type of raceway and its orientation (for trays and wireways).February 2003 Place One-Line You will place all one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 132 . When you accept the run. page 129 for a description of the Place One-Line command. If not accepted. a phantom run disappears. 112 . placing tentative segments. it becomes a permanent part of the design file (unless you later choose to delete it).

The system analyzes the environment in which the one-lines meet when determining the type of fitting to place. for example). use the Propagate command. or fitting-to-fitting placement. The length of each three-line segment is determined by the length of the one-line. EE Raceway provides rounded tray elbows. so reference database access is not required. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the specification information. Manual Fitting Placement You can place fittings manually in the design file using the Place Manual Fitting command. To convert this onedimensional view of the raceway to a three-dimensional view. and the width and height (or diameter) of a segment are determined by the active parameters when you placed the one-line. It then searches the database for the appropriate part for the proper specification. and transition information stored for the one-lines and RCPs. page 194 for more information. Sketch is the quicker mode of propagation for two reasons. For example. the specification dimensions and part information are sent to the Eden symbol library where the symbol is generated. Propagation 6. 113 . Workflow Sketch and Eden Modes There are two modes of propagation in EE Raceway: Sketch and Eden. This may be particularly useful for later interference detection. where two tray sections come together at a 90 degree angle. page 147 for more information. If you require mitred elbows for production. When you propagate a one-line segment into a three-line element. it allows you to define the shape of your fittings. and light fixtures) must be placed manually. Sketch: In sketch mode. Sketch propagation places the sketched fittings based on the environment in which the onelines come together. the three-dimensional elements are drawn in-line without accessing the Eden symbol library. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. Eden propagation allows you greater detail and accuracy in three-dimensional fitting design. For example._ _______________ Propagation A one-dimensional raceway is composed of one-line segments. First. all information necessary for sketching the three-line is stored in the design file. All special fittings (conduit bodies. Eden: In Eden mode. You can use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. extension. the three-line element’s shape is determined by the one-line type (tray. see Propagate Element. unusual angles. see Place Manual Fitting. This radius is used to propagate fittings between straight segments. The default fitting radius determines the radius of any bends between raceway segments. you can define the fitting through Eden. Second. propagation will automatically sketch a 90 degree elbow. For example. pullboxes. Once found. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the cross section and the radius. While this mode of propagation is considerably slower than sketch.

regardless of the active propagation mode. and specification. Seamless Tubing Representations In the following three-line representation of a bent conduit. page 377 .February 2003 Fittings placed through the manual placement command are Eden symbols. page 314 . This ensures that fittings will always be repropagated with the same orientation. In order for the circles to be placed on level 63. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. You can turn off the one-line levels for display and plotting purposes. see Highlight Propagation Errors. the propagation mode must be set to sketch. the corners that do not have an RCP display circles that make the bent conduit look like an elbow. To highlight errors that occur during propagation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Any repropagation of such fittings will yield the same Eden symbols as well. thus displaying a more realistic graphical representation of seamless tubing. You have the option of hiding these circles by turning off level 63. For a detailed description of these error messages. 114 . see Error Messages. the one-line elements remain in the design file. definition. After propagation (whether performed in sketch or Eden mode).

one-lines. Workflow Reference Database A large amount of annotation is used in raceway models. three-lines. a database is a collection of information about raceway models. There are two databases that can be associated with your drawing: the reference database and the project database. and title blocks. three-lines. Once the project database is loaded. supplied by the reference database. and title blocks. 115 . Databases 6. The default annotation can be associated with RCPs. The form that displays with this command contains the reference database key value in a separate field below the annotation input area (see Annotate Element.) You can also add this information to this drawing using the Annotate Element command. You can both key in override values and display different annotation information. The EE Raceway reference database provides a simple method for generating this repetitious annotation. page 178 ). three-lines.) It will contain information about a particular drawing only after the Load Database process has been run on that drawing. The project database is normally created when the project is created. Much of this annotation is repetitious and not unique to any element in the drawing. The override key acts as a pointer to a row of data in the EE reference database. (The system manager may customize these values. title blocks) in each drawing in a project. For the purposes of this discussion. The default annotation information. Project Database The project database contains information about all the particular elements (RCPs. one-lines. (The project database can be created any time before the Load Database process is run. The Raceway parameter information is supplied from the vendor catalog in the reference database. Override Keys EE Raceway supports EE reference database override keys. can now be overridden by specifying another valid database key. The Annotate Element command is used to place and modify the override key linkages. using the annotation forms._ _______________ Databases A basic understanding of EE Raceway databases is necessary for efficient use of the software. The override key gives you the ability to add to and/or modify default database information for RCPs. you can report on this information using the reports available through the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. the default can be unique for each title block cell. one-lines. For title blocks. The reference database automatically supplies default annotation values for the project database.

February 2003 With the addition of RIS to the EE Raceway product. and also identifies which users will be allowed to use the database.) are stored. a distinction is now made between schema and database. etc._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . three-lines. A schema is a RIS-specific file that contains a description of the columns and tables of the database. 116 . The database is the file where the non-graphic drawing data (onelines.

You can access these reports from the EE Raceway Drawing Menu by selecting the Report option. page 59 for general information about running reports. page 545 . there are several reports delivered with the EE Raceway Modeling software: four standard reports and a rule check report. 117 . see Reports. Workflow Currently._ _______________ Reports Reports 6. See Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. For more detailed information about the individual reports. These reports run on the project and reference databases.

118 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Create Interference Envelope (default name). However. the EE Raceway Modeling product creates an envelope file for input to the Plant Design interference detection task. You will use the Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process to create the envelope file needed for interference detection.February 2003 Interference Detection Interference detection is processed through Plant Design software. This process reads the design file and then creates a data file that contains envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). page 342 for more information about the Interference Detection process.

Specify an absolute coordinate to move. Precision Input Identify an absolute point Specify a delta coordinate to move. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. Since you will use the form with a number of commands. the form displays the active command name as its title. The precision input form is used to: Accept/reject/cancel in response to the active prompt. For each command. See System/Application Manager Information. 119 . page 415 for instructions about changing the form design. Specify a series of coordinate changes to move. refer to the individual command sections for a description of operating sequences. When you select a command from the menu. a precision input form displays and remains in view as long as you are working in the command. This section describes each button and field available on the precision input form. Precision Input Form This chapter describes all the options available on the precision input form and how to use them._ _______________ 7. Precision Input Form 7.

Pressing <D> in a view for the placement of points simultaneously overrides the active view setting. It can also reset a current command action by one step. 120 . Maximize/Minimize Enlarges the form to its maximum size or reduces the form to its normal size. and prompts the system to continue to the next step. and scroll through the available views until the appropriate view displays. In most cases. You can exit a command at any point by selecting Cancel.February 2003 View This field displays the active working view. while collapsing the precision input form. Cancel Terminates the active command. To change the displayed working view. Accept performs the same actions as pressing <D>. Reject Enters a negative response to an active prompt. The displayed view determines the orientation of the elements you are placing in the design. Accept Enters an affirmative response to an active prompt._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The orientation of elements is most visible when placing annotation. Reject performs the same actions as pressing <R>. It also accepts any information you have entered through the form. select the field. In most cases.

The coordinates display in the following order: East/West North/South Elevation The following two options are only available when placing ductbanks. you will select a directional button and key in a distance to place a point. you will select a directional button and key in an absolute coordinate. while only Move To accepts a data point for input. Display Fields Displays some of your active parameters and general messages. The top field displays the active system and one-line type. you move to a point that is 20 master units north of the original active point. Both options accept key-in for distance. For example. Active Point Coordinates Display The Active Point Coordinates display shows the coordinates of the active segment point. by selecting North and keying in 20._ _______________ Move/Move To Toggle Used to specify a delta distance or absolute coordinates. The bottom field displays various precision input messages. A set of directional buttons accompanies each option. 7. For example. Using Move. 121 . and direction. you move to a point that is at coordinate 20 (in master units) in the north direction. Precision Input The Move To (absolute move) toggle allows you to place an active point at an exact coordinate. by selecting North and keying in 20. The middle field displays the active one-line type specification description. Precision Input Form The Move (delta move) toggle allows you to specify the distance and direction to place an active point. Using Move To.

By using the justification point and the height and width option described below._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . lower center. 122 . you can build duct bank elements similar to the one shown below. Height and Width These fields are used to define a ductbank element’s dimensions during placement. and lower right.February 2003 Justification Point The justification point defines the location of the three-line duct bank graphic in relation to the one-line graphic. Three justification points are available: lower left.

_ _______________ Construct Point This command specifies a series of movement options before accepting the shortest distance to the displayed location. Precision Input 123 . but they are only tentative until you select the Accept button. If you do select Accept. the option calculates and then enters its midpoint. only the coordinates of the last point you placed are accepted by the command. Activate the Any Point option. When you identify a one-line. You may place as many points as you want in this mode. Raceway one line Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line segment. — OR — Press <R> to reject the segment. 7. The command highlights the identified segment. Select the Midpoint/Any Point command on the precision input form. The command highlights one of the segment’s endpoints. Construct Point Midpoint/Any Point on Segment This command identifies a midpoint or any point on a segment at which to place an active point. and set the toggle to Any Point if it is not already active. and return to the previous step to identify another one-line. Selecting the Reject button discontinues the command and returns you to the last point you placed before entering Construct Point mode. The Any Point option allows you to identify either end of a segment and then specify a distance along that segment at which to place a point. 3. In Construct Point mode. The operating sequence for the Any Point option is: 1. you can route segments nonorthogonally. When you select the command. a toggle displays with the following options: The Midpoint option finds the midpoint of a specified one-line. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Identify the one-line segment on which you intend to place a point. 2.

124 . — OR — Press <R> to return to Step 2. and then press <D> to accept it as the reference point. If the specified distance exceeds the length of the one-line. — OR — Select Accept to enter the active endpoint. The command calculates the distance from the endpoint and then enters the point on the segment. Specify Distance Key in the distance from the reference point to the point you want to enter. moving in the direction of the segment._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the command still calculates the point from the endpoint. and select Accept. Accept/reject end point Press <D> to accept the highlighted endpoint as your reference point. — OR — Press <R> to highlight the other segment endpoint. 5.February 2003 4.

Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the upcoming run by the displayed distance. the following toggles display: The Extend Run toggle allows you to increase the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. When you select the command. When you select the Height or Width buttons. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. The command accepts as values the height and width of the active one-line type (as defined in its specification). Precision Input 125 . or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to extend the run. the Full/Half toggle displays. or any distance you key in. you must key in a value by which to reduce the run. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the run by the displayed distance. 7. Using the toggle. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the run by the displayed distance. The Reduce Run toggle allows you to reduce the length of an upcoming segment by the value you specify. you must key in a value by which to extend the run. When you select the Height or Width buttons. the Full/Half toggle displays. You cannot use this command to place a first point. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the upcoming run by the displayed distance. When you select the Distance button. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. You must already have defined an active point to establish the active direction before using Extend/Reduce Run._ _______________ Extend/Reduce Run Extend/Reduce Run The Extend/Reduce Run command allows you to extend or reduce the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. The distance you key in displays in master units at the bottom of the form. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to reduce the run. When you select the Distance button. The distance you key in displays at the bottom of the form. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. Using the toggle.

Key in the horizontal angle and the vertical angle in decimal degrees. Move to . 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .The direction is defined by the active horizontal and vertical angles initially displayed. You can define the direction from the active point one of two ways: Active Direction . 3. You can define direction by keying in values for horizontal and vertical angles. Specify Distance/Direction You can define the distance in one of three ways: Distance .These options define the change in the selected coordinate for the point in the direction entered. You can define distance with this command using the Move To and Move toggles or by specifying the true length from an active point.These options define the absolute coordinate for the point in the direction to be defined. Steps 1.Define the true length from the active point in the direction to be defined. Move . The coordinates of the active point and the angles of the active direction are displayed on the form. The Distance and Direction form displays. Select the direction and key in the absolute coordinate or snap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate. Select the Distance and Direction command from the main precision input form. Negative values are acceptable. Angles .February 2003 Distance and Direction The Distance and Direction command specifies the distance and direction from an active point to place a point or vertex. 126 .

page 287 for more information on the available commands. 4. This option is set in the PDS product. modify. — OR — Select the Cancel button to terminate the active command._ _______________ Distance and Direction The direction is always determined by both the horizontal and the vertical angles. The vertical angle is measured up or down from the horizontal plane of the active point. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. Precision Input Runtime Setup The Runtime Setup command is used to define. If clockwise. See Runtime Setup Commands. the horizontal angle starts at the east coordinate (zero degrees). the horizontal angle starts at the North coordinate (zero degrees). 7. 127 . If counterclockwise. The default setting is clockwise. The horizontal angle can be measured clockwise or counterclockwise. — OR — Select the Reset button or press <R> to reject the distance and direction option and return to the main Precision Input form. Accept/Reject Distance and Direction Select the Process button to accept the displayed distance and direction and return to the main Precision Input form.

February 2003 128 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Place Drop Point — Places a drop point symbol in the design file. Commands Place One-Line — Places the centerlines of raceway elements. Design Commands Design Commands The Design palette is activated by selecting Design from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. raceway connect points (RCPs)._ _______________ 8. Route Around Vessel — Routes elements parallel to an arc. Place Equipment Pointer — Places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. manual fittings. and equipment pointer symbols – in the design file. change the active design parameters. Design 129 . The commands on this palette place raceway elements – one-lines. Insert RCP — Places a raceway connect point (RCP) in your raceway model. circle. drop points. and size conduit and duct banks. and right cylinder. Rotate Cross Section — Rotates a cross section at the current cross section angle. You can also use these commands to enter an active point. Define Active Point — Places an active point in the design file. There are also commands available for routing one-lines around vessels and for inserting vertices in an existing one-line. Place Manual Fitting — Places a manual fitting in the design file at the specified orientation and location. rotate cross sections. Set Active Parameters — Sets the active parameters in the design file based on an identified one-line or RCP. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. 8.

Place Stub Up — Places conduit stub ups from an underground ductbank.February 2003 Conduit Sizing — Sizes conduit by "placing" cables in the conduit to determine the percent fill. Define Duct Cross Section — Defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit for an underground conduit duct bank. Place Field Routed Raceway — Places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Insert One-Line Vertex — Places a vertex in an existing one-line. 130 .

_ _______________ Using the Design Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. you must have ductbank one-lines placed before you can use the Define Duct Cross Section command. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. Using the Design Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. 8. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. See Setup Commands. page 119 . Likewise. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Design You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Design commands. You must have conduit one-lines placed in the design file before you can use the Conduit Sizing command. 131 .

Break One-Line — If you identify a one-line for the beginning and/or termination point. Attach to RCP — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. while the active system determines the system to which the one-line belongs. If the priority levels are equal between one-line types. Active raceway parameters supply the default data associated with each one-line segment as you sketch._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . One-line types with lower priority can only connect to one-line types with higher priority. unattached to another element. The chart below illustrates the parameters that are assigned to one-lines as you place or modify them. or specifications of a one-line. and so forth). conduit. or when you place a fitting.February 2003 Place One-Line This command places the centerlines of raceway elements based on points you give it. Whenever you begin or terminate a one-line segment. you can connect to an existing one-line. The values are defined by the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. The active one-line type determines the type of one-line you place (tray. Continue One-Line — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. based on every possible combination of routing options. the system places a new RCP and breaks the existing one-line into two one-line segments. then connect will not be an option. You can also combine two existing one-line segments using Continue. you can attach to an existing RCP. The following list describes each routing option in detail: New RCP — If you do not identify a one-line or RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. one-line type. and annotation of the original one-line. one-line type. These two segments will retain the systems. raceway parameters. you will have at least one of five possible routing options. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. Any one-line segment you are placing in space. RCPs are required when you are changing the system. This allows you to use the existing RCP as a beginning and/or termination point. One-line routes begin and terminate with a raceway connect point (RCP). Connect to One-Line — If you identify either a one-line or an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. Connect will place a drop point cell on the identified one-line at the point of identification. you can resume routing an existing one-line. Drop points establish connectivity between one-lines and RCPs where they are of different one-line types. the system places a new RCP and routes the one-line from/to the RCP. 132 . is new.

8. or continue. Design 133 . You can attach to or continue manually placed straights. This allows RCPs to be placed on top of one another without establishing connectivity. If the beginning and termination actions are continue. then the identified one-line must be of the same one-line type as the active one-line type. though it is not a recommended practice. the command will not allow the continue option. If you reject all routing options for the beginning and/or termination points of a oneline._ _______________ Place One-Line In the above chart: Active — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the active raceway parameters. then the two identified one-lines must have all systems in common. or continue. If the beginning or termination action is break. then the command places a new RCP by default. attach. then the identified one-line or RCP must have at least one system in common with the active systems. attach. You should keep the following points in mind when using the Place One-Line command: If an RCP on the end of a one-line belongs to a manual fitting. Last — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the last one-line you identified. If the beginning or termination action is break. First — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the first one-line you identified.

Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the cross section rotation. and exit a command. reject input. accept input. 3. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. 134 . See Set Active One-Line Type and Set Active System in Runtime Setup Commands. Data Point Accepts. 4. Steps 1. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 287 . and return to step 2. Begin entering points to sketch the one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Select the Place One-Line command. prompting you to Enter first data point. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. In addition. 2. reset a command action. You must set an active one-line type and system in the design file. The system places cross sections and RCPs (if they do not already exist) on the ends of the one-line. route one-lines. you should be familiar with the Set Raceway Defaults command (see Set Raceway Defaults. page 256 ). Complete the routing. Using the form. Refer to the description of routing options at the beginning of this section to determine proper routing. page 119. The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Place One-Line precision input form displays. At any point during this operating sequence.

For detailed information about precision input. page 119. If the RCP has a fitting on it. A fitting on the RCP can only have two attach points. At any point during this operating sequence. or right cylinder) selected in either the active or reference design file. accept input. you can locate elements. Design Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. route one-lines. the fitting angle will be used when routing off the RCP and around the vessel. and exit a command. Using the form._ _______________ Route Around Vessel Route Around Vessel This command routes the active one-line type around a vessel (represented by an arc. reset a command action. Wye and tee fittings cannot be used. or part of a cell. The route is attached to two terminating RCPs which may or may not have a fitting on them. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. If the RCP does not have a fitting. such as an elbow. reject input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. circle. 135 . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 8. or right cylinder element can be a single MicroStation element. The arc. circle. the route will come off the RCP at a 90 degree angle to the one-line.

The minimum distance key-in defines the closest the route can come to the vessel. If you want the route to maintain the minimum distance all the way around the vessel. You cannot key in a negative value. Select the Route Around Vessel command. The route is not placed at the minimum distance from the vessel all the way around. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. or right cylinder element) between the RCPs. the closest. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the vessel to route around. 2.February 2003 Steps 1. circle. 4. Identify first RCP Select the RCP where you want the route to begin and press <D> to accept it. Key in minimum distance from vessel Key in the minimum distance. Identify second RCP Select the RCP on the other side of the vessel where you want the route to end and press <D> to accept it. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the first RCP. 5. 3. which you want to route around and press <D> to accept it. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the second RCP. be sure that the distance from the RCPs to the vessel is the same as the minimum distance you key in. Identify vessel to route around Select the vessel (the arc. the route can be placed to the vessel. 136 . The precision input form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The number of segments must be greater than one (two segments or more). Design 137 . Key in the number of one-line segments Key in the number of one-line segments to use when routing around the vessel. The route is calculated and the elements display on one side of the vessel. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and key in a new minimum distance from vessel value. 7. — OR — Press <R> twice to back up one step and key in a new number of one-line segments._ _______________ 6. Route Around Vessel 8. — OR — Press <R> to place the elements on the other side of the vessel. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept that the elements should be placed on that side of the vessel.

Using the form.February 2003 Insert RCP This command breaks an identified one-line in the design file and inserts a raceway connect point (RCP). reject input. page 119. route one-lines. 138 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 2. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input. Steps 1. the system displays the message Element not found. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line element. The Insert RCP precision input form displays. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and exit a command. Select the Insert RCP command from the menu. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. reset a command action. The system highlights a valid one-line. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file.

the system prompts you to identify another. — OR — Exit the command. Continue inserting RCPs. Go to Step 2. Design 139 . Go to Step 2. If you accept the one-line. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept or reject the highlighted one-line. Insert RCP 8. 4. — OR — If you reject the one-line. the command inserts the RCP as specified._ _______________ 3.

If you identified a duct bank cross section.February 2003 Rotate Cross Section This command rotates a cross section using the current cross section rotation angle. 2. You can change the rotation angle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. accept input. For duct bank cross sections. this command does not rotate duct bank’s cross section. page 256 for more information. At any point during this operating sequence. go to step 4. route one-lines. The Rotate Cross Section precision input form displays. Using the form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Identify Cross Section Identify a cross section and accept it with a <D>. For detailed information about precision input. Otherwise continue to step 3. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. Select the Rotate Cross Section command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. but changes the duct bank justification location. Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. see Set Raceway Defaults. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119. 140 . reject input.

8. the system displays the message Element not found. Select New Cross Section Justification Select a new justification point from the precision input form and accept it. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section. 3._ _______________ — OR — Exit the command. Repeat this step. The duct bank justification changes and the command exits. page 256 for information about changing the angle of rotation. See Set Raceway Defaults. The message disappears when you identify a valid cross section. Rotate Cross Section The system highlights a valid cross section. If you do not locate an acceptable element. the elements will repropagate at the new orientation angle. Design 141 . If Automatic Propagation is on. Data Point Accepts. 4. The system rotates the cross section by the defined rotation angle. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the current cross section orientation and exit the command.

Steps 1.February 2003 Place Drop Point This command places a drop point symbol in the design file. The system highlights a valid RCP. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. you can locate elements. a higher number indicates a lesser priority. Drop points establish connectivity between a RCP and a one-line. Using the form. The point on the one-line where you place the drop point symbol defines the drop-out point. You can place drop points between RCPs and one-lines of the same and/or different one-line type. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. accept input. 10 is of lesser priority than 5._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. The Place Drop Point precision input form displays. for instance. the system displays the message Element not found. For example. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You can also establish connectivity between two one-lines where graphic coincidence does not occur. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable element. At any point during this operating sequence. the drop-out point will be calculated by determining the closest point on the one-line to the drop point symbol. page 119. and exit a command. reset a command action. 142 . You can. Select the Place Drop Point command. If the drop point symbol is not on the one-line. reject input. The values which determine priority status are defined in the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. 2. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. establish connectivity between a piece of conduit and a tray at the point where the cables drop out of the tray into the conduit.

— OR — Reject the one-line. The system highlights the identified one-line. Design 143 . 4. The identification point is the point at which the system will place the drop point. Place Drop Point 8. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file._ _______________ 3. and returns you to the previous prompt. The system prompts you to identify another one-line. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Accept the highlighted RCP. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the one-line. Go to step 4. The system places the drop point as specified. Go to step 2. 5. — OR — Press <R> or Reject to identify a different RCP. Go to step 2. — OR — Reject the highlighted RCP. The system prompts you to identify another RCP.

At any point during this operating sequence. the system displays the message Element not found. The system highlights a valid RCP. Continue placing equipment pointer symbols in the design. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file and accept it. Using the form. Steps 1. reset a command action.February 2003 Place Equipment Pointer This command places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reject input. For detailed information about precision input. An equipment pointer symbol serves as a tag that identifies a particular piece of equipment. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The equipment pointer should match the corresponding symbol in the PDS Equipment Modeling product. 3. Select the Place Equipment Pointer command. Enter data point to place Place a data point at the desired location for the equipment pointer symbol. If you do not locate an acceptable element. and exit a command. see Precision Input Form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. page 119. route one-lines. 2. The system places the equipment pointer symbol as specified. accept input. 144 . — OR — Press <R> to select another RCP. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.

Enter active point Specify a data point in the design file where you want the active point to be. and exits the command. Define Active Point Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines. The command makes the specified data point the active point. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. Select the Define Active Point command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119._ _______________ Define Active Point This command defines a new active point in your design file. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Steps 8. 145 . 2. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. reject input. you can locate elements. The Enter Active Point precision input form displays. Design 1. accept input. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.

2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and one-line type parameters based on the highlighted element. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Select a one-line or RCP to use to set the active parameters. to those of a one-line or RCP you identify. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 3. The command exits automatically. active systems. Using the form. system. Select the Set Active Parameters command. and raceway parameters. accept input. one-line type. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element as the one to use. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. route one-lines. The system sets the active one-line type. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.February 2003 Set Active Parameters This command sets the active parameters. see Precision Input Form. page 119. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The Set Active Parameters precision input form displays. The system highlights the identified element. you can locate elements. 146 . Return to step 2. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Steps 1. and exit a command. reject input.

the system derives the default orientation for placing the new fitting from the placement point. the new fitting is attached to the existing fitting and a one-line is automatically placed. the location of a manual fitting is determined by the location of the active point. pullboxes. vertical tees. and so forth) using this command. Otherwise._ _______________ Place Manual Fitting This command identifies a unique part from the reference database and places it in the design file at whatever orientation and location you specify. If the new fitting and the existing one do not share the same system and one-line type. If the active point lies in the vicinity of a fitting. Such a fitting is placed with its own RCP. then the system places the new fitting by itself. You can place special fittings (conduit bodies. During placement. When placing a straight section. unusual angles. and light fixtures) as well as spec driven fittings (horizontal elbows. Place Manual Fitting 8. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. Design 147 . or placing a fitting on the end of a straight section. the system extends the one-line for that straight to terminate on the RCP of the fitting. You will use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. or fitting-to-fitting placement. For example. the system locates the closest attachment point on that fitting. When attaching a manual fitting to the placement point of another fitting (or a straight).

select a value from the list. straight. Otherwise. wye. If manual placement cannot locate a fitting. 148 .) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. inside vertical. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. one-line type. To change the displayed subtype. See Set Active System.February 2003 Commands Define Active Point — Defines the active point in the design file for the placement of fittings. To change the displayed three-line type. page 145 . etc. and active one-line type parameters in the design. Selecting a new active one-line type updates the part information elsewhere on the form. select a value from the list. the command derives the orientation from the place point. See Set Active Parameters. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. Set Active Parameters — Defines the active system. To change the displayed qualifier. Modifying the value for Type also may change the active and available subtypes. rigid.) for that specification. select a value from the list. etc. etc. See Define Active Point. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. page 294 . page 295 .) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. page 146 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . horizontal. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. the previous orientation will be retained. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. See Set Active One-Line Type. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to select a new active system. Changing the active parameters updates the part information elsewhere on the form.

key in a negative angle. the Length field does not display on the form. To change the displayed angle. — OR — Change any of the values for Type. and key in the new value. and Qualifier for the current specification. select a value from the list. select an angle from the list or select the field. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. To display the specification itself. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. (if applicable) Spec2. Doing so displays a specification form. select a value from the list. Part — Displays the active part. You can only review the values in this field. Spec1. If straight is not your active Type. Design 149 . or Angle (if applicable). To change the displayed length. Place Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight._ _______________ Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. The list contains all available specifications. Subtype. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. Subtype. To change the displayed specification. select the field. Qualifier. and Qualifier. To change the displayed part. Subtype. The list contains available angles. and key in the new value. select the corresponding Display button. When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. 8.

You can review and modify the values in this column. Then select the field. If only one row matches this criteria.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). See Spec1 for a description of the form. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. for the given Spec1. For a list of valid operators.February 2003 Column name .Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. If an * displays in the List column. You can only review the information in this column. Subtype. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. page 178 . Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. To change the active placepoint.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. Doing so displays a specification form. which automatically activates it. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. the existing RCP location is fixed. Override . if any. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. If more than one row matches the criteria. List . 150 . select the *. and key in a new value.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. Type. then the column value has an associated codelist. If Cutback Mode is on. select the Override button. see Annotate Element. Clear . select the slide bar. If Cutback Mode is off. displays. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. Cutback Mode — Defines whether a straight section is to be cutback when placing a manual fitting. Column value . To change a value. To display the codelist. and Qualifier._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. the RCP will be moved accordingly. Select .Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. then a second form. containing all matching rows.

If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. Angle . the Place Manual Fitting form displays. then the largest fitting available is used.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. then that fitting is used. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis._ _______________ Automatic Size — Automatically selects the correct size fitting. You must specify the manual fitting type before using the button. select the field. To change the displayed axis. select the field. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. — OR — Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. Rotate Orientation — Defines the active orientation matrix. Design 151 . It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. 8. About . Automatic Fit — Re-orients the fitting in reference to the one-line it is associated with. and key in a new value. Secondary.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. Place Manual Fitting The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. To change the displayed angle.

then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. To change the active special part table. material. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. Similarly. you set the active Table to cond_body. In other words.February 2003 Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. size. regardless of the other attribute settings. For example. When set to All. 152 . Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . if you set material to feraloy. and vendor display as the active attributes. if you set type to form 7c. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. vendor to 3. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table that matches the attribute values. see the descriptions earlier in this section. select a table name from the list. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. type. and vendor to 3. material to feraloy. will be displayed in the size list. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. and size to 1/2 inch. made of feraloy from vendor 3. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes.

set the toggle to Driven By Spec. On the other hand. The Place Manual Fitting form displays. page 119 . Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. 4. radius. you should first consider a few points. 3. Such fittings are called special parts. 2.) to construct the three-line symbols. see Precision Input Form. set the toggle to Driven By Table. Select the Place Manual Fitting command. and location. orientations. 153 ._ _______________ Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. For more information. Go to step 4. The system accepts the fitting at the specified location and orientation. Change fitting descriptions. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. orientation. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts: Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 8. and location until the desired fitting is seen in dynamics (phantom mode) in the design file. height. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. Place Manual Fitting When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. etc. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. Select Accept to accept the fitting with the current settings. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. Design Steps 1.

— OR — Exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Continue placing manual fittings. 154 .February 2003 5.

_ _______________ Conduit Sizing This command places cables (wires) in a conduit to determine the correct conduit size based on the conduit’s percent fill calculation. Conduit Sizing 8. Design 155 .

February 2003 Field Descriptions Column Alias — Displays the column aliases for each column in the database table. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Code List — Indicates whether a Value has an associated code list. If you do not enter another operator. This operator is a wild card. This operator is a wild card. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. representing zero or more characters. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. Value — Select and key in values to use as search criteria to find corresponding cables in the database. 156 . then the Value has an associated code list. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. select the *. To display the code list. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. the system assumes =. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . representing a single character. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. If an * displays in the column. A code list is a list of valid database values for that Column Alias. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. This command also accepts certain relational operators as search criteria.

If more than one cable matches the search criteria. Percent Fill — Displays how full the conduit is as a percentage. Using this form you can select another conduit in which to route cables without having to exit the command. Add Cable — Mode for adding cables to a conduit.The smallest conduit available in the spec that meets the percent fill criteria is used. There are two methods to choose from: — Increase Size ONLY . Any cables in the active conduit before the copy are removed. Process Query — Queries the database to find cables matching the search criteria defined in the Value fields. Selected Cables — Displays information on all cables that have been selected to go in the active conduit. 8. it is added to the conduit. The field displays in red and the message Warning: Percent Fill exceeds maximum allowed displays when the conduit has reached its capacity as defined by the electrical code you are using. Design 157 . Copy Contents — Copies cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit. — Increase/Decrease size ._ _______________ Initialize Query — Clears all entries in the Value fields. Conduit Size — Displays the size of the conduit in spec units.When a conduit is calculated to be full. the PseudoCable form displays. from which you can select a cable or cables to route in the conduit. If only one cable is found that matches the criteria. Select Conduit — Displays the Conduit Sizing precision input form. Field Descriptions Increase Size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size — Defines how the conduit should be sized. The Percent Fill calculation is based on the conduit’s cross-sectional area divided by the summation of all of that conduit’s cables’ cross-sectional areas. the next size larger conduit in the spec table is used until an adequately sized conduit is found. Append Contents — Adds cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit leaving any cables in the active conduit there.

158 . At any point during this operating sequence. page 268 for more information. 4. route one-lines.February 2003 Remove Cable — Mode for removing cables from a conduit. Delete All Cables — Deletes all cables in the active conduit. reject input. 3. Using the form. This field can be edited to take positive integers other than zero (zero and blank are invalid entries). Quantity — Defines the number of cables of that type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reset a command action. You can query the database and select them from the form or copy them from a conduit that has "cable" in it. Identify CONDUIT Identify the conduit to size and accept it with <D> The Conduit Sizing form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and exit a command. Select the Conduit Sizing command. see Precision Input Form. The Conduit Sizing precision input form displays. This option is available only when Remove Cable is selected. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Set the Increase size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size toggle to the sizing method you want. page 119. you can locate elements. 2. accept input. For detailed information about precision input. You must use the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command to define how the conduit sizes will be selected. Define the cables for the conduit. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. Steps 1. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

If the largest size conduit available does not satisfy the percent fill calculation. a warning message displays. Field Descriptions 8. Design 159 ._ _______________ 5. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command and ignore any changes you have made. Select Accept to calculate and size the conduit.

Identify Raceway One-line Select the one-line to which to add the vertex. Using the form. The vertex is inserted. Select the Insert One-Line Vertex command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To move an inserted vertex. route one-lines. At any point during this operating sequence. page 192 for more information. see Move One-Line Vertex. accept input. 2. use the Move One-Line Vertex command. you can locate elements. Steps 1. the one-line will repropagate and the vertex will display with its cross-section. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 119. If Automatic Propagation is on. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 Insert One-Line Vertex This command places a vertex in an existing one-line. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input. The Insert One-line Vertex precision input form displays. The selected one-line highlights. reject input. 160 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 3. reset a command action. The point that identifies the one-line in this step is the point where the vertex is inserted._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and exit a command. — OR — Press <R> to reject the one-line.

This length represents the estimated length of raceway to the equipment from the beginning point of the placed one-line. the value is displayed in the design. select the field and key in a new length. To change the displayed length.) When set to Keyin. The Distance to equipment specifies the field routed length (in subunits) of the placed one-line. The column names reside in the ee_unique table in the reference schema. Column value — Defines a value for the corresponding equipment identifying attribute in the Column name field. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. This command is intended primarily to support field routed conduit and airways. Display — Enables or disables the annotation of the Column value. Similarly. This field is informational only. Keyin/Calculate — Defines the method for entering the distance from the beginning of the placed one-line to the equipment (that is. there are instances where the raceway does not terminate at equipment and cables must be routed through airways (space) by the installer from the raceway to the equipment. but can also be used for other raceway types that are field routed. Design Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for the columns (attributes) in the reference schema that unique identify equipment. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. field route length. When on. 161 . select the field and key in the new value. you must key in the length in the Distance to equipment field. For example. Field routed raceway sections are needed to get appropriate material takeoff (MTO) reports and to facilitate cable routing. You are prompted to position the annotation after the equipment pointer is placed in the design. conduit less than a particular size is typically not modeled in the plant model but is installed in the field by the installer. To change the value._ _______________ Place Field Routed Raceway The Place Field Routed Raceway command places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment.

After specifying the orientation and the length of the one-line. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. First Point & Orientation/Beginning & Ending Point — Defines the method for entering the plant coordinates of the one-line element. placement point) of the one-line element. Or you can identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. select the field. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and toggle between the three axis (Primary. Secondary. To change the displayed axis. select the field. When placing the one-line element using the Beginning & Ending Point method. About — Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. and key in a new value. reset a command action. The software calculates the orthogonal distance (that is. reject input. y. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis.February 2003 When the Keyin/Calculate toggle is set to Calculate. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. and exit a command. route one-lines. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. z deltas) from the beginning of the placed one-line to the identified equipment location. The calculated distance is stored with the one-line as field routed length. When placing the one-line element using the First Point & Orientation method the Rotate Orientation gadgets display. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 162 .) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. To change the displayed angle. see Precision Input Form. you are prompted to identify the location of the equipment. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. you are prompted for the first point (that is. To change the displayed length. Length of Placed Raceway Field — Displays the length by which to project the oneline along the orientation tee from the first point._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119. you can locate elements. accept input. For detailed information about precision input. Angle — Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. and key in a new value. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. you are prompted for the beginning and ending plant coordinates of the one-line. select the field. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. sum of the x.

The Place Field Routed Raceway form displays. Select the Place Field Routed Raceway command. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. — OR — Exit the command. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line element to which you want to connect the field routed raceway section and accept it when it highlights. The precision input form displays. 3._ _______________ Operator Sequence 1. Design 163 . Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. 2.

Unassigned or unused buttons in the matrix are not used in calculating the ductbank’s cross sectional size unless they are in the middle of assigned buttons. cable or gap to a button. you assign that area in the duct bank._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Define Duct Cross Section This command defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit or cable for underground duct banks. Copy section layout from — Copies an existing duct cross section layout from a specified duct into the active duct. 164 . All assigned buttons (areas) are then used to calculate the duct bank’s cross section. Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that extends the size of the duct bank. By assigning a conduit. The duct bank will automatically resize after configuration to accommodate the defined conduit or cable.

Move — Moves a conduit/cable or gap from one matrix button to another. Vertical spacing — Defines the vertical spacing between each button (area). See Set Raceway Defaults. You can define any control number that is loaded to the project database. The gap is measured from the center of the left conduit/cable to the center of the right conduit/cable and can only be defined on the top row of buttons. If cable routing is selected. If conduit routing is selected. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cabsch_spec table. The cable schedule is not the same table as the cable table in the EE Wiring Diagram and Panel Design software. Design 165 . this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cndsch_spec table. The conduit/cable identification will appear on the button after assignment. 8._ _______________ Add — Assigns a conduit. Gap Distance — Defines a gap between two conduit/cables in the matrix. cable or gap to a matrix button. Horizontal spacing — Defines the horizontal spacing between each button (area). page 256 for more information. A form displays all available conduit/cables in the project database for the defined control number. These tables are the cable/conduit schedule listings used for this project. Control Number — Displays the control number to use for retrieving the conduit/cable information from the project database. Modify — Removes an existing button assignment and replaces it with new assignment. Define Duct Cross Section Delete — Removes a conduit/cable or gap from a matrix button. You define whether you are routing conduit or cables by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. The gap distance will appear on the button after assignment.

Likewise. both width and height. The Duct Cross Section Layout form displays. 166 . See Set Raceway Defaults. is assigned to the duct one-line. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. a warning form displays confirming that you want to exit without saving changes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Identify duct element Select the duct bank element for which to define the cross section layout and accept it with <D>. Define cross section layout using the various commands. If you select Cancel on the warning form. page 256 for more information. Define whether you are placing conduit or cables in the duct bank by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. the duct bank will automatically repropagate. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input. 4. 2. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. all conduit/cable information. The precision input form displays. reject input. you can define a margin width. If you select Cancel after having modified the ductbank’s layout. and exit a command. The duct bank size is checked and resized as necessary. route one-lines. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without saving any changes. If you select Confirm (√) on the warning form. Select the Define Duct Cross Section command. Select Confirm (√) to exit the form and save your changes. any changes you made will be ignored. Steps 1. 3. you cancel your "exit without saving" and are returned to the command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. If Automatic Propagation is on. page 119. The duct bank section layout. accept input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. a space between the button matrix and the outside of the ductbank in the EE Raceway Defaults form. you can locate elements.

material) are used to determine the conduit stub up sizes available. You must select the a conduit specification using the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. You must define the duct cross section layout using the Define Duct Cross Section command. 167 . page 164 . page 289 . The conduit specification and the conduit sizing attributes (for example. The stub up is connected to the corresponding underground duct bank section by means of a drop point. See Set Active One-Line Type. vendor. page 268 . page 294 . See Define Duct Cross Section. Stub ups are pieces of conduit associated with a conduit or cable contained in an underground duct bank and are placed in the raceway model for making above ground conduit connections. You must define the conduit sizing attributes using the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. See Define One-Line Type. You must define conduit as the active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command._ _______________ Place Stub Up Place Stub Up This command manipulates conduit stub ups. Design Before Using this Command You must define conduit as an available one-line type using the Define One-Line Type command. page 260 . units. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. 8.

you are required to select the desired size from the available sizes. Delete Stub Up — Deletes a conduit stub up. Stub Up Size — After selecting the Place Stub Up button and selecting a conduit/cable from the active duct segment. the size of stub up will be retrieved from the conduit schedule table in project schema based upon conduit number that user selected from matrix. Place Stub Up — Places a conduit stub up in the raceway model associated with a conduit/cable in the active duct segment. 168 . Change Association — Changes the association of a conduit stub up from the currently associated conduit/cable to another conduit/cable in the active duct segment. Stub Up Length — Displays the conduit stub up length as measured in the model master units (feet. meters) The user can optionally override the displayed value. conduit/cable) to manipulate. You can optionly override the displyed value by selecting a conduit stub up size from the available sizes as determined by matching the conduit sizing attributes to the active conduit specification. The displayed value is simply the value from the previous place stub up selection. This matrix is used in the Change Association and Place Stub Up options to identify which cross section (that is. this field displays the associated conduit stub up size. If underground cable routing is selected for this model or the conduit size is not defined for the conduit number._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that has or has not been assigned during the Define Duct Cross Section command. If underground conduit routing is selected for this model. Select Duct Segment — Selects an existing duct segment in the raceway model as the active duct segment.

The Place Stub Up form displays. — OR — Reject the highlighted element._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — Select the Place Stub Up option. Go to Step 2. Go to Step 2. Identify duct element Identify a duct one-line in the design file. Design — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. The identified duct one-line’s cross section layout displays in the Button Matrix. 5. Select the Place Stub Up command. — OR — Exit the option. Select Option Select the Select Duct Segment option. 169 . — OR — Select the Delete Stub Up option. The identified element highlights. Steps 8. — OR — Select the Change Association option. Go to Step 4. 4. The precision input form displays. 2. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 3. Go to Step 14. Select the Select Duct Segment option. Go to Step 9. Go to Step 6.

Go to Step 10. Conduit/Cable Number = [conduit/cable number] Select another cable/conduit to modify existing stub up._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 10. is displays in the form message field. — OR — Exit the option. It also deletes all cross sections. 8. 11. The precision input form displays. annotation. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Select the Delete Stub Up option. 7. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Select the Change Association option. Go to Step 2. Go to Step 7. 170 . Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. The identified element highlights. Go to Step 2. and RCP’s that are associated with the selected one-line. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. Select stub up for modification. The precision input form displays. 12. propagated elements.February 2003 6. 9. The identified element highlights. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. — OR — Exit the option. Go to Step 7.

Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. Select a button from the Button Matrix. — OR — Override the stub up size or length. — OR — Exit the placement of the selected conduit/cable. Select a button from the Button Matrix. has been changed. 13. Place a data point at the desired location for the top of the conduit stub up. Go to Step 17. 16. Go to Step 2. Stub up spec. displays in the message field._ _______________ Select a button from the Button Matrix. The stub up is placed down from the given data point. 17. — OR — Select a option button. 14. 171 . Select the Place Stub Up option. 15. Design Go to Step 14. Go to Step 2. Go to Step 2. Steps 8. Select location to place stub up. displays in the message field. The system places the stub up and connects it to the duct bank by means of a drop point located on the duct bank one-line closest to the bottom of the conduit stub up. The precision input form displays. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. Select location to place stub up.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 172 .

Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. deleting. within the design file. one-lines. such as RCPs. The Modify palette is activated by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. These palettes and their commands will be described in this chapter. Modify Commands The Modify commands manipulate elements. 9. and propagation. annotating. and three-lines. and so forth). moving. annotation. then selecting Palette. three-lines. Modify Modify Group Commands — Define elements for inclusion in a group and manipulate elements belonging to the active group. Available element manipulations include copying. Commands The commands on the Modify palette both activate other command palettes. 173 . Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. You can elect to manipulate either single elements or those elements belonging to an active group. Modify Element Commands — Manipulate single elements within the design file. Modify Commands Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line._ _______________ 9.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. not MicroStation manipulation commands. page 119 . Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see the Design Commands. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). you should use these commands. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and one-line types. For detailed information about precision input. For reliable results. any time you are modifying raceway elements.February 2003 Using the Modify Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. 174 . see Precision Input Form. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for the commands in this group. See Setup Commands. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands.

9. and delete specified elements. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. including RCPs. and three-lines. reviews. Modify Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. You can use individual commands to move. Commands Annotate Element — Places. to review or edit element annotation. annotation. Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. one-lines. and so forth). Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. then selecting Palette. Modify Element Commands The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. then selecting Modify Element Commands. three-lines. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (oneline. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. within the design file. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. 175 ._ _______________ Modify Element Commands The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate onelines in your raceway model. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. copy.

Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. 176 . Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. from the design file. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. and elements associated with it._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line.

three-lines. any time you are modifying raceway elements. you should use these commands. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. and so forth). Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. 9. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Element commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. For reliable results. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. See Setup Commands. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. 177 . annotation. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. not MicroStation manipulation commands. see Precision Input Form. Using the Modify Element Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands._ _______________ Using the Modify Element Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. page 119 .

you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for a one-line. Using this command. By definition.February 2003 Annotate Element This command places. 178 . you are allowed only to review the annotation. Raceway Connect Points (RCP). though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . straights. and edits intelligent annotation for individual raceway elements. and fittings. For straights and fittings. three-lines. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for an RCP. reviews. intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database.

9. then it will display an R. Where the toggle is On. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. When modified. select the field. enter nothing into the design. using your keyboard space bar. If blanks exist for a field. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the graphic display for each column value. You can review and modify the values in this field. where New had displayed. Once you have deleted the override. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. You can only review the Column name column information. select the Column value field and delete the blank character._ _______________ Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. To change the values associated with the element. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. Field Descriptions Source — Displays the source of the corresponding column value. however. If you can only view (read) the column value. If you change a column value. The next time you enter the annotation form. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. the field remains null. Empty <Return>s. To display the codelist. If Dgn displays in the column. select the *. Modify 179 . then the value derives from the reference database. List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. the Access column displays a R/W. the value is saved back to user data. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. The key field is updated. and key in the new value. then the value derives from the design file. the corresponding column value comes from user data. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. it becomes an override key to the reference database. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. If Ref displays in the column. Otherwise. If an * displays in the List column. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. the value will display in the design where you place it. You can enter blank spaces into the design. Where UD displays in the column. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. You can only review the information in this column. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn.

If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. If no key exists in the user element. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. the Default key is used. select the row you want. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Once you place an override key on an element. Available operators are described later in this section. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. From this form you can select the row(s) containing the desired values. which automatically activates it. you can modify it. 180 . and then select Confirm (√). Otherwise. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. You can only review the information in this field. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. the key specified in the user element is used. To change the displayed value. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. the field remains null. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. select the field. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. If you select Cancel (X). If more than one row matches the criteria. and key in a new value.February 2003 If you delete the value in this field. but cannot delete it.

page 119. and exit a command. route one-lines. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. This operator is a wild card. accept input. reject input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command._ _______________ This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. reset a command action. Field Descriptions > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR 9. 181 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. If you do not enter another operator. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. the system assumes =. This operator is a wild card. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. Using the form. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. see Precision Input Form. representing a single character. representing zero or more characters.

3. It also identifies all the possible values (column values) associated with this element. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. The form displays all the current values associated with the element. or RCP). The prompt indicates the column alias being placed. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If you do not locate an acceptable element. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. 182 . The Annotate Element precision input form displays. When there are no more values to place. Return to step 2. 5. Identify Raceway element Identify the element to annotate (one-line. the system displays the message Element not found. Return to Step 2. 6. reset <R> to skip. This step repeats for each new value.February 2003 Steps 1. three-line. Select the Annotate Element command. Position the column value. return to Step 2. The annotation form displays when you accept the element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. equipment pointer. drop point. and place a data point. 4. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. The new value displays in the design file. — OR — Exit the command. The system highlights the specified element. 2. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor.

optionally. if you see graphics extending into the next raceway element. When you annotate any raceway element. repropagate all of the connected raceway elements. displayed. Modify 183 . When you load the project database._ _______________ Any value placed with the Annotate Element command will be entered into the drawing and. Field Descriptions 9. these values are loaded into the project database.

184 . reset a command action. page 119. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.February 2003 Copy Element This command copies raceway elements to specified locations within the design file. see Precision Input Form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. reject input. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form. route one-lines. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached.

Repeat this step. Return to Step 2. Enter placement point Specify a location for the copied element. The system copies the element to the specified location in the design file. the system displays the message Element not found. Steps The system highlights the specified element. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the one-line or RCP element you intend to copy and accept it with <D>. Modify 185 . The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 9. 3. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Select the Copy Element command. 2._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to copy. The Copy Element precision input form displays.

three-line fittings.February 2003 Move Element This command moves individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. and equipment pointers will also be moved. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. You can use this command to move one-lines. equipment pointers. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If a one-line is moved. For detailed information about precision input. All associated annotation. 186 . page 119. you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. and annotation. RCPs. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. accept input. All associated annotation. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reject input. At any point during this operating sequence. three-line fittings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . drop points. If an RCP is moved. route one-lines. and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

Modify 187 . Enter placement point Specify the new location for the element. 9. 2. Identify Raceway element Identify the element you intend to move and accept it with <D>. Return to Step 2._ _______________ Steps 1. 3. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Select the Move Element command. Repeat this step. the system displays the message Element not found. The Move Element precision input form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Steps The system highlights the specified element. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to move. The system moves the element to the specified location.

page 119. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . route one-lines. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached.February 2003 Clone Element This command copies raceway elements multiple times to specified locations within the design file. 188 . and exit a command. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. accept input. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. reject input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. Using the form. see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements.

— OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. Steps 9. Select the Clone Element command. The element highlights. Modify 189 . Return to step 2. 2. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the element you want to clone (copy) and accept it with <D>. The point you identify the element with becomes the origin of the copy. If you are placing more than one clone. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified element. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 4. Confirm (√) the number of times to clone the element. 3. 5. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified element. The clone elements are placed in the design file. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original element._ _______________ Steps 1.

Any one-lines attached to the RCP will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. Segments attached to the moved one-line segment will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. the attached RCP will also move. Also. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.February 2003 Move One-Line Segment This command moves one-line segments. any RCPs that are associated with a segment by a drop point will move only if the RCP and the drop point are coincident. 190 . Using the form. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. route one-lines. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. If the first or last segment of a one-line is moved. accept input. see Precision Input Form. reject input. you can locate elements. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.

If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. 2. Select the Move One-Line Segment command. The system moves the segment to the specified location. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. page 297 for more information on this toggle. Modify 191 . The selected one-line segment highlights._ _______________ Steps 1. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the one-line segment. Steps 9. Repeat this step. See Propagation Setup. The point that identifies the one-line segment in this step will be reference point used when placing the one-line segment at the new location. 3. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line segment to move. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Select the one-line segment you want to move and accept it with <D>. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

At any point during this operating sequence. and equipment pointer annotation that is associated with the RCP. 192 . the attached RCP. Using the form. along with any annotation. route one-lines. equipment pointers. and exit a command. see Precision Input Form.February 2003 Move One-Line Vertex This command moves a one-line vertex. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. If a one-line end vertex is moved. 2. also move with the vertex._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action. The selected vertex highlights. Any segments attached to a moved vertex will stretch or shrink to maintain connection. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Steps 1. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to move and accept it with <D>. page 119. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. you can locate elements. Select the Move One-Line Vertex command. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. accept input.

Move One-Line Vertex 9. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the vertex. Modify 193 . If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. page 297 for more information on this toggle._ _______________ 3. Repeat this step. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. See Propagation Setup. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line vertex.

A description of some of the delivered fittings follows the operating sequence in this section. see Precision Input Form. see Highlight Propagation Errors. accept input. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. 194 . This command displays to the screen the pro. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action.February 2003 Propagate Element This command expands one-line segments and RCPs into three-dimensional elements (a process called propagation). page 297 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Manually placed or edited fittings will propagate exactly as placed. The Propagate Element command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reject input. page 314 . For information about the form. route one-lines. To view errors that occur during propagation. see Propagation Setup. page 119. All other element will propagate depending on the specific situation of the element. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input.err file. you can locate elements. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

— OR — Exit the command. Go to step 2. the system displays the message Element not found. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Go to step 1. For information about this table._ _______________ Steps 1. The Project Run precision input form displays. Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The system propagates the identified one-line and returns you to step 2 to continue identifying elements for propagation. 3. Modify This section describes some of the fittings available with the delivered raceway one-line types. Wyes: fittings produced by propagating three intersecting one-line segments. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line or RCP. Reducers: fittings produced by propagating two or three intersecting one-line segments which have different raceway parameters. 2. Propagate Element The system highlights the specified element. The attributes associated with each fitting are contained in the tray_part table in the reference database. Crosses: fittings produced by propagating four intersecting one-line segments. Elbows: fittings produced by propagating two intersecting one-line segments. Identify Raceway element Identify a raceway one-line or RCP. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 195 . page 507 . Select the Propagate Element command. see Specification. Fittings are produced through propagation and can be divided into the following categories: Straights: fittings produced by propagating a one-line segment. Fittings 9.

February 2003 The following illustrations detail some of the fittings available for each raceway one-line type: Tray Fittings Wireway Fittings 196 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Conduit Fittings Propagate Element 9. Modify 197 .

Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting This command is used to edit fittings that have been manually placed in the design file. wye. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. straight. To change the displayed subtype. Subtype.) for that specification. horizontal. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. etc. See Remove RCP. To change the displayed angle. and key in the new value. Options Remove RCP — Deletes an RCP from the design file. inside vertical. 198 . You can only review the values in this field. The list contains available angles. and Qualifier for the current specification. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. select a value from the list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select a value from the list. select a value from the list. page 214 . To change the displayed three-line type. Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. etc. etc. To change the displayed qualifier. select an angle from the list or select the field. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. rigid. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. Modifying the value for Type also changes the active and available subtypes. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers.

To change the displayed part. the Length field does not display on the form.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. The list contains all available specifications. select the corresponding Display button. and Qualifier.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. Subtype. If straight is not your active Type. and key in a new value. To display the specification itself. Modify The specification form has these parameters: — Column name . — Column value . 9. Then select the field. select a value from the list. Qualifier. To change the displayed specification. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. To change a value. select the field. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. You can also change any of the values for Type. and (if applicable) Spec2. Subtype. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. To change the displayed length. You can only review the information in this column. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. and key in the new value. select the Override button. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. select a value from the list. Spec1. You can review and modify the values in this column. Part — Displays the active part. 199 ._ _______________ When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). key in a negative angle.

For a list of valid operators. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. Type. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. — Select . then the largest fitting available is used.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). select the *. To display the codelist. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. Automatic Fit — Correctly orients the fitting to the one-lines. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. Rotate Orientation — These fields define the orientation matrix: 200 . The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. page 178 .Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. then the column value has an associated codelist. Doing so displays a specification form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Annotate Element. for the given Spec1. — Clear . then a second form containing all matching rows displays. If only one row matches this criteria. If more than one row matches the criteria. To change the active placepoint. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. Automatic Size — Automatically selects the appropriate size fitting base on the onelines connected to the fitting. — Override . Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. and Qualifier. if any. See Spec1 for a description of the form. Subtype. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. which automatically activates it.February 2003 — List . If an * displays in the List column. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. then that fitting is used. select the slide bar. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. If there is no fitting of that nominal size.

the form changes.) Edit/Insert Manual Fitting I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. size. material. Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. material to feraloy. To change the active special part table. you set the active Table to cond_body. and vendor to 3. 9. select a table name from the list. Modify 201 . and size to 1/2 inch. vendor to 3. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays._ _______________ — Angle . — About . For example. To change the displayed axis. Similarly. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. and key in a new value. Secondary. To change the displayed angle. In other words.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. OR Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. will be displayed in the size list. select the field. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. if you set type to form 7c. if you set material to feraloy. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. select the field. type. made of feraloy from vendor 3. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. and vendor display as the active attributes.

You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. For more information.) to construct the three-line symbols. height._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you should first consider a few points. On the other hand. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table. When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. To change the active part. Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 202 . page 119 . All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. see Precision Input Form. etc. radius. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. see the descriptions earlier in this section. regardless of the other attribute settings. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. Such fittings are called special parts. The list contains all available parts from the table. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. select a part from the list. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. When set to All. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts.February 2003 Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields.

_ _______________ Steps 1. Select the Edit/Insert Manual Fitting command. The Edit/Insert Manual Fitting form displays. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. Modify 203 . Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting or RCP you want to edit and accept it with <D>. 4. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting 9. Edit the fitting as needed. 2. 3. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Go to step 4. Select Confirm when finished. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without editing the fitting or RCP. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. set the toggle to Driven By Table.

If you do not locate an acceptable element. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 204 . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You will identify the one-line to be modified at the point where modification should begin.February 2003 Modify One-Line This command modifies the route of an existing one-line. 2. You can reverse the segment to be modified by pressing <R>. For detailed information about precision input. Steps 1. reject input. the system displays the message Element not found. At any point during this operating sequence. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. page 119. When identified. The Modify One-Line precision input form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reset a command action. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design. You cannot modify the termination points of a one-line. Select the Modify One-Line command. and exit a command. The dashed segment will then be modified. one segment of the one-line will display as a solid line with increased line weight. accept input. route one-lines. the other segment appears as a dashed line. see Precision Input Form. The system highlights a valid one-line.

5. prompting you to Identify Raceway One-Line. The one-line highlights. place a data point on the original one-line. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. You can press <R> (or Reject) to reject the last segment drawn. To terminate the new routes. Raceway one-line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 6. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. Go to step 2. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) once reverses the segments to be modified. while the part to be modified displays as a dashed line. — OR — Rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. and return to step 2. Repeat this step. The command reroutes the one-line according to your specifications. Part of the one-line displays with an increased line weight. — OR — Reset to return to the previous step. Accepting the element identifies the one-line for modification. Modify 205 . Modify One-Line 9. Accept/reject Accept the one-line element as displayed._ _______________ 3. Data Point Accepts. or at the RCP containing the end of the one-line you are modifying. — OR — Reject the element. Go to step 2. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) a second time rejects the one-line. Reset Rotates Accept the cross section. 4. Enter next point Enter points to draw new one-line routes. — OR — Reject the one-line element as displayed.

206 .February 2003 The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. — OR — Continue rotating the cross section. Accept the rotation and return to step 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 7.

_ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Using the form. see Precision Input Form. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. See EE Databases. accept input. one rule might define that at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. then that fitting is used. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. reset a command action. For example. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. You must define the rules in the reference database. reject input. 207 . and exit a command. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. a LB fitting be placed. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. page 119. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Place Fitting by Rule 9. then the largest fitting available is used. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them.

then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Steps 1. displays. Select the Place Fitting by Rule command. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. 208 . Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the RCP on which you want to place the fitting. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 2.

9. If coincident RCPs are found and can be combined. If Combinable. All coincident RCPs must be of the same one-line type. — OR — If coincident RCPs are found. RCPs can be combined if the following criteria are true: No more than four (4) RCPs are coincident. the Combine Coincident RCPs form displays listing the coincident RCP information. you are given a choice of which RCP to keep. then you need to fix the coincident RCPs in your model. Systems — Displays which system each RCP belongs to. the message No coincident RCPs found displays and the command exits. If Invalid. Steps 1. Combine — Merges the coincident RCPs into one RCP. If no coincident RCPs are found. Modify Each set of coincident RCPs is listed in the form separated by the horizontal dotted line. then the RCPs can be merged. All RCPs must have a system in common._ _______________ Combine Coincident RCPs Combine Coincident RCPs This command is used to check for coincident RCPs in the design file. 209 . Status — Defines if the RCPs can be merged. One-Line Type — Displays which one-line type each RCP belongs to. Select the Combine Coincident RCPs command. Connectivity is re-established for the attached one-lines after RCPs have been combined.

Select the Combine button to merge that set of coincident RCPs. For each set of coincident RCPs._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . changes to Kept. the one you selected. and the Status of the remaining RCP. select the RCP information on the form to highlight the associated elements in the model. The status of the removed RCP changes to Combined. You can not combine RCPs that have an Invalid status. 4. 210 . 3. The RCPs are combined.February 2003 2. Choose which RCP in the set of RCPs you want to keep and leave that line highlighted.

Select the Delete button to delete the other one-line(s). 211 . 9. then the Delete Duplicate One-Lines form displays. Continue to select the one-line to keep and deleting the other. The one-line is deleted and its Status changes to Deleted. then the message No duplicate one-lines found displays and the command exits. Delete Duplicate One-Lines Steps 1. Each set of duplicate one-lines is listed in the form separated by a dotted horizontal line. Choose which one-line out of each set you want to keep. 4. 5. The Status of the one-line you chose changes to Save. select the one-line information on the form to highlight that one-line in the model. 2. Select the Delete Duplicate One-Lines command. Modify 3. — OR — If duplicate one-lines are found._ _______________ Delete Duplicate One-Lines This command is used to check for and correct duplicate one-lines (having only two vertices) that occupy the same geographical space and terminate on the same RCPs. If no duplicate one-lines are found. The Status of the one-line you wanted to keep changes to Kept. Select Cancel when finished. For each set of duplicate one-lines in the form.

212 . 2. you can locate elements. Steps 1.February 2003 Delete Element This command removes elements from the design file. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. You can use this command to delete one-lines. Select the Delete Element command from the menu. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The Delete Element precision input form displays. reject input. cosmetic graphics. and annotation. If you do not locate an acceptable element. page 119. see Precision Input Form. drop points. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and exit a command. RCPs (only if no one-lines are attached). reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Using the form. The system highlights the specified element. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. the system displays the message Element not found. route one-lines. equipment pointers. accept input. Identify Raceway element Identify an element for deletion. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.

Return to step 2._ _______________ — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Delete Element If you accept the highlighted element. Return to Step 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. propagated fittings. 9. the system deletes it. It also deletes all cross sections. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element for deletion. annotation. 3. Modify 213 . and RCPs (unless shared by another one-line) that are associated with the selected element.

You cannot use the Delete Element commands to remove an RCP. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the annotation for the second one-line is deleted. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. The command will remove an identified RCP only if all of the following conditions are true: — Two one-lines are attached to the RCP. reject input. and exit a command. reset a command action. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. unless the RCP has no one-lines attached. If both onelines are annotated. route one-lines. Using the form. Once such an RCP is removed. 214 . For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. — The two attached one-lines belong to identical systems. — The two attached one-lines are of the same one-line type. the two one-lines form a single one-line element.February 2003 Remove RCP This command removes a raceway connect point (RCP) from the design file. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

— OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP to remove. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted RCP for deletion. Return to step 2. If you reject the RCP. Modify 215 . If you do not locate an acceptable RCP. 3. Remove RCP 9._ _______________ Steps 1. The Remove RCP precision input form displays. If you accept the RCP. 2. the system displays the message Element not found. the command deletes it or displays an error message to the screen. The system highlights the specified element. Go to Step 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted RCP for deletion. Select the Remove RCP command. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. the system prompts you to identify another.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . useful for removing manually placed special fittings (like pullboxes and conduit bodies) and replacing them with bends. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted fitting and delete it. Steps 1.February 2003 Delete Fitting This command deletes the raceway fitting from a selected RCP. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted fitting and return to step 2. or the fitting’s RCP. 2. This command does not remove the RCP. Return to step 2. 216 . 3. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Select the Delete Fitting command. to delete.

Select the Remove One-Line Vertex command. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to remove. Modify Steps 1. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 217 . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ Remove One-Line Vertex This command deletes an internal one-line vertex. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The selected vertex highlights. accept input. you can locate elements. At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. see Precision Input Form. route one-lines. and exit a command. reset a command action. You can not delete the end points of the one-line using this command. page 119. 9. 2. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. Remove One-Line Vertex Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

218 . — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted vertex and choose another one._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If Automatic Propagation is on. the one-line repropagates.February 2003 3. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted vertex as the one to remove. Return to step 2. The vertex is removed. Return to step 2.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. If automatic propagation is toggled on.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. 9. the command will repropagate the one-line. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. route one-lines. reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.) Minimize Joints Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. reset a command action. Modify 219 . (See Propagation Setup. and exit a command. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. Using the form. page 119. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element._ _______________ Minimize Joints This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in an identified one-line. you can locate elements. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input.

The command prompts you to identify another one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system highlights a valid one-line. Identify Raceway one line Identify a one-line in the design. The Minimize Joints precision input form displays. 220 . the system displays the message Element not found. Go to step 2. The command reduces the number of vertices comprising the one-line to a minimum (while retaining the original geometry). Go to step 2.February 2003 Steps 1. 3. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 2. Select the Minimize Joints command from the menu. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line to minimize the number of its vertices. — OR — Reject the element. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element.

Project Rules cannot be assigned. When a row is selected. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. Modify Percent — Specifies the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. If an * displays in the List column. Systems — Displays all the systems associated with the selected element. the system Percent and the Project Rule. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. for the systems associated with a single raceway element. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. 221 . select the *. Change System Parameters Field Descriptions Primary System — Displays the primary system. The primary system determines the symbology of the elements. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. then the Project Rule can be assigned. 9. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table._ _______________ Change System Parameters This command changes the system parameters. To clear the Project Rule.

3. page 119. 2.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. reset a command action. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. The precision input form displays. For detailed information about precision input. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. The selected element is changed to reflect you selections. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without making any changes to the selected element. 5. The identified element highlights. and exit a command. Using the form. 4. 222 . Select the Change System Parameters command. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. you can locate elements. route one-lines. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. — OR — Exit the command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.

then selecting Palette._ _______________ Modify Group Commands The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. then selecting Modify Group Commands. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. copy. 223 . Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. Topics 9. Modify Group Commands You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and to review or edit element annotation. and delete elements of specified groups. three-lines. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. Modify Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Annotate Element by Group — Places. and so forth). Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. reviews. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. annotation. You can also propagate one-lines in a particular group using these commands.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line.February 2003 Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. 224 .

Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands._ _______________ Using the Modify Group Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Group Workflow You must use the Define Group command to create and activate an element group before using other Modify Group commands. Using the Modify Group Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Group commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. you should use these commands. 225 . annotation. any time you are modifying raceway elements. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. For detailed information about precision input. See Setup Commands. and so forth). Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). 9. three-lines. page 119 . you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For reliable results.

The key-in field above the list accepts input for group name when you are defining a new group. 226 . then a command will prompt you to accept/reject every element within a specified group before performing the command action. then a command will prompt you once to accept/reject the specified group as a whole before performing the command action. using the Hilite option. The system prompts you just once to accept/reject a group for manipulation. In general. Use caution when you are manipulating groups in Entire Group mode. Available Groups — Lists the groups you have already created.February 2003 Define Group This command compiles a group from elements you specify. and key in a name. you can manipulate the group as a whole or in part. To enter a group name. Once you have defined a group of Raceway elements using this command. The system adds the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. select the group name key-in field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Create — Creates a group containing the elements you specify in the EE Element Types list. The active group is highlighted in the list. To change the active group. If the toggle is set to Single Element. select a group from the list. Identifying the contents of an existing group can be done graphically. however. All groups you create using this command are dropped when you exit the EE Raceway design session. A group is a temporary association of Raceway elements in your model. you should assign your groups meaningful names that reflect their contents. Single Element/Entire Group — Determines how Modify Group commands will act upon existing groups. If the toggle is set to Entire Group.

key in a group name. Clear Hilite — Clears all highlighting placed in the design when you use the Hilite command. The system drops the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. Types include one-lines. The system automatically highlights the group contents in the drawing. To initiate the Copy action. and then select Accept. When processing is complete. If you remove all elements from a group. When processing is complete. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. You must choose at least one element type when creating. It is not necessary to select Accept. Hilite — Highlights in the design file the entire contents of an existing group. select Drop from. review the form message display for information about the number of elements dropped from the group. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements added to the group. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. 9._ _______________ To initiate the Create operation. When processing is complete. To initiate the Hilite action. and key in a new group name. Drop — Removes the active group (the highlighted group in the Available Groups list). select an existing group from the Available Groups list. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. adding elements to. Define Group To initiate the Add to operation. RCPs. Modify 227 . review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements the new group contains. and then select Accept. To initiate the Drop operation. or dropping elements from a group. and all annotation. select Add to. select the button. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. The system then compiles a group according to your specifications. Copy — Copies the specified contents of one group to a new group. drop points. three-lines. To initiate the Drop from action. and select Accept. EE Element Types — Displays all available element types available for inclusion in or deletion from a group. select Drop. the system automatically drops the entire group. Add to — Adds elements you specify from the EE Element Types list to an existing group. and select Hilite. select Copy. select a group from the Available Groups list. to equipment. and then select Accept. Drop from — Removes elements you specify in the EE Element Types list from an existing group.

Displays a list of available one-line types. three-lines.February 2003 Select All — Selects every element type from the EE Element Types list. three-lines. Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. You can select individual systems from this list. When you select a system from this list. When you select a one-line type from this list. You can select individual one-line types from this list. and so forth) belonging to that system will be included in your group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . only those element types (RCPs. EE Method — This list displays optional restrictions for the items selected in the EE Element Types list.Displays a list of available element types from which you can define selection attributes. Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. or you can select all displayed one-line types (using Select All). or you can select all displayed systems (using Select All). you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before you can select the Accept button on the main form. – System . and so forth) belonging to that one-line type will be included in your group. – One-Line Type . one-lines. only those element types (RCPs. – Attributes . Once you have displayed the System list. onelines. you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before selecting the Accept button on the main form. Once you have displayed the One-Line Type list.Displays a list of available systems. 228 . You can use the three options in this list to restrict the elements in your group to those belonging to particular one-line types or systems. Clear All — Clears all selected element types from the EE Element Types list.

Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence shape you place in the design. To reset out of the attribute list form and disregard the attributes._ _______________ When you select an element type from this list. or deletion from groups.Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence block you place in the design. You will use these methods to identify elements for group creation. – All Elements . Modify 229 . – View .Drops from or includes in a group those specified elements types contained in a view you identify. 9. Define Group Graphic Method — Displays the available methods for selecting group elements. if you identified one-line trays for insertion into a group. – Fence Block .Drops from or includes in a group all specified element types in the design. – Fence Shape . Once you have defined the attributes. the system inserts into the group only those one-line trays contained within the fence you place. insertion into groups. select the Accept button on the main form. These methods can serve to further restrict the element types you are including in your group. select the Cancel (X) button on the attribute form. an attribute list form displays for that element type in which you can specify the attributes to include in the group identification. For example. – Selection .Prompts you to identify specified element types in the design file to drop from or include in a group. and select Fence Block from this list.

select your elements for the group. 230 . Select one of the group modification commands. Select the Define Group command. — Use the EE Element Types.February 2003 Steps 1. The group is created. The Groups form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select one of the available group from the list 3. Set the Entire Group/Single Element and Hilite On/Hilite Off toggles the way you want. — Select the Process button at the top of the form. 2. — Using the Graphic Method you defined. EE Method. and Graphic Method lists to define which elements to place in the group and how you want to select them in the design file. Create a group of elements: — Key in a name for the group in the field provided. — Select the Create button under Group Operations. The number of elements added to the group displays at the bottom of the form. 4.

Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Copy Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Define Group. route one-lines. Using the form. go to step 4. Steps 1._ _______________ Copy Element by Group This command copies all or selected valid elements in the active group. using the Define Group command. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. reject input. you can locate elements. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. page 119. Modify The Copy by Group precision input form displays. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. reset a command action. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Copy Element by Group command from the menu. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group. go to step 3. the message No active group defined displays. 9. and exit a command. accept input. — If you have a fence in the design. At any point during this operating sequence. go to step 2. see Precision Input Form. You must define a temporary group of elements. 231 . A fence group overrides the active group. 2. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. If you have not defined a group. page 226. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

232 . — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Enter placement point Enter a point for the location of the element you are copying. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 4. If there are group elements that remain uncopied. Elements within the active group highlight. you are returned to step 3. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The system copies the element as specified. Define origin Enter a point to use as a base for the group copy. The command exits automatically. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. the command exits automatically. Otherwise._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Otherwise. The system returns you to step 3 if there are group elements that remain uncopied. — OR — Reject the active group. 6. Repeat this step. — OR — Reject the element you are copying. 5.February 2003 3. the command exits automatically. the command exits automatically. Otherwise.

You can only review the Column name column information. Annotate Element by Group 9. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. Modify Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. You can enter blank spaces into the design. the field remains null. Raceway Connect Points (RCP). reviews. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. To change the values associated with the element. Otherwise. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. You can review and modify the values in this field. straights. Using this command. enter nothing into the design. three-lines. select the field. For straights and fittings. and fittings. Intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. 233 . though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. Empty <Return>s. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. and key in the new value. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes. and edits intelligent annotation for some or all raceway elements associated with a specified group. you are allowed only to review the annotation (read only access). Once you have deleted the override. however._ _______________ Annotate Element by Group This command places. select the column value field and delete the blank character. using your keyboard space bar.

Source — Dislays the source of the corresponding column value. The key field is updated. If you change a column value. Once you place an override key on an element. the value will display in the design where you place it. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. When modified. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. the Access column displays a R/W. but cannot delete it.February 2003 If blanks exist for a field. the value is saved back to user data. List column — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. select the *. then it will display an R. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. then the value has been defined from the design file. it becomes an override key to the reference database. The next time you enter the annotation form. Access column — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. If no key exists in the user element. You can only review the information in this field. the field remains null. If an * displays in the List column. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. If Dgn displays in the column. Where UD displays in the column. To display the codelist. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. 234 . the key specified in the user element is used. and key in a new value. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. then the value derives from the reference database. You can only review the information in this column. To change the displayed value. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. where New had displayed. Where the toggle is On. If Ref displays in the column. Display On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the design display for each column value. you can modify it. the Default key is used. Otherwise. If you delete the value in this field. If you can only view (read) the column value. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. the corresponding column value comes from user data. select the field.

For example. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. If the toggle is set to Single for the same RCP annotation. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. which automatically activates it. select the row you want. the system will modify annotation only for that RCP when you select Confirm (√). Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. Annotate Element by Group From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. Modify 235 . setting the toggle to Global while annotating an RCP will change the annotation for all RCPs within the group when you select Confirm (√). You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. Available operators are described later in this section. 9. If more than one row matches the criteria. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R)._ _______________ Global/Single — Determines whether or not the annotation modifications you are making to the specified element will be applied to all identical element types within the group. and then select Confirm (√). The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. If you select Cancel (X).

This operator is a wild card. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. page 119. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. If you do not enter another operator. At any point during this operating sequence. Using the form. (For information about the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Types numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. 236 . This operator is a wild card. For detailed information about precision input. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. A fence group overrides the active group. see Define Group. accept input.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. route one-lines. see Precision Input Form. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. representing a single character.) Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. page 226 . The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. representing zero or more characters. and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the system assumes =. You must define a temporary group of elements. reject input. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. using the Define Group command.

— OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. Repeat this step. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. 2. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. — OR — Annotate Element by Group 9. — If there is not a fence in the design. Modify Reject the highlighted group element. The Annotate by Group precision input form displays. — If you have a fence in the design. 5. go to step 3. go to step 2. Select the Annotate Element by Group command from the menu. Go to Step 3. Go to step 1. the command exits. 6. 4. The command exits automatically. 237 . 3. The system highlights the group contents. reset <R> to skip. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. If no group elements remain. The prompt indicates the column alias you are placing. The system highlights another group element. The system displays the Annotate Element form for the identified element. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place._ _______________ Steps 1. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted group element.

Go to step 3. optionally. The system places all new displayed annotation for the specified element. the system prompts you to annotate other element types within the group. If you set the toggle to Global. the system returns you to step 3 to annotate other elements within the group. Go to step 3. the system places the same annotation for all identical element types in the group. displayed. Any value placed with the Annotate Element by Group command will be entered into the drawing and. When you load the project database.February 2003 Position the column value. and place a data point. The new value displays in the design file. — OR — If you set the toggle to Single. 238 . When there are no more values to place for the element type. these values are loaded into the project database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

If you have not defined a group. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. — If you have a fence in the design. Select the Clone Group command. Clone Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. using the Define Group command. and exit a command. go to step 2. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. accept input. A fence group overrides the active group. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. route one-lines. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group. You must define a temporary group of elements. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. reject input. see Define Group. Steps 1. Modify The Clone Group precision input form displays. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 3. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 239 . see Precision Input Form. useful when the same elements are to be placed at regular intervals. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 9. page 119. you can locate elements. reset a command action. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. page 226. the message No active group defined displays. 2._ _______________ Clone Element by Group This command copies the active group multiple times. go to step 4. At any point during this operating sequence.

The clone elements are placed in the design file. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified group. 8. 5.February 2003 3. 6. The command exits automatically. the command exits automatically. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original group. Define origin Identify a point in the group to use as the origin for the copies. If you are placing more than one clone. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Reject the active group. 240 . The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Repeat this step. 7. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. Otherwise. 4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Go to step 6. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. Return to step 2. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified group. Confirm (√) the number of time to clone the group.

route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 297 . For information about the form. go to step 2. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The Project by Group precision input form displays. Modify Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and exit a command. This command displays to the screen the pro. You must define a temporary group of elements._ _______________ Propagate by Group This command expands into three-dimensional elements all or selected valid one-line segments and RCPs from the active group. A fence group overrides the active group. — If you have a fence in the design. reset a command action. see Define Group. page 194 . see Precision Input Form. page 314 . Using the form. Propagate by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Propagation Setup. go to step 3. For a description of some of the delivered fittings. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. Select the Propagate by Group command from the menu. For information about using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory). go to step 4. page 119. accept input. 9. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Highlight Propagation Errors. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. The Propagate by Group command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. reject input. you can locate elements. To view errors that occur during propagation. using the Define Group command.err file. page 226. For detailed information about precision input. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 241 . see Propagate Element. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command.

Go to step 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the command propagates all valid elements within the fence. or until you exit the command. The command exits automatically. go to step 3. 4. 242 . The system highlights another group element for propagation.February 2003 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. The system propagates the element. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. the command exits automatically. and then highlights another group element for propagation. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. or until you exit the command. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. The system propagates every element belonging to the group. 3. and exits automatically. — OR — Reject the active group. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. If no group elements remain for propagation. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the command exits automatically. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to manipulate them as a group. If no group elements remain. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group.

see Define Group. A fence group overrides the active group. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. see Precision Input Form. reset a command action. one rule might define that a CLB fitting be placed at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines. page 226. Place Fitting by Rule by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. Modify You must define a temporary group of elements. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 119. accept input. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. At any point during this operating sequence. You must define the rules in the reference database. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. See EE Databases. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 9. using the Define Group command. you can locate elements. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. reject input._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule by Group This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. then that fitting is used. For example. then the largest fitting available is used. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. 243 .

Repeat this step. Select the Place Fitting by Rule by Group command.February 2003 Steps 1. the command exits automatically. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. The command exits automatically. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. — OR — Reject the active group. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. If you have not defined a group. displays. go to step 3. go to step 4. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Otherwise. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Group Place Fitting by Rule precision input form displays. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 244 . — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the message No active group defined displays. 2. go to step 2. — If you have a fence in the design. 4. — OR — Reject the highlighted element.

the system defined at placement. it will not be duplicated. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. Select the Add Systems Group command. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and command. using this command you can add an alarm and control system to an existing element with a communication system. page 226 . Modify 245 . A fenced group will override the active temporary group. The system(s) is added. Select the system or systems you want to add and select Confirm (√). If you try to add a system that already exists on the element. see Define Group. It will only append systems to the element. The Add Systems form displays. Add Systems Group Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. Press <D> to accept the group as the one to add systems to. Steps 1. This command will not change the master system. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command._ _______________ Add Systems Group This command defines multiple systems for a single one-line. The group that the systems will be added to highlights. 2. 3. For example. 9.

Changing the active system will cause the graphic symbology to change to the symbology define for the new system. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s "project" table. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. that is. the subsystem are all unselected. This command performs a total replacement of all systems. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. Project Rules cannot be assigned. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. Percent — Displays the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. For example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . While this button is depressed. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. all defined systems for the group are removed and replaced by the new systems. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. Systems — Displays all the available systems. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. use this command when you want to change an existing high voltage tray to a low voltage tray. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. When a new active system is selected. 246 . The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process.February 2003 Replace Systems by Group This command changes the defined active system(s) for a group. Subsystem — This button allows the selection of subsystems. Field Descriptions Systems — This button allows the selection of the active system.

The Replace Systems form displays. one-lines. Select the new system type from the form and select Confirm (√). you must define a group that contains all elements that have connectivity. Replace Systems by Group Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. and so forth that are associated through a series of graphically connected one-lines. drop points._ _______________ List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. To clear the Project Rule. Steps 1. The active group is changed to the new system type. page 226 . 3. Modify 2. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. A network may be thought of as all RCPs. If an * displays in the List column. When a row is selected. When defining the group for this command. You can not replace a system on just one element in a network of elements that have connectivity. 9. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. Press <D> to accept the group. Select the Replace Systems by Group command. see Define Group. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and the command. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. then the Project Rule can be assigned. The active group to be changed highlights. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. select the *. 247 . Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command.

Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. the command will repropagate each affected one-line. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.) Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. 248 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . using the Define Group command. (See Propagation Setup. you can locate elements. reject input. A fence group overrides the active group. Using the form. route one-lines. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. If automatic propagation is toggled on. reset a command action.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. see Define Group. see Precision Input Form. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line(s). page 226. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. page 119.February 2003 Minimize Joints by Group This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in valid one-line(s) within the active group. accept input. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. You must define a temporary group of elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.

the system prompts you to minimize the number of vertices for each one-line within the fence. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. Minimize Joints by Group — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. Go to step 3. go to step 4. — If you have a fence in the design. 2. The Minimize Joints Group precision input form displays. The system minimizes the number of vertices comprising the one-line. if any remain._ _______________ Steps 1. 9. Repeat this step. and the command exits automatically. The system then identifies another valid one-line in the group. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. The command exits automatically. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the vertices of all one-lines within the fence are reduced to a minimum number. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the command exits automatically. Repeat this step. Select the Minimize Joints by Group command from the menu. 4. and then identifies another valid one-line within the group (if any remain). Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line. the command exits automatically. go to step 2. Modify 3. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. Accept/reject Group ([group name]) 249 . — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 3. — OR — Reject the highlighted one-line.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system minimizes the number of vertices for all valid one-line elements within the group. — OR — Reject the active group.February 2003 Accept the active group. The command exits automatically. 250 . The command exits automatically.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the system prompts you to delete each element within the fence. Steps 1. see Define Group. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. see Precision Input Form._ _______________ Delete Element by Group This command deletes all or selected valid elements in an active group from the design file. accept input. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the contents of the group are deleted. using the Define Group command. Go to step 3. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. If you have not defined a group. go to step 2. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 251 . route one-lines. 9. the message No active group defined displays. Using the form. page 226. and the command exits automatically. The Delete by Group precision input form displays. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Modify — If you have a fence in the design. you can locate elements. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. page 119. go to step 3. You must define a temporary group of elements. go to step 4. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Delete Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. At any point during this operating sequence. A fence group overrides the active group. and exit a command. reject input. Select the Delete Element by Group command from the menu.

4. The system deletes all valid elements within the group. the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the active group. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 3. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The system prompts you to delete another group element if any remain for deletion. 252 . the command exits automatically. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion.February 2003 The command exits automatically. and prompts you to delete another group element. Repeat this step. The command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system deletes the element. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The command exits automatically.

reviews. Symbology Control — Defines. model annotation. RCPs. you must use the Setup commands before using any other command group. Define One-Line Type — Selects any or all available one-line types from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. Define System — Selects any or all systems from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. then selecting Palette from the resulting pulldown menu. 10. and engineering units. and symbology settings for your design file. text nodes. systems. Your system/application manager should ensure that the reference database contains the necessary systems and one-line types before you use these commands. Set Conduit Sizing Attributes — Defines which conduit attributes will be used selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. reviews. The Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar._ _______________ 10. Setup Commands The Setup commands allow you to define. and modifies the graphic symbology control for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command. review. one-line types. Set Symbology Control — Selects the standard graphic symbology control for all systems and one-line types in a design file. Setup 253 . and modifies the raceway default parameters for symbols. and modify the default parameters. report IDs. reviews. working view. Setup Commands In a new design file. Cell Creation Commands — Create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. Commands Set Raceway Defaults — Defines. and cross sections. Set Text Defaults — Defines. and modifies the default parameters for text.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Model Commands — Place and manipulate a model information in the design file. 254 .

Setup 255 . Some of the setups performed by this group of commands are required for later design work and database operations. Group Workflow Before using the symbology commands in this group (Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control). 10. Using the Setup Commands Before Using These Commands You must have a valid reference database attached to your design file before using the Setup commands. For individual command prerequisites. see the appropriate command descriptions. you must have defined at least one system and one-line type from the database using the Define System and Define One-Line Type commands._ _______________ Using the Setup Commands When to Use These Commands You will typically use Setup commands when you enter a design file for the first time. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.

between the routed cable/conduit. You will enter all raceway default values through the EE Raceway Defaults form. and/or modify the settings. 256 . Changes in these fields do not affect existing systems. Default settings are applied to new systems created in or added to a design file. select the field. page 164 for more information. and Raceway Connect Point (RCP) parameters. Cross Section — Displays the default Scale Factor and Rotation Angle for cross sections. such as Color or Active Angle. It also allows you to view the reference database contents for RCP. define. represented by the matrix buttons. The system uses these settings when annotating the model either during cell creation or after you have placed one in the design file. select the field. and key in a new value. reviews. define. Global Symbology — Displays the default symbology settings for Model Annotation. and key in a new value. define. existing systems.February 2003 Set Raceway Defaults This command defines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Define Duct Cross Section. select the field. see Define Duct Cross Section. You can review. Use the Set Symbology Control to make changes to individual. You can review. Margin Width — Defines the distance. Use these fields to set the default symbology for different systems in a design file. and/or modify the values in these fields. and/or modify any of the values in these fields. in sub-units. including cross section parameters. To change a displayed value. Parameters — Displays the EE Raceway default digitizing parameters. Duct — Specifies whether to use conduit or cable when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. and the shell of the duct bank when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. page 164 for more information. You can review. and key in a new value. symbol defaults. and modifies raceway defaults. To change a displayed value. To change a displayed value.

To change the current working view. The working view determines the orientation of text and cells you place through precision input. 10. The scale includes views 1 through 8. RCP — Displays the Default Weight for RCPs. Default Key — Displays the current default keys for RCP (raceway connect point). Select the Set Raceway Defaults command. The information will display in the scrollable list in the lower right corner of the form. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. and/or modify this key. and key in a new value. You can review. To change the displayed value. To change a displayed value. Additionally. define. 3. select first the key field and then the Display button. Symbols — Displays the names of the cells that represent equipment pointers and drop points. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit without saving your changes. and drag it along the scale until the desired view number displays. To display the current default data from the database for a particular element (RCP. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. equipment pointer._ _______________ Working view — Displays the current working view for the design file. and key in a new value. select the field. You can review. You can only view this data. equipment pointer. 2. Setup 257 . and drop point annotation. The EE Raceway Defaults form displays. Set Raceway Defaults Steps 1. select the field. This value will also become the default RCP weight on the Symbology Control form. and/or modify the value in this field. or drop point). select the slide bar. define. precision input uses the working view to place and locates points in the design.

The System Definition form displays. so as to avoid duplication of elements.February 2003 Define System This command allows you to select any or all available systems from the reference database for use in the design file. The systems you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). The System Definition form displays those systems available for selection from the reference database. select the Select All button. To remove ALL systems from definition in the design file. If you need systems not available to you._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 258 . 2. Select the systems in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. To define ALL systems from the reference database in the present design file. — OR — Select those systems listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. as well as those already selected for the current design file. In order to place one-lines. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. Select the Define System command. Steps 1. you must have at least one system defined in the design file. select the Clear All button.

— OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Setup 259 . Define System 10. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command._ _______________ The systems you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. 3.

you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. To remove ALL one-line types from definition in the design file. Select the Define One-Line Type command. 2. To define ALL one-line types from the reference database in the design file. The One Line Type Definition form displays. 260 . If you need one-line types not available to you._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. select the Clear All button. The One Line Type Definition form displays those oneline types available in the database. select the Select All button. so as to avoid duplication of elements.February 2003 Define One-Line Type This command allows you to select any or all available one-line types from the reference database for use in the design file. — OR — Select those one-line types listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. such as Set Active One-Line Type and Place One-Line Type. The one-line types you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). You must define one-line types for the design file before you can use related commands. Select the one-line types in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. as well as those already selected for the current design file.

_ _______________ 3. Setup 261 . Define One-Line Type The one-line types you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. 10. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes.

page 260 . to make any changes in symbology. all symbology is taken from the system defaults. In cases where you do not specify overrides for the one-line types within a system. those oneline types will use a system default. You can specify the one-line types for which to change the standard symbology by setting them to override mode. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays a matrix of systems and one-line types and the standard graphic symbology assigned to each system (all one-line types within a system are originally assigned the same symbology). You can also modify the system default symbology details if necessary. you must first use the Set Symbology Control command to specify the systems and one-line types that can be changed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When you enter a new design file. The Symbology Control command allows you to set up the symbology details for all the override cases within a system. see Define System. Before Using This Command You must have defined at least one system and one-line type in the design file. see Symbology Control.February 2003 Set Symbology Control This command defines the standard graphic symbology for all systems and one-line types in a design file. 262 . For more information. For more information. page 258 and Define One-Line Type. Therefore. page 264 .

Using your cursor. select the No Overrides button. — OR — Select a one-line type from the list to "turn on" the override for that type in all systems. The Override settings you selected are deleted from the Override field and the default settings restored. — OR — Steps Toggle the Available button in each field to None to change the defaults symbology for all one-line types within a system. Select the Set Symbology Control command. Setup 263 . To turn off ALL selected Override settings. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. The Override setting displays in the appropriate field(s). The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays. — OR — Select the individual Override settings you wish to "turn off" (return to default status)._ _______________ Steps 1. select the individual area that matches a system and one-line type to "turn on" an override for that case. so default symbology is not necessary for that system. Each one-line type within the system will then have its own symbology defined. 10. 2. 3.

One Line Type Overrides — Displays the one-line type within the displayed system for which you can change the symbology settings. and key in a new value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reviews. The Symbology Control form displays the current symbology settings for all systems and corresponding one-line types. Symbology — Displays the symbology settings for the selected system and one-line type. and key in a system name. System Default will display in the One-Line Type display list. and modifies the graphic symbology for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command (see Set Symbology Control. select the field. or select the field. The display list contains a list of available systems. To change the displayed one-line type (or system default). System — Displays the system for which you can currently change the symbology settings. select another one-line type from the list. You must have at least one system and one-line type defined for the design file in order to use this command. page 262 for more information about this command). You can review and edit these settings. If you have not set overrides for all one-line types within a system.February 2003 Symbology Control This command defines. and key in the new value. To change a value in the list. 264 . or select the field. To change the displayed system. select another system from the list. The display list contains a list of available one-line types within the currently displayed system.

2._ _______________ Steps 1. The Symbology Control form displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select the Symbology Control command. 3. Symbology Control 10. Setup 265 .

reviews. Line length — Displays the default length for lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. Width — Displays the default text width in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). To change the current text string justification. or select a value from the list. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. and modifies the MicroStation default parameters for text. Line spacing — Displays the default vertical spacing between lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . text nodes. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. Text Nodes — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text nodes in the design file. and engineering units.February 2003 Set Text Defaults This command defines. Field Descriptions Font — Displays the default font style number. Height — Displays the default text height in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). To change the current text node justification. You will enter all values using the Text form. 266 . select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. or select a value from the list. Text String — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text strings in the design file.

2. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. You can only review the displayed settings. Sub units._ _______________ Engineering Units — These fields (Master units. and Positional units) display the current PDS engineering units. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Setup 267 . Set Text Defaults Steps 1. The Text form displays. 10. Select the Set Text Defaults command.

Select the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the form without saving any changes. 268 . Steps 1. 2. Define which attributes to use.February 2003 Set Conduit Sizing Attributes This command defines which conduit attributes will be used in selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. — THEN — Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Set Conduit Sizing Attributes form displays.

You must have write access to the library before modifying it. Create Drop Point Cell — Creates a drop point symbol for later placement in the design file. rway. Create Equipment Pointer Cell — Creates an equipment pointer symbol for later placement in the design file. along with all existing cells. copy it to a nonproduction directory. in your cell library. The cells you create using this command are stored. EE Raceway is delivered with a sample cell library. Setup 269 ._ _______________ Create Cell Commands The Create Cell commands create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. which resides in win32app\eerway\dgn. Create Cell Commands 10. This section contains detailed descriptions of the following commands: Create Model Cell — Creates or recreates a model cell to carry the sheet name of a drawing. and modify the copied version.cel. If you want to modify the delivered library. You must have a cell library attached to the design file in order to activate the Create Cell commands.

You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Create Cell commands. 270 . For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. you can use these commands throughout the design session. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119 .February 2003 Using the Create Cell Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the Create Cell commands. To display a list of available cell libraries. key in rc= in the MicroStation Command Window. Before Using These Commands You must have a cell library with read/write privileges attached to the design file.

_ _______________
Create Model Cell
Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Create Model Cell

This command allows you to create a model cell and to store that cell permanently in your cell library.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the Model button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence.

10. Setup

5.

Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to Accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

271

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 10. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing sheet, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

272

_ _______________
Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

Create Model Cell

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

10. Setup

273

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Create Equipment Pointer Cell
This command allows you to create a equipment pointer symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the To Equipment button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence.

5.

Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

274

_ _______________
6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

Create Equipment Pointer Cell

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 11. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing equipment tag, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip

10. Setup

For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

275

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

276

_ _______________
Create Drop Point Cell

Create Drop Point Cell

This command allows you to create a drop point symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Your cell library must contain a drop point cell for the placement of onelines in the design file (the drop point establishes connectivity between an RCP and a one-line where the two are of a different one-line type). Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the Drop Point button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point

10. Setup

Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. 5. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

277

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 11. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing drop point tag, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

278

_ _______________
Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

Create Drop Point Cell

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

10. Setup

279

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Model Commands
These commands are used to place and manipulate model information in your design file.

Commands
Lock Model — Locks the symbology control parameters, the defined systems, and the defined one-line types. Move Model Annotation — Moves the model annotation within the design file.

Unlock Model — Unlocks the model.

Annotate Model — Adds, changes, or reviews the sheet name in a model.

280

_ _______________
Using the Model Commands When to Use These Commands
You may want to use the Lock Model command after performing basic design setups to lock the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. However, you can use these commands throughout the design session. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Using the Model Commands

Before Using These Commands
You should complete the symbology and basic design file setups before locking the model. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Model commands, because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119 .

Group Workflow
Before you can annotate or move annotation in the model, you must have locked the model using the Lock Model command.

Operating Information
During the operating sequence for any of these commands, you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file.

10. Setup

281

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Lock Model
This command locks the model. The locking of the model locks the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. Therefore, you should lock your model after setup, but before placing graphics in a file in order to protect your parameters. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Steps
1. Select the Lock Model command. The model is locked. If the model was locked when you selected this command, the message Model is already locked displays.

282

— OR — Exit the command. 10. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 2. page 119. and place it. For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. Select the Move Model Annotation command. Setup 283 ._ _______________ Move Model Annotation This command moves the model annotation within a design. Using the form. Enter placement point Move the annotation to the desired location. The command checks the design file for the existing model annotation and places it in drag mode. you can locate elements. route one-lines. reset a command action. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. Move Model Annotation Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. Steps 1. The Move Model Annotation precision input form displays.

Steps 1. Select the Unlock Model command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without unlocking the model. A warning form displays. 3. Select Confirm (√) to unlock the model.February 2003 Unlock Model This command unlocks the model. 284 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2. If you want to change the symbology control or add new systems and one-line types to a model that has been locked. you must first unlock the model using this command.

3. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. 10. If you want to display the annotation in the model. The Load Database process. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. Select the Annotate Model command. The Annotate Element form displays. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. If you toggled Display to On. Steps 1. 2. Setup 285 . The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. will prevent such duplication. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. however. 4. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select Confirm (√) to accept the new annotation._ _______________ Annotate Model Annotate Model This command adds or changes the annotation for the model.

February 2003 286 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Propagation Setup — Sets the active parameters for propagation in the design file. Runtime Commands Set Active One-Line Parameters — Displays the active one-line parameters. modify. Runtime Setup Commands 11. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. Set Active Levels — Displays the current active level(s) and allows you to turn Off displayed levels and to turn On new level displays. Runtime Setup Commands The Runtime Setup commands allow you to define._ _______________ 11. based on the current active one-line type. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. The Runtime Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EE Raceway Command Menu Bar. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to set a new active system. and allows you to set new active parameters. Display Element Information — Displays characteristics of selected elements. 287 .

Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. page 253 for more information about defining systems and one-line types. Before Using These Commands You must have at least one system and one-line type defined in the design file in order to use these commands. 288 . Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group.February 2003 Using the Runtime Setup Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. See Setup Commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Runtime The Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command allows you to enter values through the appropriate form. You can enter blank spaces into the design. page 294 ). but empty <Return>s enter nothing into the design. Otherwise. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Once you have deleted the override. You can only review the information in this field. select this field. When you change the active one-line type or end your design session. Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified one-line type. then the Active TRAY Parameters form will display when you use this command. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. and key in the new value. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field._ _______________ Set Active One-Line Type Parameters This command displays the active one-line parameters based on the current active one-line type you set using the Set Active One-Line Type command (see Set Active One-Line Type. You can review and modify the values in this field. 289 . If blanks exist for a field. which is based on the current active one-line type. if you defined tray as your active one-line type. you lose the overrides and specifications you saved to memory. For example. To change the values associated with a one-line type. The previous set of specifications becomes active again. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. Save to Memory (M) — Temporarily saves your overrides and specification changes. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. select the column value field and delete the blank character. the field remains null.

the value will display in the design where you place it. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. If an * displays in the List column. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. The key field is updated. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. If no key exists in the user element. Key Description — This field displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. To change the displayed value. the Default key is used. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. the Access column displays a R/W.February 2003 List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. To display the codelist. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. it becomes an override key to the reference database. If you delete the value in this field. Once you place an override key on an element. 290 . The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. If you can only view (read) the column value. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. Where the toggle is On. EE Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key in the reference database. the field remains null. select the *. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. you can modify it. then it will display an R. You can only review the information in this column. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. Otherwise. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. but cannot delete it. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the design display for each column value. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. and key in a new value. select the field. You can only review the information in this field. the key specified in the user element is used.

Runtime From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. and then select Confirm (√). the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. Clear button — This button clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. 291 ._ _______________ If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. select the row you want. which automatically activates it. If more than one row matches the criteria. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Override button — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. If you select Cancel (X).

> greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Steps 1. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. If you do not enter another operator. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 2. Select the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. representing zero or more characters. An Active One-Line Type Parameters form displays. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. This operator is a wild card. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. the system assumes =. 292 . representing a single character. This operator is a wild card.

Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. these values are loaded into the project database. Runtime 293 . optionally._ _______________ Any value you place with the Set Active One-line Parameters command will be entered into the drawing and. displayed. When you load the project database.

From the list. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. The Active One Line Type form displays. select the one-line type you want to make active. You must set an active one-line type in order to use the Place One-Line Type command. 2. page 260 ). based on your selections from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command (see Define One-Line Type. 3. Select the Set Active One-Line Type command. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The one-line type you selected highlights.February 2003 Set Active One-Line Type This command displays all one-line types available in the design file. Steps 1. 294 . The command also highlights the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new one from the set of those available.

Runtime Field Descriptions Systems — Selects the active system. Project Rules cannot be assigned. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. You can have no more than six systems active for each one-line type. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. Set Active System 11. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. You can have multiple systems defined for a single one-line type as a way of defining split trays or elements. Subsystem — Selects the subsystems. based on those you selected from the reference database using the Define System command (see Define System. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway._ _______________ Set Active System This command displays the current active system and all available systems. Systems Column — Displays all the available systems. you can select a new active system from the set of those available. When a new active system is selected. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. This is done by specifying a system and one or more subsystems. the subsystems are all unselected. While this button is depressed. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. page 258 ). whereas subsystems do not. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. The active system determines the symbology of the one-line type. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. Active System — Displays the active system which determines the symbology of the raceway. Using the Set Active System form. 295 .

This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. If an * displays. then a Project Rule can be assigned. 2. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. 3. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. 4. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. The Active System form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the system and subsystem(s) you want to make active. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Steps 1. Select the Set Active System command. The total of the system percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. Define the percentages and the project rules you want to use. select the *. To access the list of subsystems. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. To clear the Project Rule. press the Subsystem button. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. 296 . The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. The total space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. When a row is selected.February 2003 Percent — Displays the current percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems.

Propagates straight sections.Retrieves one-line type and RCP dimensions from specifications in the database and from overrides. Propagation sends these dimensions to the Eden symbol. For additional information about propagation.Sketches standard straights and fittings. radius. Smooth . 297 . Propagation Setup 11. Set the toggle to Off to skip part verification before propagation.Propagates straight sections and fittings. cutting them back to leave room for fittings. but lacks the detail that Eden propagation provides. Runtime Field Descriptions Propagation Style — Defines the active style of propagation. Part Verification — Enables or disables part verification.Propagates straight sections only._ _______________ Propagation Setup This command sets the active parameters for propagating one-line elements in the design file. Eden . using the dimensions of the cross sections and the transition. All fittings you place manually are propagated with Eden. Cutback . Set the toggle to On to verify that an element exists in the database before you propagate it. see The Drawing Process. Sketch propagation is considerably faster than Eden propagation. Rough . Sketch . regardless of the settings on this form. page 108 . and extension on the one-lines and RCPs. Propagation Mode — Defines the active propagation mode.

3. 298 . If you set the toggle to On. The Propagation Setup form displays. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. When the toggle is set to Off. any changes you make to an element. part verification will be performed. that affect the graphical display of the propagation. elements are automatically propagated when placed.February 2003 If Eden is the active propagation mode. 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving any changes to the form. Also. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. will cause the propagation to be deleted and redrawn to reflect the change. Select the Propagation Setup command. automatic propagation is disabled. Automatic Propagation — Enables or disables the automatic propagation of elements. like editing the size._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. regardless of the status of this toggle.

and then select the desired level number displayed in the Systems/One Line list. select the Turn Levels On/Off toggle. To turn on or off the display of a particular level._ _______________ Set Active Levels This command displays the current active level(s) and allows you both to turn off any active levels and to activate new levels. Set Active Levels 11. Turn Levels On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the display for the levels associated with the one-line types in your design file. Systems/One Line — Displays the available systems. All level display settings on the form are valid for whatever view is active. Runtime View — Displays the active view. You can only review the system and oneline information in these fields. 1 . select a value from the list. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. Restore — Returns the display of levels in the selected view to its state prior to entering the Set Active Levels command. or select the field. the button appears to be depressed. Levels — Indicate what levels display in the design. To change the active view.63 indicate whether or not each available level displays in the design. 299 . All On — Turns on the display of all levels in the design. All Off — Turns off the display of all levels in the design. their corresponding one-line types. and the levels on which they display. but can select the level numbers (in combination with the Turn Levels On/Off toggle). When a level has its display turned on. and key in a new value. select the appropriate level number. They also allow you to turn off or on the display of some or all available levels.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Graphics — Displays the level display for title block annotation in the design file. 300 . Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. 3. Select the Set Active Levels command. Steps 1. 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. The Levels form displays.

or an RCP within a run is selected. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element and select another element. then the four key attributes associated with the fitting are displayed. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 3. location and radius of each bend in the run. and coordinate location of ends and bends. Display Element Information 11._ _______________ Display Element Information This command displays raceway element characteristics. Return to step 2. 301 . Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element and display that element’s information. If either a one-line. 2. Return to step 2. Runtime If a fitting or an RCP that is at the termination of a run is selected. a straight section. Select the Display Element Information command. then run information is displayed. Steps 1. Identify Raceway element Select the element you want to review. a fitting within a run. This information includes: segment lengths.

February 2003 302 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

You can also use the commands to display the identification criteria of specified elements and the system and one-line type of an identified element. Utilities Commands Toggle Construction Display On/Off — Turns the display of construction class elements on or off. Utilities Commands The Utilities commands highlight elements within your design file based on the identification criteria (ASID ID. Highlight Element by ASID ID — Highlights an element with a given ASID ID. sector/word position) you provide. Highlight Element by Link — Highlights an element with given entity and mslink values. 303 . Highlight Element by Sector/Word — Highlights elements with a given sector/word position. Highlight Propagation Errors — Identifies existing propagation errors in a design file._ _______________ 12. Display System and One-Line Type — Displays the associated system and one-line type of an identified element. Display Element Type and ASID ID — Displays the element type and ASID ID of an identified element. Utilities Commands 12. Display Link — Displays the entity and mslink values of an identified element. Display Sector/Word Value — Displays the sector/word position of an identified element. In addition. you can highlight propagation errors in the design file.

or shows the coordinate system currently active.February 2003 Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System or Plant Coordinate System associated with the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 304 .

_ _______________ Using the Utilities Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. you will use those commands that display the attribute information of an element (Display ASID ID. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input. Group Workflow In general. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. you can use these commands throughout the design session. for example) before the commands that highlight elements based on the attribute information you specify (Highlight Element by ASID ID. Utilities You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. Using the Utilities Commands Before Using These Commands 12. page 119 . Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. see Precision Input Form. 305 . for example). you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

Select the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command from the menu. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select the Update View command to see the results of the display toggle.February 2003 Toggle Construction Display On/Off This command turns On and Off the display for construction elements within each individual view in the design file. Select view Place a data point in the view in which you want the annotation display toggled On or Off. this command allows you to view all the non-displayed EE elements as well as any other construction class elements. 3. Steps 1. All non-displayed EE text elements are automatically placed in construction class. When construction display is On. 306 . Therefore. Once you have exited the command. Press <R> to exit the command. the view number displays in a prompt. The top of the prompt area displays all views in which the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command is toggled to On.

The file will display in a form on the screen. and both are relative to 1. 4 (line string). If you do not specify a pathname for the file. Go to Step 4. Element highlighted The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Key in sector and word value or file name Key in the sector and word value separated by a space. the entire complex element highlights. Key in another sector/word combination to continue highlighting elements by sector and word. but is not added to a working set. Steps 1. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the sector and word values. 3. The sector/word position must be the location of an element type 2 (cell). If the element is part of a complex element. Utilities You can specify a filename instead of the sector/word position to highlight an element. the element highlights._ _______________ Highlight Element by Sector/Word This command highlights elements by a sector/word position that you specify. Highlight Element by Sector/Word Highlight Sector/Word With Filename 12. The position of the sector and word are compatible with EDG. the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. 7 (text node). The file must contain the sector/word position of the element(s) you want to highlight. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 4. Select the Highlight Element By Sector/Word command. or 17 (text). 2. 3 (line). If the position is valid. Press <Esc> to exit. allowing you to select the sector/word value from the displayed file. 307 . 6 (shape).

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Return to Step 1. Select sector and word value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. Point to view for window Identify the view where you want the element highlighted. 7. select Confirm (√) to accept the sector and word value in the line. Identify a line that contains a sector and word value. 6. Return to Step 1. Go to Step 6. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. After you select a line. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified.February 2003 5. Press <D> to select another sector/word value from the File Display form. 308 .) Go to Step 4. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the file display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1.

the raceway element highlights. The Parent of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the parents of the element having the given ASID ID. Select the Highlight Element By Asid Id command. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command. you can specify the file pro. 12. The file must contain the ASID ID of the element(s) you want to highlight. The Children of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the children of the element having the given ASID ID. Utilities Steps 1.err. allowing you to select the ASID ID from the displayed file. to see where propagation errors exist in your design file. 2. Highlight ASID ID With Filename You can specify a filename instead of the ASID ID to highlight an element. Select the appropriate Highlight by ASID ID button. The All Elements button highlights all raceway elements associated with the element having the given ASID ID: the element itself and all of its children. The file will display in a form on the screen. If the ASID ID you specify is valid. the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. 309 . The Select hilite asid mode form displays. For example. but is not added to the working set. If you do not specify a pathname for a file. The Only the Element button highlights only the raceway element having the given ASID ID._ _______________ Highlight Element by ASID ID Highlight Element by ASID ID This command highlights elements by an ASID identification (ID) that you specify.

Return to step 1. Key in asid id or file name Key in the ASID ID. 5. Return to step 2. Return to step 2. — OR — Key-in the filename of a file containing the ASID IDs. 6._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . a file display form displays. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Key in another ASID ID to continue highlighting raceway elements. Go to step 6. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit the command. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit. 4. Continue highlighting the elements according to the specified Highlight by ASID ID mode. Select asid id from form After you enter the filename. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the elements highlighted.February 2003 3. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. 310 . Element highlighted The raceway element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified.

Return to step 2._ _______________ Select a line that contains an ASID ID. 9. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. 311 . Return to step 1. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element(s) highlighted. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in step 3. Go to step 8. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to modify the highlight by asid mode. Press <D> to select another ASID ID from the file display form. 7. Highlight Element by ASID ID After you select a line. Return to step 3.) Go to step 5. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. select Confirm (√) to accept the ASID ID in the line. Utilities 8. Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. 12.

4 (line string). Go to Step 4. 4. Key in another entity/mslink combination to continue highlighting elements by mslink. the element highlights. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 2. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the entity and mslink values. If the entity and mslink are valid. but is not added to a working set. 3. The file must contain the entity and mslink of the element(s) you want to highlight. the command searches for it in the <current project>/rway/tmp directory.February 2003 Highlight Element by Link This command highlights elements by given entity (table) and mslink values that you specify. Key in entity and mslink (###:###) or filename Key in the entity and mslink values separated by a :. Press <Esc> or <R> to exit. 7 (text node). the entire complex element highlights. Identify a line that contains the entity and mslink values. 3 (line). Steps 1. Element highlighted The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Highlight Link With Filename You can specify a filename instead of the entity and mslink combination to highlight an element. If you do not specify a pathname for the file. 6 (shape). The file will display in a form on the screen. 312 . Select the Highlight Element By Link command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If the element is part of a complex element. allowing you to select the mslink from the displayed file. Select entity/mslink value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. 5. The entity and mslink values must correspond with an element type 2 (cell). or 17 (text).

— OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Press <D> to select more entity and mslink values from the file display form. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. select Confirm (√) to accept the entity and mslink values in the line. 6. Go to Step 6. Return to Step 1. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. Utilities Point to the view where you want the element highlighted. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. 313 . Point to view for window Highlight Element by Link 12. 7. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command.) Go to Step 4. Return to Step 1._ _______________ After you select a line.

select the error(s) from the list. and select Confirm (√). 3.February 2003 Highlight Propagation Errors This command highlights propagation errors in the design file. — OR — Select Reset or Cancel (X) to exit the command. Select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. and the pro.err file displays. The propagation error(s) highlights in the design file. Review the errors listed on the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To highlight a particular error(s) in the design file. Steps 1. The pro. Continue highlighting propagation errors.err form redisplays. 314 . 2. Go to step 2. — OR — Exit the form without highlighting any propagation errors.

Select the Display Sector/Word command. of an identified element. Display Sector/Word Value Steps 1. Utilities 315 . 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Identify element Select the element to display the sector/word for. and accept it with a <D>. in the MicroStation command window._ _______________ Display Sector/Word Value This command displays the sector and word position. The sector and word for the selected element displays in the MicroStation command window. 12.

Steps 1. The element type and ASID ID display in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Display Element Type and ASID ID This command displays the element type and the ASID identification (ID). Identify element Select the element for which to display the ASID ID and accept it with <D>. in the MicroStation command window. of an identified element. Select the Display Element Type and ASID ID command. 2. 316 .

Display Link Steps 1. Utilities 317 . Select the Display Link command. of an identified element. 2. mslink = <value> — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. Identify element Select the element you want to display the link for and accept it with <D>._ _______________ Display Link This command displays the entity (table) and mslink. The entity and mslink values display in the MicroStation command window in the following format: Entity (table number) = <value>. 12. in the MicroStation command window.

To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Using the form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select the Display System and One-Line Type command from the menu. At any point during this operating sequence. 2. and exit a command. The precision input form displays. — OR — Exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Display System and One-Line Type This command displays the system and one-line type associated with an element you identify. along with the Print System and One-Line Type form. Steps 1. page 119. reject input. see Precision Input Form. The identified element highlights. route one-lines. 318 . accept input. reset a command action.

The fields on the form fill with information about the element’s one-line type. — OR — Exit the command. The system prompts you to identify another element. system. and subsystems (if applicable). Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 319 . The system prompts you to identify another element. Go to step 2. 4. Utilities — OR — Reject the highlighted element._ _______________ 3. Go to step 2. Display System and One-Line Type 12. Continue identifying elements in the design file.

you can select either the Activate Design Volume Coordinate System or Activate Plant Coordinate System commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . model graphics do not rotate to reflect the active coordinate system. When the coordinate system is switched between the PCS and DVCS. and Show Active Coordinate System commands. Show Active Coordinate System The Show Active Coordinate System command displays the active coordinate system in the status field.February 2003 Active Coordinate System This palette provides the Active Design Volume Coordinate System. Activate Plant Coordinate System. If you desire to change the coordinate system. Commands Activate Design Volume Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) allowing you to define a local coordinate system for a particular model. Activate Design Volume Coordinate System The Activate Design Volume Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Design Volume Coordinate System. Instead. the coordinate system rotates when the active coordinate system is changed. The Plant Coordinate System uses this global coordinate system to maintain the relationships among the various models. Show Active Coordinate System — Displays the active coordinate system in the status field. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. 320 . Activate Plant Coordinate System The Activate Plant Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Plant Coordinate System. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. Activate Plant Coordinate System — Activates the Plant Coordinate System (PCS). This becomes important when attaching reference models to the active model.

then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. 321 ._ _______________ 13. The Database palette is activated by selecting Database from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. 13. Database Commands The Database commands are used to load and run reports from the database. Database Rulecheck — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. Reports — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. Database Commands Topics Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 322 . instructions for using these commands are described in each individual command section. Before Using These Commands Refer to the individual command descriptions for any requirements which may be necessary before using each command. command key-ins. and screen prompts vary for each command. Group Workflow You must load the database before you can run a report or rulecheck. Operating Information Because the operating sequence.February 2003 Using the Database Commands When to Use These Commands Use these command to run limited database commands while still in the graphic design session.

The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. 13. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. Load Database When you run the Load Database command on a design file that has been loaded previously into the database. All RCP’s and segments must have a tag number before using this command. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw Column Name pds_east* Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system._ _______________ Load Database This command loads a relational database with information generated by the EE Raceway design file. Database rcp_to_drw pds_north* rcp_to_drw pds_elev* rcp_to_sys ee_percent*** drop_point ee_dist_down_ol** drop_point ee_dist_to_rcp** one_line ee_ol_length** ol_to_sys ee_percent*** 323 . the command removes the occurrences of the previous load and completely reloads the design file. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process.

straight pds_north* straight pds_elev* str_to_sys ee_percent*** fitting pds_east* fitting pds_north* fitting pds_elev* fit_to_sys ee_percent*** * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. 324 . Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The columns are optional for Load Database.February 2003 straight straight ee_tl_length pds_east* The graphical length of the straight in master units. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system.

The Load database screen displays. where you may review the errors. Enter error and output filenames. When you are finished completing the input information. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. and is displayed automatically to the screen. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. 325 . or accept the displayed defaults. 13. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur._ _______________ Steps 1. When complete. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Accept will load database. Steps 2. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. the message above displays. and the process begins. Database 3. The message file is created on every run of the process. select Confirm (√). Select Load database command. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. the message above displays. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs.

see Create Project for the directory structure. You must load the project database before running any reports. Key in any information that is not supplied by default. an input screen displays. select the output file box and key in a new name. You can change the name of the output file or error file. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports.February 2003 Report This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. These reports report on the project and reference databases. See Reports. All reports are kept in the /reports directory. To change the output filename. When you process a report. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in.) 326 . The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report.dat file (win32app\eerway\data)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Select the Report command. 3. Define the report input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the report. Report Steps 1. Select the report you want to run from the list. Database You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example._ _______________ If you want to save reports throughout a project. 2. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting 327 . you should name the output files yourself. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. 4. For instance. 13. the new file will overwrite that file. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates.

and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. 328 .February 2003 direction._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________
Rule Checks

Rule Checks

This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. You must load the project database before running any rule checks.

Overview
13. Database
This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway rule checks. For more detailed information about each rule check, see Reports, page 545 . The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. When you process a rule check, an input screen displays.

The name of the rule check report displays at the top. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields, or change that information according to your specifications.

329

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 If you want to save reports throughout a project, you should name the output files yourself. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously, the new file will destroy the previously created file. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name.

Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Rule command. Select the rule check report you want to run from the listing area. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. Define the input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the rule check report.

330

_ _______________
14. Raceway Processes
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of EE Raceway processes. You will run all EE Raceway processes from the Process menu found on the EE Raceway Drawing menu. (See Process in the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about running all processes.) The individual EE Raceway processes are described in the following sections:

Raceway Processes

Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. Unload Design — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database, based on the design filename you specify. Unload Sheet — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database, based on the internal sheet name you specify. Cleanup Database — Removes any data from a project database that is not currently associated with a design in the project’s ../rway/dgn directory. Create Interference Envelope (default name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks. Create Interference Envelope (given name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file, with the name you specify, that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks.

14. EERWAY Processes

331

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Load Database
This process loads a relational database with information generated by an EERWAY design file. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. 1. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading, using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu. Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. Load database tracks drawing information based on the "Drawing" table of the project database. Thus, you must annotate the drawing or model and enter the unique "SHEET" information, using the Lock Model and the Annotate Model commands respectively.

2.

This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_sys drop_point drop_point Column Name pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** ee_dist_down_ol** ee_dist_to_rcp** Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin, and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. The graphical length of the straight in master units. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range.

one_line ol_to_sys straight straight straight straight

ee_ol_length** ee_percent*** ee_tl_length pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev*

332

_ _______________
str_to_sys fitting fitting fitting fit_to_sys ee_percent*** pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent***

Load Database

Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system.

* The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. The columns are optional for Load Database. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway.

Steps
1. Select Load database from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Load database screen displays.

14. EERWAY Processes

2.

Enter drawing name. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files).

333

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Enter error and output filenames. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields, or accept the displayed defaults. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between Foreground, Background, and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections. When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen, where you may review the errors. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The message file is created on every run of the process, and is displayed automatically to the screen. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

334

_ _______________
Batch File Option
The load database process can be executed from a batch file. Setup an rway.bat file to export the necessary Microstation and EERWAY environment variables to execute the load database process. Include the following EERWAY environment variables: EES_REFDB — RIS Schema name for reference database EE_SCHEMA — RIS Schema name for project database EERD_MSGS — Directory path for EERWAY message files EERD_TBLS — Directory path for EERWAY database table files Example of rway.bat:

Batch File Option

SET SET SET SET SET SET

MS=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION MS_EXE=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION EES_REFDB=CERT60_REF EE_SCHEMA=CERT60_PRJ EERD_MSGS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ EERD_TBLS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\

14. EERWAY Processes

335

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Unload Design
This process unloads a design from a relational database, based on the design filename you specify. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The Unload Design process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), one-lines, and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The process will not modify anything in the reference database, nor will it delete information from user-defined tables.

Steps
1. Select Unload from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Unload Design database screen displays.

2.

Enter design name. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files).

3.

Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run, unless you specify unique filenames in these fields.

336

_ _______________
4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections.

Unload Design

When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, is created on every run of the process, and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

14. EERWAY Processes

337

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Unload Sheet
This process unloads an EE Raceway drawing from a relational database, based on the internal sheet name you specify. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The Unload Sheet process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), one-lines, and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. The drawing you are unloading must have a title block, and the sheet name in the title block must match the database entry for that drawing, since the process keys off the sheet name in the title block. If the sheet name contains blanks, it must be specified in single quotes.

Steps
1. Select Unload Sheet from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Unload Sheet database screen displays.

2. 3.

Key in a sheet name. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names.

338

_ _______________
The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run, unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections.

Unload Sheet

When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, is created on every run of the process, and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review.

14. EERWAY Processes

You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

339

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Cleanup Database
This process removes information from the database that is not in any drawing currently loaded in the database. For example, information may have been added through the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) to test for a special case or to create customized tables. This process also removes information on any EE Raceway drawing which has been deleted, but for some reason was not removed from the database. The Cleanup Database process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), onelines, and three-lines that are part of the project database but which are not part of any raceway design file. This process will not unload records of customized tables in the database. The process uses the filenames in the drawing table of all current drawings. It then makes a list of all valid drawings, and deletes anything from the database which is not connected to one of these drawings. This process will not delete drawings. It will delete from the database only that information which is not in any current drawing.

Steps
1. Select Cleanup Database from the Process Menu, and select Confirm (√). The Cleanup Database screen displays.

2.

Enter error and output filenames. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields, or accept the displayed defaults.

340

lists all the errors that occurred during processing. 14. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The process begins. Confirm your selections.msg file. the message above displays. The . 4. 3. Background. page 64 ). The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. is created. You may choose between Foreground. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Cleanup Database When you are finished completing the input information. Select the desired operating mode. 341 . You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. and it includes a log of what was unloaded during processing. EERWAY Processes You can view either file using the Output option on the Utilities screen. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. When complete. the message above displays. select Confirm (√). Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. It will display mostly zeroes.err file.

2. Upon completion.prj/rway/dgn/<filename. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (default name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Enter design name. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. the process writes the file to <current_project>. 3.env>. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. Steps 1. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. 342 . Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames).

the above message displays. Otherwise. background. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. lists all errors that occurred during the process. EERWAY Processes 343 . and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). The . Select the desired operating mode. Confirm your selections. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. displays all processing information.prj/rway/tmp directory.err file. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. When complete. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. 14. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. select the Confirm button (√).prj/rway/tmp directory. The process begins. You may choose between foreground. Create Interference Envelope (default name) When you finish completing the input information. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 5. Otherwise. the above message displays. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The ._ _______________ 4.msg file.

you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection.env>. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (given name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). 344 . Enter design name. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. 3. Key in a name for the envelope file. the process writes the file to <current_project>. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. 4. Upon completion. Steps 1.prj/rway/dgn/<filename. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays: 2.

Create Interference Envelope (given name) When you finish completing the input information. Otherwise. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Select the desired operating mode. 6. lists all errors that occurred during the process. Otherwise. Confirm your selections. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review._ _______________ 5. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. displays all processing information.err file. 14. EERWAY Processes 345 .prj/rway/tmp directory. the above message displays. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You may choose between foreground.msg file.prj/rway/tmp directory. select the Confirm button (√). an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. When complete. the above message displays. The process begins. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. background. The . The .

February 2003 346 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

If you want to place your source symbol files in a different directory. The delivered default symbol source file path is <current_project>/rway/tmp. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library — Extracts a specified symbol from an Eden symbol library. and edit the Eden symbol file. You will use these processes to compile Eden symbols. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries — Merges the contents of two Eden symbol libraries into one library. You will access the Eden processes from the EDEN option found on the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. page 59 . manipulate the Eden symbol library. For information about accessing the processes. You should also consult the appendix in this guide entitled Eden Symbol Generation . The path to the extracted symbol source file called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. Delete EDEN Symbol — Deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library._ _______________ 15. The path to the symbol library called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_LIB. as follows: Compile EDEN Symbol — Compiles an Eden symbol file. If you want to place your Eden library in a different directory. exporting RWAY_EDEN_LIB to specify the appropriate directory. Extract EDEN User Function From Library — Extracts a specified user function from an Eden symbol library. then edit the . List EDEN User Functions — Lists Eden user functions in a selected Eden symbol library. List EDEN Symbol Library — Lists Eden symbols in a selected Eden symbol library. The delivered default symbol library path is win32app\eerway\eden. Each Eden process is described in a separate section. Compress EDEN Symbol Library — Compresses an Eden symbol library to remove unused space left by deleted symbols. see Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. and gives you the option of placing the symbol in an Eden symbol library. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide.EErc file in your home directory. Eden Processes 347 . Eden Processes For a general description of Eden symbol generation. Eden Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of available Eden processes. 15. then edit the to specify the appropriate directory.

348 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File — Uses a standard ASCII editor to edit a specified symbol source file.

349 . and key in a new option. 15. and key in a new filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. For information about the path to the symbol source file. To change the displayed default library name. and key in a new filename. Enter option — Displays the default compile option (-o). The -l option simply lists the compiled Eden symbol file. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Eden Processes Before Using This Command You must create an Eden symbol file. To change the displayed error filename._ _______________ Compile EDEN Symbol This process compiles an Eden symbol file. To change the displayed output filename. and gives you the option of placing the compiled symbol in an Eden symbol library. and key in a filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. select the field. To change the displayed option. See Eden Symbol Generation. select the field. Compile EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and then adds the symbol to the specified library. Enter symbol source file — Displays the name of the symbol source file to compile. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To enter the symbol source file. select the field. and key in a new library name. select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. page 513 for information about symbol file creation. select the field. The -o option lists the compiled Eden symbol file.

For information about operating modes. 3. and the Eden process begins. When you have completed the input information. You can view either file on the screen.err file. You can choose between foreground. background. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The . Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. see EDEN. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. select Confirm (√). The . and select Confirm (√). The Compile EDEN Symbol form displays. the message above displays. Select the desired operating mode. contains any output from the process.February 2003 Steps 1. see Output.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. the above message displays.msg file. 350 . lists all the errors that occurred during processing. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 4. page 89. and batch operating modes. Confirm your selections. page 67 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . Select Compile EDEN Symbol from the list. 2. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.

see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Eden Processes 351 . 15. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to delete from the library. select the field. select the field. For information about the path to the symbol source file. To change the displayed library name. select the field. and key in a new filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. select the field. To change the displayed error filename. To enter the symbol name._ _______________ Delete EDEN Symbol This process deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. and key in a new library name. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. and key in the name. Delete EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To change the displayed output filename.

and batch operating modes. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. When you have completed the input information. contains any output from the process.err file. The Delete EDEN Symbol form displays. and the Eden process begins. select Confirm (√). see EDEN. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. For information about operating modes. Confirm your selections. Select the desired operating mode. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can choose between foreground. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.February 2003 Steps 1.msg file.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 2. Select Delete EDEN Symbol from the list. You can view either file on the screen. see Output. 352 . page 67 . 3. The . 4. the message above displays. The ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. page 89. and select Confirm (√). background. the above message displays.

To change the displayed library name. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in a new library name. select the field. select the field. List EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new filename. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Eden Processes 353 . Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed error filename. 15. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed output filename. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name._ _______________ List EDEN Symbol Library This process lists the Eden symbols in the selected Eden library.

select Confirm (√). 3. page 67 .msg file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. You can view either file on the screen. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. see Output. 4. The List EDEN Symbol Library form displays. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. contains any output from the process. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Confirm your selections. and batch operating modes. background.err file. 2. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. The . and the Eden process begins.February 2003 Steps 1. and select Confirm (√). the message above displays. You can choose between foreground. For information about operating modes. Select the desired operating mode.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . 354 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. When you have completed the input information. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. see EDEN. The . page 89. the above message displays.

Eden Processes Select the desired operating mode. For information about operating modes. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed library name. and key in a new filename. select the field. and select Confirm (√). Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. 15. For information about the path to the symbol library. 2. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. see EDEN. and key in a new filename. List EDEN User Functions Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and batch operating modes. Steps 1. page 67 ._ _______________ List EDEN User Functions This process lists the Eden user functions in the selected Eden library. 355 . and key in a new library name. select the field. select the field. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. 3. To change the displayed error filename. The List EDEN User Functions form displays. You can choose between foreground. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. To change the displayed output filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. background.

The . The . the above message displays. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. the message above displays.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. When you have completed the input information.msg file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. contains any output from the process. lists all the errors that occurred during processing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Output. and the list will display. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 356 . You can view either file on the screen. The . select Confirm (√). Confirm your selections. page 89.err file.February 2003 4.

The Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries form displays. and key in a name. 15. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Merge from library name — Displays the name of the symbol library whose contents you will merge with first library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter._ _______________ Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries This process merges two Eden symbol libraries into one. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed error filename. and key in a new filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. For information about the path to the symbol library. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a name. For information about the path to the symbol library. and select Confirm (√). select the field. To enter a library name. select the field. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries from the list. Merge into library name — Displays the name of the symbol library into which you will merge the contents of a second library. To enter a library name. Eden Processes Steps 1. 2. 357 . select the field. select the field. To change the displayed output filename.

The ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For information about operating modes. Confirm your selections. 4. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.February 2003 3. 358 . and batch operating modes.err file. You can view either file on the screen. The . see Output. the above message displays. When you have completed the input information.msg file. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. background. page 89.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. select Confirm (√). see EDEN. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. contains any output from the process. The . Select the desired operating mode. and the Eden process begins. page 67 . You can choose between foreground. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. the message above displays.

To change the displayed library name. 15. Select the desired operating mode. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Select Compress EDEN Symbol Library from the list. To change the displayed output filename. and batch operating modes. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Compressing the library removes the unused space left by deleted symbols. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. see EDEN. background._ _______________ Compress EDEN Symbol Library This process compresses the selected Eden symbol library. Compress EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. For information about operating modes. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. page 67 . You can choose between foreground. 359 . Eden Processes 2. To change the displayed error filename. and select Confirm (√). 3. select the field. The Compress EDEN Symbol Library form displays. select the field. Steps 1. and key in a new filename. and key in the name of the library you intend to compress. select the field.

February 2003 4.err file. 360 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. see Output. the message above displays. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. Confirm your selections. When you have completed the input information. The . select Confirm (√). You can view either file on the screen. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. page 89. the above message displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . contains any output from the process. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. and the Eden process begins. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.msg file.

To change the displayed output filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. For information about the path to the symbol library. select the field. To enter the symbol name. select the field. To change the displayed error filename. The delivered default source symbol path is win32app\eerway\eden. 15. for example). then edit the . The extracted symbol is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. and key in a new library name. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed library name. Eden Processes 361 .EErc file in win32app\eenuc. and key in the name. The path to the extracted symbol source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. The symbol is not deleted from the library when you extract it. select the field._ _______________ Extract EDEN Symbol From Library This process extracts a symbol from the selected library. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. and key in a new filename. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to extract from the library. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. If you want to store your source symbol files in another directory. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. and key in a new filename.

page 89. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. You can choose between foreground. 2. select Confirm (√). For information about operating modes. see Output. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The . see EDEN. 4. page 67 . the message above displays. the above message displays.msg file. The Extract EDEN Symbol From Library form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and select Confirm (√). Confirm your selections. 362 . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The .February 2003 Steps 1. and batch operating modes. Select the desired operating mode. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Select Extract EDEN Symbol From Library from the list. contains any output from the process. You can view either file on the screen. background.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review.err file. and the Eden process begins. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. 3. When you have completed the input information.

then edit the . Eden Processes 363 . select the field. The delivered default source user function path is win32app\eerway\eden. select the field. To change the displayed output filename. The path to the extracted user function source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. To change the displayed library name. and key in a new library name. The extracted user function is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. select the field. 15. To change the displayed error filename. select the field._ _______________ Extract EDEN User Function From Library Extract EDEN User Function From Library This process extracts a user function from the selected library. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. The user function is not deleted from the library when you extract it. For information about the path to the symbol library. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the user function you intend to extract from the library. To enter the user function name. for example). and key in the name.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. and key in a new filename. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. If you want to store your source user function files in another directory.

Select the desired operating mode. The . Select Extract EDEN User Function From Library from the list. and select Confirm (√)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For information about operating modes. The Extract EDEN User Function From Library form displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The . page 67 . select Confirm (√). see EDEN. and the Eden process begins.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. You can choose between foreground. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. When you have completed the input information.err file.February 2003 Steps 1. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. the message above displays. 364 . 2. and batch operating modes. 4. background. 3. Confirm your selections.

_ _______________
Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the above message displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen, see Output, page 89.

Extract EDEN User Function From Library

15. Eden Processes

365

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Edit EDEN Symbol File
This process allows you to edit a symbol source file using a standard ASCII editor. It is only available on a graphics terminal.

Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename, select the field, and key in a new filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed error filename, select the field, and key in a new filename. Enter editor — Displays the name of the default ASCII editor (vi) that you will use to edit the Eden symbol file. To change the displayed editor, select the field, and key in a new standard ASCII editor name. Enter symbol file name — Displays the name of the symbol file you intend to edit. To enter a symbol filename, select the field, and key in a symbol file name. For information about the path to the symbol source file, see the description at the beginning of this chapter.

366

_ _______________
Steps
1. Select Edit EDEN Symbol File from the list, and select Confirm (√). The Edit EDEN Symbol File form displays: 2. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes. For information about operating modes, see EDEN, page 67 . 4. Confirm your selections. When you have completed the input information, select Confirm (√), and the Eden process begins.

Steps

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the above message displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen, see Output, page 89.

15. Eden Processes

367

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

368

_ _______________
16. Integrated Commands
The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules, providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes, review the PDS clashes in a model, create a window containing a specific element, and display information about the reference models attached to the current model. The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS, not when running standalone EE Raceway.

Integrated Commands

The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar, then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu.

16. Integrated Commands

369

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Using the Integrated Commands
When to Use These Commands
Once you have performed the necessary setups, you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Before Using These Commands
Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection, and must have an existing clash in the design area.

Group Workflow
There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group.

Operating Information
See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.

370

_ _______________
16.1 Review PDS Attributes
The Review PDS Attributes command displays the database attributes of a selected component. Items being reviewed can be in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. To view pipe centerlines (to review the line segments), you need to display construction type elements. Use the MicroStation Settings > View Attributes > Turn on construction command.

Review PDS Attributes

Parameters
Attribute Name – Lists the item’s attributes. Value – Displays the item’s attribute value that is defined in the database. Close – Exits the Review PDS Attributes dialog box.

16. Integrated Commands

371

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

16.2

Reference PDS Model
The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project.

Parameters
Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Select the discipline which contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Select the design area which contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Attach – Attaches a reference model. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach.

372

_ _______________
Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command.

Reference PDS Model

16. Integrated Commands

373

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

16.3

Window to Named PDS Item
The Window to Named PDS Item command zooms in on an item whose attribute you identify. You can search for items in the active model or in attached PDS reference files.

Options
Active Model / Reference Files – Specifies whether to look for the item in the active model or in the attached reference files. Discipline – Specifies the discipline of the item you are looking for. You can select: Piping, Equipment, PE HVAC, or Raceway. Depending on which discipline you select, the item attributes you can search for changes. — Piping Attributes – Line Number Label, Line ID, Inspection Iso ID, Piping Component Number, Pipe Tag, Instrument Component Number, or Pipe Support Number — Equipment Attributes – Equipment Number or Equipment and Nozzle Number — PE HVAC Attributes – System ID or Item ID — Raceway Attributes – RCP Tag, One Line Tag, Drop Point Tag, or Equipment ID Item Name – Specify the attribute value to search for. Restore View of Model – Restores the view setting.

374

_ _______________
16.4 Review PDS Clash
The Review PDS Clash command edits and reviews existing clashes and approves existing clashes.

Review PDS Clash

Parameters
Project Name – Displays the active project name. Design Area – Displays the active design area name. Clash Type – Displays the clash type. Date – Displays the date and time the clashes were detected. Unapprove Clash – Changes the status of the clash from approved to unapproved. Approve Real Clash – Approves the clash as a real clash in the Project Control Database. Approve False Clash – Approves the clash as a false clash in the Project Control Database. Review Unapproved Clash / Review Approved Clash – Specifies if you want to review approved or unapproved clashes. Clash Marker – Displays the number of the current clash. Select a marker number with the left and right arrows; or, select the field and key in a marker number.

16. Integrated Commands

375

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Item A – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Item B – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Comments – Displays existing comments about the active clash. You can also select the field and type in any additional information. Highlight Clash – Highlights the clash in the selected view. Select View – Zooms in and updates the selected view. Click Select View then select the view you want to update.

376

Asid <numeric value>. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. Asid <numeric value>. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Appendix A Error Messages A: Error Messages This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. 377 . fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load.

Recovery: Change element annotation.February 2003 Asid <numeric value>. <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. 378 . Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. Recovery: Change element annotation. Asid <numeric value>. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Recovery: None. 379 . Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. when highlighting by sector and word. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. straight connected to invalid system! A: Error Messages Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. Asid:<numeric value> <string> Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Asid <numeric value>. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege. Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support.

Invalid olt on oneline.". Recovery: Key in another cell name.February 2003 Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. Cannot Place Cross Section. If the problem persists. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . call Intergraph support. "$". Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active. Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. Recovery: The program will restore the original text. and replace the one-line. the name input already exists in the attached cell library. Invalid sys on oneline. Cannot Place Cross Section. 380 . Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden. If the problem persists. or ". Recovery: Key-in in only characters. call Intergraph support. digits. and replace the one-line.

Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. Recovery: None._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Color not in range 0 to 127 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file. 381 . Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command.ins is not in the proper location. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 127. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. A: Error Messages Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key.

Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Could not get one line type part table from user data._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist.February 2003 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. Please export this variable. Could not get one line type from user data. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. 382 .

Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. based on cause of error. A: Error Messages Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: There are various recoveries. Recovery: None. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. 383 . Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. Recovery: None. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it.

Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. Could not write to TCB. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table. 384 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file. Recovery: Make sure the key is correct. Recovery: Enter correct filename. insert it into the reference database. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. If the key does not exist. Recovery: Key in a new key value.February 2003 Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a one-line. The database is case-dependent. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file.

Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. Recovery: None. A: Error Messages Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. Recovery: Enter correct directory name. Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Enter design filename. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. change the spec. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters. 385 . Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting.

Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>.February 2003 Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. 386 . Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal. Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>.

Recovery: Enter a new asid number. Recovery: Exit the command and retry. A: Error Messages Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid. 387 . Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element. Error closing propagation log file. Recovery: Enter a new value. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Make sure the pro. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Propagation status may not be recorded. Reason: File pro.err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Recovery: Change access to design file. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data.err did not close properly.

Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error getting values from reference for table <string>! Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema. Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database. 388 . Recovery: Add entries to reference database. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege. Recovery: Add privilege to database.February 2003 Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt.

Recovery: Add privilege to database.EErc file. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database. A: Error Messages Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database. Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. 389 . Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error in graphic bang placement. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library. Recovery: Correct entry.

Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading one-lines! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. 390 . Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation.

Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Recovery: Change annotation of element. Error No Placepoints or No Elements. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. and one element._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. A: Error Messages Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. 391 . Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. Error opening design file <string>. Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. one datum point. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database.

Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB. Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again.sql file. 392 . Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again.February 2003 Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

393 . A: Error Messages Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted. Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list.sql file. Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog. Recovery: Add privileges to database.

394 . Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema. Recovery: Edit the sheet name.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name. Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Error saving symbology . Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. Recovery: Add privilege. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema.

Reason: Internal error. Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). Recovery: Key in a value. The process creates a zero-length envelope. A: Error Messages Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error starting or stopping graphic bang. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. 395 . Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. Recovery: None. Recovery: Fix other errors. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures.

Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Recovery: Modify the radius. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. at a cross. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 File <string> exists. change the spec. 396 . extension or transition of the fitting. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. For example. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: An illegal angle exists. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case.

397 . Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. Recovery: Fatal error. Possible memory allocation problem. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. A: Error Messages Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. a form could not be displayed by the software. Try to exit and re-enter the software. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product.

398 . Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages.February 2003 Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ./config/assign file. Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file.

_ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol. For example. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. 399 . Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. Reason: The symbolname is blank. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. Invalid Eden Processor Input. Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. A: Error Messages Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. <numeric value>. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part.

Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value. click on the REMOVE button to delete. Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. Recovery: Select another graphic group number. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0. 400 . Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Invalid key in . Recovery: Enter an integer value. For example.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. quantity must be an integer greater than 0._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range. Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. If it is a cable entry. Recovery: Key in another value.

Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database. 401 . Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database. vertex <numeric value>. Invalid real number: <string> Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. Invalid RCP . Recovery: Enter a valid response. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP).

February 2003 Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. 402 . Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Enter another sector/word value. Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file.

_ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. A: Error Messages Max run angle = <numeric value>.. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. Reason: Invalid text justification entered. Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max.. Must be LT. RT. CC. and place the element or RCP.or RB in the justification field. CB. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area. Recovery: Fix other problems. LC. Recovery: Enter LT. CT. Recovery: Delete all but one title block. LC. . Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements. or RB. RC. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. LB. 403 . current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type.

No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group.cel)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. 404 . No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command.February 2003 Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables.

Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product. B. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. C for the cross section type. 405 . Reason: The cross section must be of type A. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. B. A: Error Messages No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. or C in the active specification. No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. Recovery: Key in another name. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element.

February 2003 No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. 406 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. Recovery: Populate the database. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file.

Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. A: Error Messages No valid special parts exist for this table Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. 407 . Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Populate the database. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column. No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. Recovery: Populate the database.

408 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Recovery: None. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol.February 2003 Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Recovery: Select another option. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported.

_ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. title block. Select failed. 409 . Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. Recovery: Enter schema name. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. Recovery: Specify new find criteria. A: Error Messages Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. RCP). Recovery: Identify one of these elements. three-line. no rows found fitting the given criteria Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported.

Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. Recovery: Enter sheet name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Change sheet name. 410 . Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. Recovery: Identify a valid text element.unl file or inserting a row through SQL. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory.February 2003 Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7. Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located.

Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. A: Error Messages Title block placed . Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero. therefore. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. 411 . snap to the angle. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. cannot be edited. Recovery: Add privileges to the database.Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and. Recovery: None.

Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines. not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the . Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the . Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: If necessary. Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form. Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. 412 . Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. Recovery: Change the title block annotation. Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation.February 2003 Warning Column <string> found in reference.

Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form. Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. A: Error Messages Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation. you must key in a group name. Recovery: Key in the desired group name._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. 413 . Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 414 .

cmd file and customizing menus. 415 . Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation describes generation of Eden symbols and provides a sample symbol processor file. It identifies the files that can be modified and describes some important files. Appendix J: Reports contains detailed descriptions of the standard and rule checks reports delivered with the product. Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File describes the file that maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. and printers in the EE Raceway Environment. You can modify or disable this function through the file. rule checks.cmds file. This file is run automatically when you enter EE Raceway. The key-in names for commands can be modified by editing these files. Appendix D: Specification describes vendor specifications and how to prepare them. Appendix H: alias. Included in these appendices are important references and procedures needed to prepare and customize the EE Raceway product: Appendix C: EE Databases describes the EE databases and contains schema descriptions for both the reference and project databases. Important new procedures related to RIS and the databases are described in this section._ _______________ Appendix B: System/Application Manager Information Appendix B System/Application Manager Information This appendix and the following appendices outline the responsibilities for the EE Raceway system or application manager.cmds contains the rway. B: System/App Mgmt. reports. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files explains how to modify the files that list the processes.cmd file contains the alias.cmd file as it is delivered. Appendix I: rway. It attaches the panel menu. Appendix F: EE File Structure contains the file structure for both EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. You will need this appendix to locate files that you want to modify. Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager contains a detailed description of the RIS Schema Manager utility. Also included in this appendix are two descriptions and printouts related to customizing the alias.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 416 .February 2003 Appendix M: EE Manager contains a description of the EE Manager utility and its Edit Database process. Appendix N: EE Configure describes the EE environment variables and how to configure them.

_ _______________ Appendix B: Customizing Customizing Some simple customization is described in the appendices entitled Customizing. Adding a One-Line Type This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a new one-line type to the reference database. ee_out_ht_diam real not null. Add the <one-line_type>_spec and <one-line_type>_part tables to the reference database. The available precision input forms (described below) reside in win32app\eerway\sym. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. alias. Such customization includes writing processes and user commands using the MicroStation software. ee_dimension_2 real.cmds (all involve modifying existing text files using an editor). 1. Refer to the MicroStation Applications Programmer’s Guide for this latter procedure. ee_units integer not null. For detailed information about editing your . 417 .EErc file (win32app\eenuc) to a different form name. ee_out_width real. set the variable EE_PIFORM in the . Form Name piform* piform_tal1 piform_tal2 piform_thn1 piform_thn2 Description default tall/thin (design 1) tall/thin (design 2) long/thin (design 1) long/thin (design 2) * The chapter entitled Precision Input Form contains a detailed illustration of the default form design (piform). To change the form design. Precision Input Form B: System/App Mgmt.unl files and database tables.cmd. as in the following example: create table trench_spec ( vendor integer not null. More extensive customization is possible for advanced users. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. and rway. ee_extension real. ee_dimension_1 real.

3. char(6). create unique index i_fseekey on trench_spec(ee_spec_key). char(28) not null. ee_tl_subtype integer. create index i_fsheight on trench_spec(ee_out_ht_diam). ee_weight real. real. ee_tl_qual integer. ee_spec_key char(28). 418 .unl files reside in win32app\eerway\db.unl file. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database.unl file which contain the required default values for the one-line type. char(40) ). 2. ee_symbol char(6). grant all on trench_part to public. refer to the tray_spec and tray_part . For sample files. ee_part_key char(28) not null.unl file and a <oneline_type>_part.unl files that are delivered with EE Raceway. create index i_fpskey on trench_part(ee_spec_key). grant all on trench_spec to public. real. char(20). All delivered .February 2003 ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key description real. or you can add the data to your vendor. Create a <one-line_type>_spec._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_spec2_key char(28). create index i_fswidth on trench_spec(ee_out_width). ee_part char(20). ee_description char(40) ). create unique index i_fpeekey on fit_part(ee_part_key). ee_angle real. create table trench_part ( ee_tl_type integer. You can add the necessary rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. create index i_fsvendor on trench_spec(vendor).

unl file. 7._ _______________ Appendix B: 4. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the ol_type table or by inserting records in the olt. as in the following example: create table transit ( vendor integer not null. 6. Customizing 5.unl" DELIMITER "|". Add records to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. 9.unl file and the <oneline_type>_part.unl file. Adding a Special Fitting This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a special fitting to the reference database. 1. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscatalog table or by inserting records in the mscatref.cmd file. For information about codelists. Add the new one-line type to the ol_type table. 8. Add records to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. Add the newly-created <one-line_type>_spec. see the appendix entitled EE Databases.unl file. Add the special fitting table to the reference database. 419 . You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscolumns table or by inserting records in the mscolref. Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table in the reference database for any columns that are codelisted for the one-line type. For detailed information about editing your . B: System/App Mgmt.unl files and database tables.unl file. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. in a format like the following: FILE "tray_part. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new one-line type to the database.unl files to the rwayref. INSERT INTO tray_part. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow.

For basic information about creating Eden symbols. 420 . 3. create index i_tsitwidth on transit(ee_out_width).unl file. Create any new Eden symbols needed to graphically display the new special fitting. Create a <special fitting>. or you can insert records in the vendor. For a sample special fitting . char(20).February 2003 ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part ee_symbol ee_part_key ee_description integer not null. grant all on transit to public. You can add the entry directly to the tl_type table in the database.unl" DELIMITER "|". Add a row to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table.cmd file. Add the newly-created <special fitting>.unl file to the rwayref. create index i_tsitvendor on transit(vendor). INSERT INTO pullbox.unl file. You can add rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. refer to the pullbox. see the appendix entitled Eden Symbol Generation. real not null. Add the new special fitting to the three-line type codelist table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 6. 4. char(20). char(40) ).unl file. real. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. 2. create index i_tsitdepth on transit(ee_dimension_1). real.unl file that is delivered with EE Raceway. char(6).unl that contains the required default values for your fitting. char(28) not null. 5. real. or you add the data to your tlt. 7. create index i_tsitheight on transit(ee_out_ht_diam). create unique index i_tsiteekey on transit(ee_part_key). in a format like the following: FILE "pullbox.

Use a standard text editor to modify the error._ _______________ Appendix B: You can accomplish this either by adding a row directly to the mscatalog table. or by inserting a record in the mscatref. Add a row to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. Delivered reports are created using the RISRPT product and are compatible with the DB Access (DBA) product.unl file.msg files in both win32app\eerway\msg and win32app\eenuc\msg. 10. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. The report template library is delivered in the win32app\eerway\report directory. which you can modify. 421 . Customizing Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table (in the reference database) for any columns that are codelisted for the special fitting.unl file. Error Messages Error messages for the delivered commands are located in the error. Add the new special fitting entry to the manual part table. B: System/App Mgmt. the hard-coded error message name is to the left of each = (equal sign). For information about codelists. or by inserting a record in the mscolref.unl file. 9. or by inserting a record in the manprt. Reports You can create or modify standard and rule check reports. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the mscolumns table in the database. You can accomplish this either by adding a row to the manual_part table in the database. 11.msg files. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. You cannot change this name. To the right of each = is the message itself. Reports may also be created using the native RDBMS report writing product. In these files.unl file. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new special fitting to the database. 8.

File containing EE Raceway symbols. The following environment variable is defined in the win32app\eerway\bin\c400 or c100/rmonshell file: MS_CACH Sets the memory to be allocated for a design file editing session.h1". and EE Raceway-specific variables. or "am=n. Used as a pointer to application programs. "am=ustn.sb1"). MS_DATA MS_TMP MS_HELPFILE MS_HELPPATH The MicroStation\Program\MicroStation\config\msconfig.e. 422 .sb" (i. Sets the directory for the on-line Help files. They include Microstation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Sets the directory that holds the menu file mgds. Defines the path to the on-line Help files.cs". "am=n. Directory for the message files. Directory for the database table files Directory path to the EE Raceway forms. For EE Raceway: EERD_COMPRESS EERD_MSGS EERD_TBLS RWAY_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE Compresses the file when you exit a design session. Sets the directory where application-/user-defined menus are to found when activated from an "am=n. Sets the directory where application executable files are found when activated from a user command TSK statement.February 2003 EE Environment Variables This section lists and describes the environment variables that are delivered when you download EE Raceway.ndx) files. EE Nucleus.cfg file: For MicroStation: MS_CELL MS_APP MS_EXE MS_APPMEN Sets the directory that holds the cell libraries.cfg file contains detailed descriptions of the MicroStation and Umenu environment variables. These environment variables can be modified using the Start > Programs > EENUC > EE Configure command. This directory is also the location of user command index (.men. Sets the directory for temporary files. the file MicroStation uses to save data about the attached menu. The following environment variables are defined in the win32app\eerway\ee. This variable will override the user preferences setting. Directory path to the EE Raceway symbols.

EErc file. User-defined reference database sql file. The following are the environment variables defined using the EE Configure command. Defines the "tty" type you are running on. Directory path and filename of command window resource file. Schema name for project database. Project Database sql file. Default username for archive/restore. Name of the precision input form that displays during the design session. Project Database cmd file. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\. it must be set to "A". The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\EE file. Directory path for data files. Directory path for message files. Reference Database sql file. For EE Raceway: EE_RWAY* EERWAY_DAT EERWAY_SEED RWAY_CMD RWAY_SQL RWAYREF_CMD RWAYREF_SQL EDEN_LIB RWAY_EDEN_LIB EE_PIFORM Directory path for the EE Raceway product. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. MS_USERPREF MS_CMDWINDRSC MS_SYSFONTS EE_TERM ORACLE_SID Directory path and filename of user preference file. Reference Database cmd file. Directory path for the Eden symbol library. Directory path for data files. User-defined project database cmd file. Directory path and filename of password file to enter system manager page. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Font used by MicroStation for window and menu display. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. Directory path and project database name. Directory path for EE Nucleus product. Default remote path for archive/restore. Filename for the Eden symbol library. B: System/App Mgmt. User-defined reference database cmd file. User-defined project database sql file. Default nodename for archive/restore. A variable used for ORACLE databases._ _______________ Appendix B: The following are the environment variables that are recognized by the EE Nucleus product. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. 423 . Directory path for the RIS product. delivered with the EE Nucleus product. MS_DIR RIS_DIR EE_NUC* ENV_MSGS EENUC_DAT Directory path for the MicroStation product. Directory path for seed files. EE_CURPRJ* EE_DBS* EE_NODENAME EE_REMDIR EE_SCHEMA EE_USERNAME SYS_PASSW_FILE EE_CUSTOM_SQL EE_CUSTOM_CMD EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD EE Environment Variables Directory path for current EE project.

Data files for DB Access Support.February 2003 DBA_SUPPORT EES_REFDB EES_REFSER EE_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE EE_SYM_PATH For ORACLE databases: ORACLE_HOME For INGRES databases: II_SYSTEM For INFORMIX databases: INFORMIXDIR Directory path for INFORMIX executables. Directory path for ORACLE executables. Filename of EE symbol file. EE reference database server process. Schema name for reference database. Directory path for INGRES executables. 424 . Directory path for EE forms._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Directory path for EE symbol file.

that is. The Electrical Engineer product line is supported by two relational databases: a project database and a reference database. the reference database replaces the concept of shared part entity files and active entity files. Most relational databases use Standard Query Language (SQL). The EE products attach to their relational databases through Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS). The reference database is identified when you enter a project. On-line Informix._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Databases Appendix C EE Databases All EE databases you create will be relational databases. The project database contains information applicable to a particular project. such as symbol and part information. they are based on the relational data model in which a relation is a two-dimensional table comprised of rows and columns. C: EE Databases 425 . This section contains: Descriptions of the EE databases and the Intergraph software. You can report and query from the reference database as well as the project database. RIS isolates the differences in specific vendors’ Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMS). Oracle. and Ingres. a generic relational database interface. Procedures that must be followed by existing users of the EE product. Procedures that must be followed by new users of the EE product. Schema descriptions for the EE project database and the EE reference database. A project is an associated collection of drawings and their database. The reference database contains information applicable to multiple projects. Thus. that supports it. Processes needed in the procedures above. (For those familiar with EDES. RIS. you are not forced to re-enter common information for each project. allowing generic network access to all EE databases generated with the following RDBMS’s: Standard Engine (SE) Informix.) One reference database can be accessed by multiple project databases.

Through the use the RIS risschema_mgr product. Different RDBMS’s establish users in different ways. The RIS schema identifies a unique database/user combination in a given commercial database system. you can update schemas without knowing either the differences between RDBMS’s or the syntax of the RIS create schema statement.February 2003 Relational Interface System (RIS) All EE products use a RIS schema. the very concept of a database differs greatly from one RDBMS to another. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for more information on the RIS Schema Manager product. which you define. to attach to an SQL-type database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .) 426 . in fact.

The process resides locally on your machine and recognizes any RIS schema on any database. or see INFORMIX documentation for other creation methods. you need to populate that database with EE tables and default information. C: EE Databases 427 . use the Update Schema option under Database Utilities (see Database Utilities. local or remote. You should consult the individual RDBMS documentation on installation procedures. ownerships. The risschema_mgr process updates and maintains the file._ _______________ Appendix C: Database and RIS Procedures Database and RIS Procedures You must adhere to the procedures that follow before using EE with a relational database. The risschema file is an ASCII file that contains the names. To do so. After you have created an empty database. INFORMIX users will now have to create all databases in ANSI mode. Check the documentation delivered with the product for information on infxcreate. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Definition File. page 50). For New Users You must first create an empty database and a user name through your chosen RDBMS. — You can locate the risschema file from another workstation using the risschema_mgr process and access any schemas created on that machine. but it can exist anywhere as long as the parameters file (win32app\ingr\share\RISversion\parms) points to it. you must use the RIS Schema Manager product to create a schema. You can manage the risschema file in any of the following ways: — You can create and maintain your own risschema file. Access RIS Schema Manager through the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment. that was created using RIS Schema Manager. Once you have created a schema on your empty database. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for detailed information on using the RIS Schema Manager product.) This process will create the risschema definition file. For more information about the risschema file. and locations of all RIS schemas and databases. using the risschema_mgr process. You can usually locate this file in the RIS product directory.

unl file(s) which contain default information. you must have at least: — an SQL (. you can also include: — a command (.sql file.February 2003 Update Schema (create_db) Process You can use this program to do the following: Update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information. To run it outside of the EE Environment. Where a table lacks a unique index. — modify existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the .sql file that has a different structure than the original . you must first export the variable ENV_MSGS to win32app\ingr\eenuc\msg. the process will: — add new tables listed in the .unl files to load into which tables.sql) file which contains the table and column structure. This is the command line syntax for the Update schema process: win32app\eenuc\bin\create_db [-v] [-q . — load those tables having a unique index with data from the .sql file. If Update schema is used with a . The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition keeping column data where column names match.sql file.sql file. — AND — — the corresponding .unl files that are listed in the .cmd) file that defines which ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Modify an existing RIS schema’s tables to conform to the structure of a given .cmd files.sql file] [-c . and then key in the command line syntax for the process. the process loads it only if the table is empty.cmd file] schema name -v -q . If you want to load a schema with default information.cmd file displays SQL commands as they are executed schema definition file command file to load schema To create a new schema. 428 . You should run the Update schema process from the EE Environment Project Menu.sql file -c .

with EE Raceway tables and default reference information. created through the risschema_mgr process on an existing schema. You can use this process to execute ANY valid RIS-supported SQL statement upon an existing schema. C: EE Databases 429 ._ _______________ Appendix C: Update Schema (create_db) Process Example: $ create_db -q win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref. Simply place it in a file and call that filename with the -q option.cmd sample_ref This will populate an empty sample_ref schema.sql -c \win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref.

the reference schema needs to be custom-built only if you want defaults for any new column to exist in the reference schema.February 2003 Reference Schema . including. But if the project schema is custom-built. and so forth) during a design session. The one-line table is delivered with both the DEFAULT and METRIC DEFAULT keys. Raceway One-Line Keys A key is stored for each one-line type within a drawing. the drawing. RCP. The DEFAULT key is used with the seed design file using English measurements. fittings. tray_spec. and equipment pointers. Keys In addition to the default attribute columns. 430 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . for example. one-line. Each of these keys will be the default key for all one-lines of a given one-line type unless you override the key during annotation for an individual one-line. while the METRIC DEFAULT is used with the seed design file using Metric measurements. You can establish default attributes for drawings. and tray_part tables. the reference schema tables contains two additional columns: key_column and key_description. 2. RCPs. straights. it uses the DEFAULT key attributes. The key_column field is a unique index used to identify a particular row of default attributes in the reference schema. When editing/reviewing annotation for EE Raceway elements (title blocks. the project schema must be custom-built accordingly. if the reference schema is custom-built. raceway connect points (RCPs). one-lines. If the system cannot find a key for some reason. All specification information is carried in the reference database. Each of the tables is delivered with one entry called DEFAULT. You will identify these keys through the Active OneLine Type Parameters form. 3. Reporting. drop points. For example. Selecting the active one-line type parameters during a design session. one-lines. Each table must contain at least a subset of the column/attribute structure as its corresponding table in the project schema. You will access the reference database during the following procedures: 1. Some of the columns in the reference schema tables are required and cannot be modified or deleted. The actual column names are defined by the values of the key_columns and key_description in the mscatalog entry for the given table.General Description The Electrical Engineer reference database is a multi-table relational database containing default attribute information and specification information. Default Attributes Some tables exist in the reference schema to support default attributes.

C: EE Databases 431 . The key you specify will serve as the default key for all equipment pointers unless you override the key during annotation for an individual equipment pointer. Text annotation overrides any default values. Drop Point Keys You will identify the key for drop points through the Raceway Defaults form. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all drop points unless you override the key during annotation for an individual drop point. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all RCPs unless you override the key during annotation for an individual RCP. Text annotation overrides any default values. Equipment Pointer Keys You will identify the key for equipment pointers through the Raceway Defaults form.General Description Raceway Connect Point Keys You will identify the key for RCPs through the Raceway Defaults form._ _______________ Appendix C: Reference Schema . Text annotation overrides any default values.

and one_line tables in the project database. The system issues you a warning if an annotated value does not match a value in the codelist.approved 4 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .approved 10 .blank 2 .approved 11 .approved 9 . You must be familiar with the codelist tables that follow. For example. Approval Status Codelist Table The approv_status codelist table defines the available approval status values.approved 5 .approved 6 . fitting.approved 7 . the codelist table ol_type in the reference database will contain all possible values that can be loaded into the column ol_type in the straight. You can add new approval status rows to this table.approved 3 . Only values in the reference database codelist tables are loaded into the project database. the reference database codelists are matched to the annotated values.approved 8 .not approved 432 . COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION approval status index number approval status description The approval status rows delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 index_value 1 . but you must not remove any of the existing rows. During loads of the project database.February 2003 Codelists Codelists are tables in the reference database which contain all available values for a particular column of a table in the project database.

but you must not remove the existing row. which is an integer value that the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The table contains the index_column column. You must not add or remove to this table. COLUMN_NAME ee_car_num ee_cardinal TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION cardinal index number cardinal description The cardinal point values delivered with EE Raceway are: ee_car_num 0 1 2 6 7 8 12 13 14 ee_cardinal TOP LEFT CENTER LEFT BOTTOM LEFT TOP CENTER CENTER CENTER BOTTOM CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT C: EE Databases Drawing Type Codelist Table The drawing_type codelist table defines the available drawing types._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Cardinal Codelist Table The cardinal codelist table defines the available cardinal point routing justification locations. You can add new drawing types to this table. The ee_rcp_ol_type column contains the index_column value for the one-line type to which the RCP is assigned. 433 . COLUMN_NAME code unknown TYPE Char(20) unknown DESCRIPTION drawing type unknown The drawing type delivered with EE Raceway is: code RACEWAY Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table The manual_part codelist table defines the manually-placed special fittings available with the product. The table also contains the ee_part_table column which itself contains the mscatalog number of the table holding the part information.

The table also contains the ee_spec. ee_ol. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The table contains the index_column column. ee_part.February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_part_table ee_rcp_ol_type ee_manpart_type TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer DESCRIPTION manual_part index number manual_part description special fitting parts table number one-line type index column number manual part type index number The special manual fittings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 index_value conduit body pullbox light fixture ee_part_table 246 249 250 ee_rcp_ol_type 3 3 3 ee_manpart_type 0 0 1 One-Line Type Codelist Table The ol_type table defines the one-line types that are available in a raceway project. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_spec_table ee_part_table ee_ol_table ee_rcp_part_table ee_max_run_angle ee_priority_level TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer integer integer integer DESCRIPTION one-line type index number one-line type description specification table mscatalog number spec parts table mscatalog number one-line table mscatalog number special fitting parts table number maximum bends allowed per run one-line type nest level The one-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: indx_col 1 2 3 4 5 index_value TRAY WIREWAY CONDUIT AIRWAY DUCTBANK ee_spec 240 242 244 247 260 ee_part 241 243 245 248 0 ee_ol 204 204 204 204 204 rcp_part 0 0 246 0 0 run_angle 0 0 360 0 0 priority 5 5 10 10 7 434 . The ee_priority_level column defines the routing priority for each one-line type. and ee_rcp_part tables which define the tables containing specification information for each one-line type.

which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a system name. You can add. The rcp_type table contains the index_column column. remove. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION rcp type index number rcp type description The RCP types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value <blank> ROUTE description general raceway connect point raceway connect point and route point System Codelist Table C: EE Databases The ee_system table must be loaded in the reference database before you can create any raceway design files. The system table contains the system_num column. You must not add or remove rows from this table. You can modify the index_value values._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists RCP Type Codelist Table This table defines how the EE Raceway software uses RCPs (Raceway Connect Points). COLUMN_NAME system_num system_name TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION system index number system name 435 . or update any of the systems delivered with EE Raceway. nor should you modify the index_column values. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

You can modify the index_value values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line type index number three-line type description The three-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 11 12 14 index_value STRAIGHT ELBOW WYE CROSS PULLBOX CONDUIT BODY DROPOUT 436 . You must not add or remove rows from the table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The table contains the index_column column.February 2003 The systems delivered with EE Raceway are: system_num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 system_name Control Communication High Voltage Low Voltage Alarm Instrumentation Signal Digital Analog Thermocouple RTD Medium Voltage Normal Lighting Emergency Lighting Security Fire Safety DC Power Control and Signal Three-Line Type Codelist Table The tl_type table defines the three-line types that are available with the EE Raceway product. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. nor should you modify the index_column values.

which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line subtype index number three-line subtype description The three-line subtypes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 index_value <blank> VERTICAL INSIDE VERTICAL OUTSIDE VERTICAL HORIZONTAL LEFT HORIZONTAL RIGHT HORIZONTAL REDUCER LEFT REDUCER RIGHT REDUCER C: EE Databases Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table The tl_qual table further defines the three-line types._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table The tl_subtype table further defines the available three-line types. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line qualifier index number three-line qualifier description 437 . which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The table contains the index_column column. The table contains the index_column column. You must not add or remove rows from the table. You can modify the index_value values. nor should you modify the index_column values. nor should you modify the index_column values. You must not add or remove rows from the table. You can modify the index_value values.

The vendor table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. but do not remove the rows delivered with the product. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value catalog TYPE integer char(20) char(20) DESCRIPTION vendor index number vendor name catalog 438 . You must not add or remove rows from this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION units index number units description The units delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value English Metric Vendor Codelist Table You must have a vendor in the vendor codelist table before loading any specification tables in the database. nor should you modify the index_column values. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a vendor name.February 2003 The three-line qualifiers delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 index_value <blank> RIGID BENDABLE FLEXIBLE ADJUSTABLE Units Codelist Table This table (ee_unit) defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. You can add vendors as necessary to this table. The unit table contains the index_column column.

COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable code index value wire/cable code description C: EE Databases The wire/cable codes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX index_value AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX 439 . The wire/cable code table contains the index_column column._ _______________ Appendix C: The vendors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 index_value default sample unknown English sample catalog delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank Codelists Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_code) defines the wire/cable code that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable codes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table code column. You may add or remove rows from this table. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry.

the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable configurations represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table config column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable sizes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table cable_size column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable size index value wire/cable size description The wire/cable sizes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG index_value 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG 440 . You may add or remove rows from this table. The wire/cable configuration table contains the index_column column. You may add or remove rows from this table. The wire/cable size table contains the index_column column._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable configuration index value wire/cable configuration description The wire/cable configurations delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column \C PR TR index_value single conductor "pair 2 conductors "triad" 3 conductors Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_size) defines the wire/cable size that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING.February 2003 Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_config) defines the wire/cable configuration that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry.

The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. 441 . the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation colors represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table color column. The wire/cable insulation color table contains the index_column column. You may add or remove rows from this table. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ Appendix C: 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM Codelists C: EE Databases Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_color) defines the wire/cable insulation color that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation color index value wire/cable insulation color description The wire/cable insulation colors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column BLK W R GR ORN BL W/BLK R/BLK GR/BLK ORN/BLK BL/BLK BLK/W R/W GR/W BL/W BLK/R W/R ORN/R BL/R R/GR ORN/GR BLK/W/R W/BLK/R R/BLK/W GR/BLK/W ORN/BLK/W BL/BLK/W BLK/R/GR W/R/GR R/BLK/GR GR/BLK/ORN ORN/BLK/GR BL/W/ORN BLK/W/ORN W/R/ORN ORN/W/BL W/R/BL BLK/W/GR W/BLK/GR R/W/GR GR/W/BL ORN/R/GR index_value BLACK WHITE RED GREEN ORANGE BLUE WHITE/BLACK RED/BLACK GREEN/BLACK ORANGE/BLACK BLUE/BLACK BLACK/WHITE RED/WHITE GREEN/WHITE BLUE/WHITE BLACK/RED WHITE/RED ORANGE/RED BLUE/RED RED/GREEN ORANGE/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/RED WHITE/BLACK/RED RED/BLACK/WHITE GREEN/BLACK/WHITE ORANGE/BLACK/WHITE BLUE/BLACK/WHITE BLACK/RED/GREEN WHITE/RED/GREEN RED/BLACK/GREEN GREEN/BLACK/ORANGE ORANGE/BLACK/GREEN BLUE/WHITE/ORANGE BLACK/WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/RED/ORANGE ORANGE/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/RED/BLUE BLACK/WHITE/GREEN WHITE/BLACK/GREEN RED/WHITE/GREEN GREEN/WHITE/BLUE ORANGE/RED/GREEN 442 .

3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 2 wire system) Low (Single phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. The wire/cable insulation voltage rating table contains the index_column column. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation voltage ratings represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table voltage column. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) 443 . 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase._ _______________ Appendix C: BL/R/GR BLK/W/BL W/BLK/BL R/W/BL GR/ORN/R GR/R/BL BL/R/ORN BLK/ORN/R BRN Y BLUE/RED/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLACK/BLUE RED/WHITE/BLUE GREEN/ORANGE/RED GREEN/RED/BLUE BLUE/RED/ORANGE BLACK/ORANGE/RED BROWN YELLOW Codelists Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_volt) defines the wire/cable insulation voltage rating that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. You may add or remove rows from this table. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. C: EE Databases COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(40) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation voltage rating index value wire/cable insulation voltage rating description The wire/cable voltage ratings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 120 120/240 208Y/120 240/120 240 480Y/277 480 600 2400 4160Y/2400 4160 4800 6900 8320Y/4800 12000Y/6930 12470Y/7200 13200Y/7620 13200 13800Y/7970 index_value Low (Single phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase.

February 2003 13800 20780Y/12000 22860Y/13200 23000 24940Y/14400 34500Y/19920 34500 46000 69000 Medium (Three phase. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation types represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table insulation column. flame. flame.and Oil-Resistant Thermoplastic Perfluoroalkoxy Perfluoroalkoxy Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(100) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation type index value wire/cable insulation type description The wire/cable insulation types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column A AA AI AIA A VA AVB AVL FEP FEPB MI MTW PFA PFAH RH RHH RHW SA SIS TA TBS index_value Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Impregnated Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (Flame retardant. The wire/cable insulation type table contains the index_column column. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. 3 wire system) Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_insul) defines the wire/cable insulation type that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. non-metallic covering) Thermo-plastic (Flame-retardant. cotton braid) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (AVL-lead sheath) Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (Glass braid Asbestos or other Suitable braid material) Magnesium Oxide (Copper) Flame-. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. You may add or remove rows from this table. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.and Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. flame-non-metallic covering) Silicone Rubber (Asbestos. Heat. non-metallic covering) 444 . 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase.non-metallic covering) Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. Moisture-. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. glass or other suitable braid material) Heat-Resistant Rubber Thermo-plastic and Asbestos (Flame-retardant._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .non-metallic covering) Moisture. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase.

and Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Moisture-Resistant. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION yes-no response index number yes-no response description C: EE Databases The Yes-No values delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 0 1 index_value NO Yes 445 .and Heat-Resistant (Integral with insulation) Heat. Moisture.& Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Flame-. Moisture.and Moisture-Resistant (Moisture-resistant non-metallic covering) Varnished Cambric (Nonmetallic covering or lead sheath) Flame-Retardant Cross-Linked Synthetic Polymer Modified Ethylene Tetrafluoro-ethylene Codelists Yes-No Codelist Table The ee_yes_no codelist table defines the available positive and negative user responses. Moisture. (Moisture-) & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-._ _______________ Appendix C: TFE THHN THHN/THWN THW THWN TW UF USE V XHHN Z Extruded Polytetra-fluoro-ethylene Flame-. Moisture. Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-. You must not add or remove rows from this table.& Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-Retardant.

The software compares the one-line environment at an RCP in the design file with the rules stored in this table to determine which fitting to place at the RCP. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line.180. zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line subtype number. the one-line type. remove.270 90. The software. non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. compares the number of intersection one-lines.270 prp 90 90 90 tbl 246 246 246 246 246 246 246 sym CC CLB CT CGUAM CX CGUAW CEABY 446 . zero if not applicable number of intersecting one-lines planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line.180. zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line qualifier number. and the angles between the intersectin one-lines with the rules in the fitting environment table to find a match. COLUMN_NAME ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol TYPE integer integer integer integer integer char(40) char(40) integer char(6) DESCRIPTION intersecting one-line’s one-line type number intersecting one-line’s three-line type number. If found. the symbol in the part table stored will be placed at the RCP. fitting mscatalog table number fitting EDEN symbol name The fitting environment rules delivered with EE Raceway are: olt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tlt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlst 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlq 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nol 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 pln 180 90 90. at least. You can add.February 2003 Fitting Environment Rules The fitting environment rules are the rules stored in the reference database table tl_fit_env that control the Place Fitting by Rule commands.180 90. or update any of the rules delivered with EE Raceway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .180 90 90.

_ _______________ Appendix C: Fitting Environment Rules Intersecting Conduit One-lines Planar Angles = 90. 180. 270 Non-Planar Angle = 90 C: EE Databases 447 .

General Description The project schema contains information about the drawings that are part of a particular project. The schema stores information associated with the elements in each drawing. and three-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Project Schema . RCPs. 448 . Default and specification information is copied from the reference schema into the project schema when you run Load Database. its one-lines.

Additionally._ _______________ Appendix C: Updating Schemas Updating Schemas Before you can update (that is. you must use the schema creation form in RIS Schema Manager to create a valid RIS schema on the database. if one exists. No paths are required. RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. ORACLE. Given the schema name. Given the schema name. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. not a database name. views. Sql and Cmd Files 449 . if one exists. Updating Reference Schemas Update the reference schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment. If you select multiple applications. using the Update project schema option. No paths are required. load with EE tables and default data) a schema. since this is a schema name. RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Updating a Project Schema Update the project schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment. INGRES). since this is a schema name. you must create the schemas using one of the currently-supported RDBMS’s (INFORMIX. while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. C: EE Databases Sql and Cmd Files Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. then Update project schema runs each application sequentially against the database. These fields require a full path to the files. using the Update reference schema option. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema. and to grant permissions within the schema. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. not a database name. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables.

views. then Update reference schema runs each application sequentially against the database. since this will be the default name when you enter the project. These fields require a full path to the files.February 2003 Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. However. while the command file loads the schema tables with default data._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 450 . you can override the default by exporting the $EE_SCHEMA variable in your $HOME/. and to grant permissions within the schema.EErc file to be your project schema name. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables. Schema Names When creating your RIS schemas. If you select multiple applications. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. you should use the same name as your project.

If you modify a character column to make it smaller (resizing char(20) to be char(10). any new columns that are added will be blank in each row. you need only to modify the ". Therefore. 3. Drops existing table (also drops indexes).sql" file._ _______________ Appendix C: Modifying the Reference Schema Modifying the Reference Schema You can customize the database schema before creating a schema or after the schema exists. If a table does not have a unique index. You can modify the size of a column. Loads new table with saved row information for column names that were in previous definition. 451 . The SQL statements in the . then the . then any row containing data which exceeds the new character limit will be lost. these columns will be added into the existing rows of the existing one_line table. Saves rows from existing table. Renaming of a column is processed by removing the column and adding another. 2. The . The new table will have only those columns specified in the "create table" statement in the table definition. 1. 2. columns are added into the .unl file will be loaded only if the table is empty.sql file is a series of SQL statements recognized by RIS to create your database An existing database schema can also be modified. The following is a list of schema modification rules for Update Schema to keep in mind. Therefore. The .sql file before Update schema is executed. for example. the following actions take place: 1. 5. Columns that you added into an existing loaded table would have no data stored in them. Any duplicate rows will be counted and ignored. but changing from "char" to "integer" is dangerous and an illegal conversion can occur.sql file are the input to the Update schema process. You lose any columns and column information that you have not specified in the "create table" statement. Keep in mind that the columns within the tables in the reference schema must be a subset of the columns of the corresponding tables in the project schema. 3.unl file will always be loaded into a table which has a unique index. the unique index prevents the entry of duplicate information when updating any EE application. The removed column in such a case will lose its data and the added column will be blank. C: EE Databases If rows exist in the updated table. When this process finds a "create table" statement for a table that exists in the schema. from "char(10)" to "char(200)" or "smallint" to "integer".sql" file in order to modify a schema. Creates new table according to "create table" statement. columns can be added or removed from an existing schema according to the "create table" statements in the . simply include the necessary changes in the . For example.sql file for the one_line table. To modify the database schema before schema creation. Table names can be changed except for table names that begin with the letters "ms" and "ee_". 4. 4. They must also be changed appropriately in the MSCATALOG table in order for the software to run properly. you would lose any data that may have been on that column. for example). The table definitions that exist in this file determine how the tables will look when complete. If you had used the RDBMS to alter the table by adding a column and then run Update schema without making the appropriate change to the ".sql file.

unl files from being loaded.unl" is to be inserted into the ol_type table. the RDBMS’s interactive query product. The following steps can be used as a guideline for modifying the reference schema before it is updated: 1.cmd) file you will be using. It tells the process that the "|" character separates each column of data in the olt.unl files must be loaded for proper product execution.February 2003 The databases are initially loaded with the *. Use caution when editing these files since they are in a format for loading sequentially into a table.unl" file will exist in the current directory but a full path name can be specified on this file (e. the RIS Interactive Query Utility (win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\risgui. These files can be edited by the system manager to include additional defaults. INSERT INTO ol_type. The .g.sql file as being non-null which means the data entered from the .unl files as defined in the command file. or INGRES’s SQL. There are two ways to modify existing rows in the reference schema. The Update schema process initiates the command file which automatically finds and loads the information in the .unl" DELIMITER "|". All existing . such as INFORMIX’s ISQL or FORMS._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . FILE win32app\ingr\eerway\db\olt.unl files into the database.unl file must not be null for that column. The following is a typical example of what can be contained in this file: FILE "olt.unl file. or ORACLE’s sqlplus. 4. The delimiter is one character long.exe). Edit the desired . In this case the "olt. DB Access’s Database Edit Utility (see the section in the appendix entitled EE Manager for more information on this utility) the EE Database Utilities (risschema_mgr utility – win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\rismgr. Do not remove any lines from this file that would effect the current . These lines tell the update schema process that the file "olt.unl" file might look like: 1|TRAY|240|241|204|0|0|1| 452 . To see which . part data. The following is an example of what a line in the "olt. Each line represents a row to be inserted into the database and each field represents the corresponding column in the database. — OR — You can modify the rows in the created schema through 1.unl files can be modified before the schema is updated. look at the command (.unl files are being loaded into the reference database.exe) 2.unl).unl file making sure the delimiter "|" is used between each field. Certain columns are defined in the . 2. 3. and codelist values.

2. 3. Edit this file to include any tray specification information you want to load into the reference database. INSERT INTO tray_spec.unl file containing your own specification information into the reference database.unl" DELIMITER "|". "240" is the ee_spec_table column. 453 . etc. "TRAY" is the index_value column value. When you have finished editing the . run the Update reference schema process to load the specification information into the tray_spec table. naming it catalog.unl file. Insert the following lines into this file: FILE "catalog. 1.unl" file you would like to add additional entries.unl. Create a new file in the current directory. you can edit this file.cmd. cd win32app\ingr\eerway\db Edit the command file rwayref. "1" is the index_column value. Make sure you line up the delimited fields with the tables’ columns._ _______________ Appendix C: In this example. The following example demonstrates how to load a new . separating each column of data with a pipe symbol (|). If in the "olt. For example: Modifying the Reference Schema 1|1|4|18|18|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0418SHV|4x18 VENTRIB SHV| 1|1|4|24|24|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0424SHV|4x24 VENTRIB SHV| C: EE Databases 4.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . index_value: the column that contains the name of each available approved status. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". and so forth. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. 454 .February 2003 EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway reference database schema. not approved. approv_status This codelist table defines the available approval status values: blank. See the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. approved. away_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. Column Name index_column index_value Type integer Char(20) Index no no Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an approved status description. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table.

Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_angle: the column used to define the airway fitting bend angle. Column Name ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer real real real real real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes C: EE Databases ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. and also to maintain connectivity to a raceway system. ee_extension: the column used to define the airway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the airway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_spec2_key: if the current airway part is a reducer. away_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. EE Raceway uses airways to reserve space for the routing of cable or other raceway material. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_out_width: the column used to define the airway outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_symbol: the column used to define the airway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. 455 . ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the airway outside diameter or height to the EE raceway software. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate airway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_radius: the column used to define the airway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. this column is the key to the row in the other airway specification.

bottom left. 456 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Column Name ee_car_num ee_cardinal Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes ee_car_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a cardinal point description. The associated shapes are shown below. ee_cardinal: the column that contains the name of each available cardinal point. center left.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the airway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. cardinal This codelist table defines the available cardinal point locations (top left. or C. and so forth)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The only valid entries are: A. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. B.

nominal_size_2: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. 457 . ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size_1 nominal_size_2 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_dimension_3* ee_dimension_4* ee_dimension_5* ee_dimension_6* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type* volume style ee_pull_point C: EE Databases vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit body special fitting. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. nominal_size_1: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit body part number. weight: the column used to define the conduit body weight.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) real real real real real real Char( 28) Char( 40) integer real Char( 20) integer Index dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_body This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting CONDUIT BODY. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit body part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. material: the column used to define the conduit body material.

February 2003 ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. then the conduit is marked as being overfilled. ee_num_cables: number of cables in the conduit. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. Column Name ee_rule_set ee_jacket_armor ee_num_cables ee_max_fill Type Char( 20) Char( 10) integer real Index no no no no Null yes yes no yes ee_rule_set: identification of the rule set that applies to the raceway system fill calculations. If the cables contained in a conduit exceed the maximum allowable conduit fill. ee_max_fill: maximum allowable percent fill._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. cond_fill_calc This table is used to specify the maximum allowable percent fill of a conduit based on the armor type of the cable outer jackets and number of cables within the conduit. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_jacket_armor: material type of the cable outer jacket armor. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 458 . ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define the conduit body as a cable pull point. volume: the column used to define a conduit body volume. style:the column used to describe the conduit body style or type. This calculation assumes a homogeneous mixture of either all LEAD or all NON-LEAD armor types for the cable outer jackets for the cables routed within the same conduit. for example NEC 1990. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.

ee_part: the column used to define the conduit part number. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_angle: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend angle. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate conduit specification table row containing general specification information. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. C: EE Databases 459 . Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_spec2_key: if the current conduit part is a reducer. ee_weight: the column used to define the conduit part weight. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. this column is the key to the row in the other conduit specification.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit part EDEN symbol name to the EE software.

ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_radius: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . weight: the column used to define the conduit weight per unit length. material: the column used to define the conduit material.February 2003 cond_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit specification. 460 . ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the conduit outside diameter to the EE raceway software. nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size. ee_transition: the column used to define the conduit fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the conduit fitting extension length to the EE raceway software.

The only valid entries are: A. Column Name drawing_type* sheet* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null no yes no yes C: EE Databases drawing_type: the column used to define the EE product drawing type. sheet: the column used to define the EE drawing sheet name. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. code_desc: the column that contains the description of each available drawing type. drawing_type This codelist table defines what drawing types are available for use. B. 461 .Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the conduit cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. or C. The associated shapes are shown below. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. drawing This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for title blocks and their default column values. Column Name ee_code code_desc Type Char(20) Char(20) Index uniq no Null no yes ee_code: the column used by the software to uniquely identify a drawing type description.

Column Name tag ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char(20) real real Char(28) Char(40) Index no no no unique no Null yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the drop point tag. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the ductbank outside height to the EE Raceway software. material: the column used to define the ductbank material. ee_out_width: the column used to define the ductbank outside width to the EE Raceway software. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dist_down_ol: the column used to define the distance along the one-line to the drop point.February 2003 drop_point This table defines both the columns you can annotate for drop point symbols and their default column values. duct_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type DUCTBANK. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column used to define the distance between the one-line and the rcp. Column Name ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description Type integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups dups no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes no yes ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. 462 .

463 . ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name nominal_size ee_dimension_1 ee_area Type real real real Index uniq no no Null no yes yes C: EE Databases nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. The associated shapes are shown below. or C. ee_graphic_only EE applications use this table to define which columns in the project database cannot be posted back to graphics through the Post Attribute process. Column Name table_name column_name Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Index uniq uniq Null yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column that cannot be posted. B. column_name: the column within table_name that cannot be posted back to the graphics. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. The only valid entries are: A. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. ee_cond_x_area This table stores the cross sectional area of conduit identified by its nominal size.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the ductbank cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_area: the column used to define the cross sectional area of the conduit of the given nominal size.

index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_code.February 2003 ee_pcbl_code This codelist table defines the codes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EERWAY Conduit Sizing command. 464 . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_color description. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_code description. ee_pcbl_color This codelist table defines the colors that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_config. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_config description._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_color color. ee_pcbl_config This codelist table defines the cable configurations that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command.

465 . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char(100) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an eepcbl_insul description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_insul.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_pcbl_insul This codelist table defines the insulation types that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_volt description. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes C: EE Databases index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_size description. ee_pcbl_size This codelist table defines the cable/wire sizes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_pcbl_volt This codelisted table defines the cable/wire voltage ratings that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_volt. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_size.

cable_size: the size of the wire/cable. ee_area: the cross sectional area of the wire/cable. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table.February 2003 ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the cable/wires that are used in the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_color: the insulation color of the wire/cable. insulation: the insulation type of the wire/cable. system_name: the column that contains the name of each available system. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. voltage: the insulation voltage rating of the wire/cable. 466 . Column Name system_num system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes system_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a system name. config: the cable configuration of the cable. Column Name ee_code config cable_size ee_color voltage insulation item_no ee_area ee_units ee_code: the cable code of the cable. item_no: the unique identifier for each wire/cable. Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) real integer Index no no no no no no uniq no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no ee_system This codelist table defines the systems that are available to contain EE Raceway graphics.

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_units This codelist table defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. ee_comp_type: is used by the EE processors to define what product will use the entry. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_unit. If a table is not represented in the ee_unique table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_yes_no This codelist table defines the possible column values for a ’yes/no’ question in a table column. blank_allowed: is used to define whether or not the column in column_name is allowed to be blank. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify the ’yes/no’ response. 467 . In some entries. this column is used to further describe what would make an entry unique. a row will be loaded into the appropriate table for each graphic element. Multiple rows in the database could contain the same table name if multiple columns are required to make an entry unique. column_name: the name of the column in table_name that makes an entry unique. Column Name index_column* index_value* index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_unit description. ee_unique EE applications use this table to define which columns make a row in a table unique for single data entry. then a blank column value would cause the EE processes to create a new row in the database. where the information crosses products. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name table_name column_name ee_comp_type* blank_allowed Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 10) integer Index uniq uniq uniq no Null yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases table_name: the name of the table that requires single data entry. If not.

EE Raceway uses space envelopes to reserve blocks of space for raceway without maintaining connectivity to any raceway system. 468 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. envelope This table defines both the columns you can annotate for space envelopes and their default column values. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes tag: the column used to define the space envelope tag._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.February 2003 index_value: the column that contains the ’yes/no’ column value. Space envelopes are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing.

ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. Column Name ee_symbol voltage ee_dimension_1 ee_dimension_2 ee_dimension_3 ee_part_key fl_amps ee_dimension_4 ee_dimension_5 ee_dimension_6 ee_description item_type ee_dimension_7 ee_dimension_8 ee_dimension_9 item_code_num vendor num_wires num_phase_wires power_factor area_class oper_temp_deg_c text_1 text_2 text_3 text_4 ee_units ee_pull_point C: EE Databases ee_symbol: the column used to define the light fixture EDEN symbol name to the EE software.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 6) integer real real real Char( 28) real real real real Char( 40) Char( 3) real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 4) integer real Char( 6) integer Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer integer Index no no no no no uniq no no no no no no no no no no dups no no no no no no no no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description light_fixture This table stores the specification information for the manually placed equipment LIGHT_FIXTURE. 469 . voltage: the column used to define the light fixture’s voltage. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to appropriate reference database record for the default values.

vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the equipment light fixture. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key item_type: the column used to define a light fixture’s item type. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a light fixture as a cable pull point. 470 . text_4: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. text_1: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_dimension_7: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. num_phase_wires: the column used to define the number of phase wires in a light fixture. item_code_num: the column used to define a light fixture’s item code number. ee_dimension_9: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.February 2003 fl_amps: the column used to define a light fixture’s full load amps. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . text_3: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. num_wires: the column used to define the number of wires in a light fixture. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. area_class: the column used to define a light fixture’s area class. text_2: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. oper_temp_deg_c: the column used to define a light fixture’s operating temperature. power_factor: the column used to define a light fixture’s power factor. ee_dimension_8: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no Null no yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description manual_part This codelist table defines the available manually-placed special fittings (conduit body. ee_rcp_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table for the EE raceway connect point of the special fitting. pullbox). index_value: the column that contains the description of each available manual_part. Both DBAccess and RISRPT (RIS Report Writer) use this table. This table holds the entity numbers for all other tables in the database. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. mscatalog Microstation 32 requires that every database used in graphics contain a table called mscatalog. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_part_table* ee_rcp_ol_type* ee_manpart_type index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a manual_part description. In general. there will be one row in mscatalog for each database table that is linked to graphic elements. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char( 64) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. C: EE Databases ee_manpart_type: the column used to tell the load processor to load the manual part into either the project database "fitting" table or the "panel" table. Any table not directly linked to graphics/EE elements does not need to appear in mscatalog. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. 471 . It must exactly match the name of the desired table.

alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. Column Name table_name column_name join_table code_column text_column index_column* index_value* Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no no no yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column with codelist values. and DBAccess all support this table. 472 . The codelist approach minimizes storage requirements and simplifies database administration._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . MicroStation 32. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns.February 2003 entitynum: the entity number assigned to a table. sqlreview: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. EE places the entity number in the EE header linkage of annotation in order to identify which table the text is linked to. column_name: the column within table_name which contains codelist values. mscodelist This table provides limited support for DMRS-like codelists. The MicroStation 32 database interface places the entity number of a table in the linkage it creates between a graphics element and a table row. A codelist is a data structure that represents a character string which is then represented in the database by integer or character codes. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. RISRPT. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. EE uses this table to restrict input for a particular column to a pre-defined set of values. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32.

In general. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. the work_mode value is set to zero.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description join_table: the codelist table. This column can be thought of as a filter which restricts the display of certain attributes depending on the mode of work the user is performing. there is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table (for those attributes that exist in annotation). will impose additional conditions to allow multiple codelists to be represented in the same database table. index_column: a column name that. A column that does not exist as annotation linked to a graphics/EE element does not need to appear in mscolumns. code_column: the column in join_table that contains the code values. column_name: the name of a column in the database. index_value: the column that provides the index to a specific list within a multiple codelist table. text_column: the column that contains the actual values represented by the corresponding code value in code_column. if not NULL. EE uses the mscolumns information to control display of column information during annotation. C: EE Databases Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order Type integer integer Char( 32) Char( 32) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by the EE software. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. It must exactly match the column name in the database. 473 . mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. The order in which attributes appear on the annotation form is determined by the value in the column ee_column_order.

ee_spec_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general specification information. wireway. This value is used to determine whether one one-line type can break or attach to another one-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_priority_level: an integer value used to define the routing priority level of the one-line type. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the part specification information. ol_type This codelist table defines the available one-line types (tray. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ol_type.February 2003 ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order in which to display attributes on the annotation form. ee_rcp_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_max_run_angle: an integer containing the maximum allowed value of the sum of all bend angles in a run. ee_ol_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general one-line information. and so forth). conduit. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_spec_table* ee_part_table* ee_ol_table* ee_rcp_part_table* ee_max_run_angle* ee_priority_level* Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ol_type description. A value of zero states that the sum of all bend angles in a run is unlimited. 474 .

ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the general specification information on the three-line elements.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 20) real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes no no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description one_line This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway one-lines and their default column values. C: EE Databases ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_key ee_description Type Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes panel: the column which defines the panel/equipment name. Column Name tag add_weight ee_ol_length* ee_spec_key* ee_key* ee_description* tag: the column used to define the one-line tag. panel_descrip: the column which defines the panel/equipment description. panel This table defines both the columns you can annotate for panels/equipment and their default column values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. add_weight: the column used to define an additional weight per unit length. ee_approv_status: the codelisted column used to define the approval status. ee_ol_length: the column used to define the weight per unit length. 475 .

ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key project This table stores information for the project. 476 . ee_create_date: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was created. ee_last_rev_dat: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was last revised. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. prj_rule_set: this column contains the project rule set. location: this column contains the location. ee_key: this column contains the EE Reference database key._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . base_rule_set: this column contains the base rule set. prj_name: this column contains the project name. ee_description:this column contains the key description.February 2003 ee_approv_date: the column used to define the date the approval status was changed. Column Name prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set ee_key ee_description Type char(20) char(60) char(60) char(20) char(20) char(28) char(60) Index dups no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes prj_number: this column contains the project number.

ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a pullbox as a cable pull point. weight: the column used to define the pullbox weight. material: the column used to define the pullbox weight material. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the untis of measurement. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the pullbox outside height to the EERWAY software. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_symbol: the column used to define the pullbox part Eden symbol name to the EE software. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_part_key* ee_description ee_tl_type ee_pull_point vendor: the codelisted column used to define the pullbox vendor. ee_out_width: the column used to define the pullbox outside width to the EERWAY software .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real char(20) char(20) char(6) char(28) char(40) integer integer Index dups no dups dups dups no no no no uniq no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description pullbox This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting PULLBOX. C: EE Databases 477 . ee_dimension_1: the column used to define the pullbox dimension value to Eden and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_part: the column used to define the pullbox part number.

ee_transition: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting transition length. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the manually placed fitting. 478 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available rcp_type. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. rcp_type This codelist table defines additional information about EE Raceway connect points (RCPs).February 2003 rcp This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway connect points (RCPs) and their default column values. ee_radius: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting bend radius. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. Column Name tag ee_rcp_type* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_part_key* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) integer real real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the raceway connect point tag. ee_rcp_type: the codelisted column used to define the raceway connect point type. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a rcp_type description. ee_extension: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting extension length.

ee_tl_qual: the index_column number from the three_line qualifier codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer integer integer Char( 40) Char( 40) integer Char( 6) Index uniq no no no uniq uniq uniq no dups Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tl_fit_env This table is used by the manual fitting command to determine which fitting to place at an RCP based on the intersecting one-lines and the fitting environment rules listed in this table. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_tl_type: the index_column number from the three_line type codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_symbol: the column used to define the fitting EDEN symbol name to the EE software. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. ee_pln_angles: the column that contains the planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_num_ols: the column that contains the number of intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. ee_prp_angles: the column that contains the non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Zero if no check is to be performed. Column Name ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol ee_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table of the intersecting onelines. C: EE Databases ee_tl_subtype: the index_column number from the three_line subtype codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. 479 . Zero if no check is to be performed.

February 2003 tl_qual This codelist table defines additional information about the available three-line types (rigid. elbow. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. wye. 480 . cross._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . bendable. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_type. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_qual description. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. and so forth). horizontal. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. reducer. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_qual. flexible. and so forth). tl_type This codelist table defines the available three-line types (straight. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_subtype description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_subtype. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_type description. and so forth). tl_subtype This codelist table defines the available three-line subtypes (vertical.

ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the equipment. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 32) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description to_equip This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for equipment pointer symbols and their default column values. to_support symbols are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. to_support This table defines both the columns you can annotate for support equipment symbols and their default column values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. Column Name ee_eqp_table ee_part_key ee_eqp_key* ee_description* ee_eqp_table: the name of the reference database table containing the equipment specification information. 481 . Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes C: EE Databases tag: the column used to define the support pointer tag. ee_eqp_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.

ee_symbol: the column used to define the tray part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type.February 2003 tray_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type TRAY. ee_weight: the column used to define the tray part weight. ee_part: the column used to define the tray part number. 482 . ee_angle: the column used to define the tray fitting bend angle. ee_spec2_key: if the current tray part is a reducer. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate tray specification table row containing general specification information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . this column is the key to the row in the other tray specification.

ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_out_width: the column used to define the tray outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. weight: the column used to define the tray weight per unit length. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_radius: the column used to define the tray fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. C: EE Databases 483 . Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the tray specification. material: the column used to define the tray material. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the tray outside height to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the tray fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the tray fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tray_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type TRAY.

February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the tray cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. or C. Column Name index_column* index_value* catalog Type integer Char( 20) char(20) Index uniq dups no Null no yes yea index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a vendor name. catalog: the column that contains catalog information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . wway_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. vendor This codelist table defines the vendors that are available for specifications. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. The associated shapes are shown below. 484 . The only valid entries are: A. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available vendor. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. B.

ee_spec2_key: if the current wireway part is a reducer.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. C: EE Databases wway_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. ee_angle: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend angle. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_weight: the column used to define the wireway part weight. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. 485 . ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_symbol: the column used to define the wireway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_part: the column used to define the wireway part number. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the wireway specification. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate wireway specification table row containing general specification information. this column is the key to the row in the other wireway specification.

ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. weight: the column used to define the wireway weight per unit length. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. material: the column used to define the wireway material.February 2003 ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the wireway outside height to the EE raceway software. or C. ee_transition: the column used to define the wireway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the wireway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the wireway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_out_width: the column used to define the wireway outside width to the EE raceway software. B. The associated shapes are shown below._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_radius: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 486 . ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. The only valid entries are: A.

An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. Column Name revision_numb cable_numb numb_cables numb_conductor conductor_size cable_type_code service_voltage undgrnd_length abvgrnd_length from_equi_numb from_detail not_used plan_assem_dwg to_equi_numb to_detail to_plan_drw_num cont_sta_type quan_term_kits ol_diagram_numb not_used2 remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 3) Char( 8) integer Char( 5) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 7) real real Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 20) Char( 4) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 8) Char( 38) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases revision_numb: the column containing the revision number. numb_conductor: the column containing the number of conductors. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". cabsch_spec This table contains information about the cable schedule for underground cable design. cable_numb: the column containing the area number. 487 . cable number._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. and cable number ID. numb_cables: the column containing the number of cables.

drawing_numb can have duplicate values but the combination of drawing_numb and cable_numb should be unique. not_used2: this column is reserved for later use. cable_type_code: the column containing the cable type. drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. to_plan_drw_num: the column containing the To Plan drawing number. from_equi_numb: the column containing the From Equipment Number. abvgrnd_length: the column containing the above ground length. plan_assem_dwg: the column containing plan drawings or standard assembly drawing number. cont_sta_type: the column containing the control station type. to_detail: the column containing the To Detail Number. quan_term_kits: the column containing the quantity of term. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. service_voltage: the column containing the service voltage. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . to_equi_numb: the column containing the To Equipment Number. undgrnd_length: the column containing the underground length. 488 . remarks: the column containing the remarks for cable schedule. from_detail: the column containing the From Detail Number.February 2003 conductor_size: the column containing the conductor size. not_used: this column is reserved for later use.

and conduit number ID. drawing_numb can have duplicate values. conduit_for: the column defines the purpose of the conduit. conduit_numb: the column containing the area number. but the combination of drawing_numb and conduit_numb should be unique. for example power. conduit number. control. cnd_to_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit goes to. Column Name revision_numb conduit_numb conduit_for cnd_from_where cnd_to_where undgrnd_cnd_size undgrnd_cnd_type undgrnd_cnd_length abvgrnd_cnd_size abvgrnd_cnd_type abvgrnd_cnd_length cnd_detail_numb detail_drw_numb cnd_ac_dimension cnd_station pow_conduct_volt pow_conduct_numb pow_conduct_size pow_conduct_type pow_conduct_length con_conduct_numb con_conduct_size con_conduct_type con_conduct_length grnd_wire_size grnd_wire_type grnd_wire_length ol_diagram_numb remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 2) Char( 10) Char( 12) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 5) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 7) Char( 12) Char( 12) Char( 6) Char( 5) integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 10) Char( 16) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases revision_numb: the column containing the conduit schedule revision number._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description cndsch_spec This table contains information about conduit schedule for underground conduit design. and so forth. 489 . cnd_from_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit starts from.

cnd_station: the column containing the information for control station.February 2003 undgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the underground conduit size. remarks: the column containing remarks for the conduit schedule. undgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the underground conduit. con_conduct_siz: the column containing the control conductor size. con_conduct_num: the column containing the control conductor number. grnd_wire_lengt: the column containing the ground wire length. pow_conduct_len: the column containing the power conductor length. con_conduct_typ: the column containing the control conductor type code. grnd_wire_type: the column containing the ground wire type code. grnd_wire_size: the column containing the ground wire size. pow_conduct_siz: the column containing the power conductor size. detail_drw_numb: the column containing the detail drawing number. pow_conduct_vol: the column containing the power conductor voltage. undgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the underground conduit type. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. abvgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the above ground conduit type. abvgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the above ground conduit size. pow_conduct_num: the column containing the power conductor number. 490 . drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. cnd_ac_dimensio: the column containing the data for AC DIM. pow_conduct_typ: the column containing the power conductor type code. abvgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the above ground conduit. con_conduct_len: the column containing the control conductor length._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . cnd_detail_numb: the column containing the conduit detail number.

ee_filename: the column containing the drawing file name and path. C: EE Databases sheet: the column used to contain the drawing sheet name. Column Name mslink* drawing_type* ee_filename* sheet* load_date* ref_db* Type integer Char( 20) Char( 80) Char( 20) Char( 26) Char( 80) Index uniq no no uniq no no Null no no no no no no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drawing table. ref_db: the column containing the schema name of the EE reference database. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description drawing This table. load_date: the column containing the date that the load processor loaded the drawing into the project database. used by all EE products. drawing_type: the column used to define the type of EE drawing._ _______________ Appendix C: drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. contains general information about each EE design file. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. 491 . drop_point This table associates a row in the rcp table with a row in the one-line table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* tag Type integer integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Index uniq no dups dups no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drop_point table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one_line table.

ee_dist_down_ol: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the drop point._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_duct_cc_row: the row index of the conduit/cable. ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the wires/cables that fill conduit. Column Name mslink ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_quantity item_no Type integer integer integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_pseudo_cable table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_duct_cc_numb: cable/conduit area number. 492 .February 2003 ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. Column Name ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_duct_cc_row ee_duct_cc_col ee_duct_cc_numb ee_drawing_numb Type integer integer integer integer Char( 12) Char( 20) Index dups dups no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. This is performed with the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. duct_fill This table defines the cable/conduit that are placed in a duct one-line. and cable number number ID. tag: the column that contains the name of the drop point. ee_duct_cc_col: the column index of the conduit/cable. ee_drawing_numb: detail drawing number of the conduit/cable schedule. cable number. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column containing the distance between the one-line and the rcp.

Space envelopes are not available at time of printing. tag: the column that contains the envelope tag. envelope This table contains information about the raceway envelopes found in the drawing. system_name: the column that contains the names of the systems. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* tag Type integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no dups Null no no yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the envelope table._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_quantity: the number of wires/cables associated with the given one-line of a given item_no. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ee_system This table contains the names of all systems from every EE Raceway drawing loaded into the project database. 493 . ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name mslink* system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_system table. item_no: the column containing the unique key to the ee_pseudo_cable table of the reference schema.

494 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the fitting. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the fitting. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_weight: the column containing the fitting weight per unit length. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the fitting. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_out_width2 ee_dimension_1* ee_angle* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_ol_type* ee_part* ee_description Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no dups no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the fitting table. ee_angle: the column containing the fitting bend angle.February 2003 fitting This table contains information about the raceway fittings found in the drawing. ee_out_width2: the column containing the outside width of the reducer. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table.

ee_tl_qual: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line qualifier. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). ee_description: the column containing the fitting part description. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type._ _______________ Appendix C: cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. 495 . ee_tl_type: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line type. Column Name ee_to_fit* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_fit: the column containing the mslink of a row in the fitting table. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. C: EE Databases fit_to_sys This table links a fitting to each system of which it is a member. ee_tl_subtype: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line subtype.

alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. entitynum: The entity number assigned to a table. 496 . key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. There will be one row in the mscatalog for each database table. It must exactly match the name of the desired table.February 2003 mscatalog This table contains the entity (table) numbers for all the tables in the EE Raceway project database. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char(32) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns. sqlreview: an sql select satement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns.

Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order* Type uniq integer Char( 32) Char( 64) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. There is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table. the work_mode value is set to zero. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. Display of certain attributes can be restricted depending on the mode of work the user is performing. RISRPT and DBAccess use this table for reports. Currently. This column can also be thought of as a filter. ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order to display the attributes on the annotation form._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. column_name: the name of a column in the database. there are no EE processors using this table. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. C: EE Databases 497 . Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by an EE user. It must exactly match the column name in the database. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access.

ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. Column Name ee_to_ol* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* prj_rule_applied Type integer integer real integer Index dups dups no no Null no no yes yes ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. one_line This table contains information about the raceway one-lines found in the drawing. prj_rule_applied: the column containing the applied project rule. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_rcp1* ee_to_rcp2* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_ol_length* weight cab_weight vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* tag ee_radius ee_const_type Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) real char Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no dups no no dups dups no no Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the one_line table.February 2003 ol_to_sys This table links a one-line to each system of which it is a member. 498 . ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_const_type: the column that contains the construction type. C: EE Databases 499 . EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ee_to_rcp1: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the start of the one-line in the design file. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the one-line type. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. weight: the column containing the one-line type weight per unit length. tag: the column that contains the name of the one-line. ee_radius: the column that contains the fitting bend radius of the three-line type specification. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the one-line type. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_ol_length: the column containing the run length of the one-line. ee_to_rcp2: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the end of the one-line in the design file.

Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. Column Name mslink prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set Type integer Char( 20) Char( 40) Char( 60) Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq uniq uniq no no no Null no yes no no no yes 500 .February 2003 panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. project This table contains specification information for the project. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table.

location: the column containing location. Column Name ee_to_panel ee_asid ee_to_drw ee_to_rcp ee_status Type integer integer integer integer integer Index dups no dups dups no Null no no no yes no C: EE Databases ee_to_panel: the column containing the mslink of a row in the panel table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table._ _______________ Appendix C: mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_status: the column containing the revision status of the panel element in the design file (used by the Load Database process). Column Name mslink* ee_rcp_type* tag ee_radius Type integer Char( 10) Char( 20) real Index uniq no no no Null no yes yes no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the rcp table. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description panel_to_drw This table links a panel/equipment to each drawing in which it exists. rcp This table contains information about all raceway connect points (RCPs) found in the drawing. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the RCP table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the panel/equipment element in the design file identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. prj_number: the column containing the project number prj_name: the column containing the project name description. prl_rule_set: the column containing the project rule set. base_rule_set: column containing the base rule set. 501 .

February 2003 ee_rcp_type: the column containing the codelist value of the type of rcp. tag: the column that contains the name of the rcp. Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. rcp_to_drw This table links an rcp to each drawing in which it exists. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the rcp element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). rcp_to_sys This table links an rcp to each system of which it is a member. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* Type integer integer integer real real real Index dups no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_radius: the column containing the fitting bend radius. 502 . pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table.

ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_tl_length: the column containing the length of the straight section. 503 . ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the straight section. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the straight section. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description straight This table contains information about the raceway straight sections found in the drawing. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_weight: the column containing the straight section weight per unit length. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_tl_length* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* ee_part* material ee_description Type integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups no no no no no no no no no no dups no no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the straight table.

504 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table.February 2003 cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). str_to_sys This table links a straight section to each system of which it is a member. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. Column Name ee_to_str* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_str: the column containing the mslink of a row in the straight table. ee_description: the column containing the straight section part description. material: the column containing the straight section material.

Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_ol_coord* tag Type integer integer integer real Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the to_support table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the system element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. tag: the column that contains the support tag. to_support This table links the raceway one-line with a support. ee_ol_coord: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the support. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. 505 . to_support symbols are not available at time of printing._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description sys_to_drw This table links a system name to each drawing in which the system exists. Column Name ee_to_sys* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* Type integer integer integer Index dups no dups Null no no no ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table.

February 2003 506 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

the system will overwrite any records already existing in the specified . D: Specs 507 . SPEC Process The SPEC process resides in the win32app\eerway\bin directory. If you intend to add records to an existing .sav extension to the specified table name. Enter your reference schema name and the appropriate table name. The <one-line type>_spec table contains all specifications._ _______________ Appendix D: Specification Appendix D Specification Your reference database contains the specification tables (<one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec) that drive the EE Raceway product. the reference database contains one table for each fitting type. The system will attach a . The following information displays to the screen: Enter schema name: Enter table name: Is this a restart (y/n) Respond to the prompts according to your requirements. The first step in this preparation is to create two ASCII data files (<one-line type>_part.unl to a file called <one-line type>_spec.unl file or to create a new . Preparing the Specifications Preparing the specifications is one of the first tasks the system manager performs when setting up the EE Raceway product. The specifications available at the time of printing are for tray.unl and <one-line type>_spec.unl) to contain all the relevant data from the vendor catalogs.sav before running the process. You can edit these files manually using a standard ASCII editor or you can use the SPEC process delivered with EE Raceway. To initiate the process. Indicate whether or not you are adding records to an existing file (Is this a restart (y/n). If you answer n to the prompt.unl file easily and efficiently.sav file. key in SPEC at the command prompt. This process allows you to add records to an existing . copy the appropriate <one-line type>_spec. For special fittings like conduit bodies and pullboxes.sav file. and conduit. while the <one-line type>_part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. The two special fittings delivered by default with EE Raceway are conduit body and pullbox. wireway. The process will then write all records to this . airway. These tables contain all attribute information for the available one-line types. and will then write all records to that file.unl file.

sav file back to the corresponding . Once you enter the final value for the displayed table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .unl file to keep the records you have added. in a format similar to the following example (for tray_spec): vendor <code list> () ee_units <code list> () ee_dimension_1 <real> () ee_out_ht_diam <real> () ee_dimension_2 <real> () ee_out_width <real> () ee_extension <real> () ee_transition <real> () ee_radius <real> () weight <real> () material <char-20> () ee_xs_cell <char-6> () ee_spec_key <char-28> () ee_description <char-40> () Key in values to the right of the () for each column value. Continue this process as long as you wish to add records to your . press <RETURN> to accept the displayed values (in ()) or key in new values as necessary. For subsequent records. It also displays the column values you entered for the previous record. Each value is verified according to the parameters defined inside the < >. and then displays the column values for the table name you specified. You can exit the process at any point by pressing CTRL -C. Copy the .February 2003 The system processes the information.sav file and redisplays the column names.sav file. 508 . the system writes the information to the .

unl files you will load into your reference database tables._ _______________ Appendix D: Sample . tray_spec.unl Files The following are examples of . Note that the | serves as a delimiter between column values.unl Files Sample .unl 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|6060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|6030AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|4560AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|4530AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|3060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A D: Specs 509 .

while the part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification.unl 2|2|5|90|0|A-15VA|VEL|1530AS| |A-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-30VA|VEL|3030AS| |A-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-45VA|VEL|4530AS| |A-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-60VA|VEL|6030AS| |A-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-15VA|VEL|1530ADS| |AD-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-30VA|VEL|3030ADS| |AD-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-45VA|VEL|4530ADS| |AD-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-60VA|VEL|6030ADS| |AD-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 4|5|1|90|0|ADL-15X-90|HRC|1590ADL| |ADL-15X-90|Horizontal Cross 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30R15-60|Concentric Reducer 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30R15-90|Concentric Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RL15-60|Left Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RL15-90|Left Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RR15-60|Right Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RR15-90|Right Reducer 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3060ADL| |ADL-30ST-60|Straight Section 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3090ADL| |ADL-30ST-90|Straight Section 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-60|HRT|3060ADL| |ADL-30T-60|Horizontal Tee 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-90|HRT|3090ADL| |ADL-30T-90|Horizontal Tee Update Reference Schema Once created. Sample Specification Tables This section describes the required column names of sample specification tables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .unl files are input to the Update Reference Schema process which loads information in the <one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec tables. For information about running Update Reference Schema. see Update Reference Schema in the section entitled Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment. a dimension variable used by Eden. As described previously. a dimension variable used by Eden. tray_spec table Column Name vendor* ee_units* ee_dimension_1 ee_out_ht_diam ee_dimension_2 ee_out_width ee_extension Description the index_column (codelist) value from the vendor table.February 2003 tray_part. the spec table contains all specifications. 510 . the index_column (codelist) value from the ee_units table. tray_spec and tray_part. the outside width dimension in sub-units. the . the outside height dimension in sub-units. the fitting extension.

the fitting turn angle. the cross section symbol. the unique tray part key. the tray part weight. see the appendix entitled EE Databases . the weight per unit length of the run._ _______________ Appendix D: ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description the fitting transition length. the tray part description. the tray specification description.unl Files tray_part table Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle ee_weight ee_part ee_symbol ee_spec_key ee_spec2_key ee_key ee_description Description the index_column value from the tl_type table. the unique tray specification key. * For information about the codelist values. the tray specification key. the fitting bend radius. the secondary tray specification key for reducers. Sample . the index_column value from the tl_qual table. D: Specs 511 . the tray material. the Eden symbol. the index_column value from the tl_subtype table. the construction type. the tray part catalog number.

and Adjustable 90.60.45 left and 45 right 90 90 90 90 512 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .45. and Adjustable 30.60.45.90.February 2003 Available Fittings The following is a list of the fittings currently supported by the EE Raceway Modeling product: FITTING Straight Elbow Elbow Elbow Wye Wye Wye Cross Cross Reducer Reducer Reducer Conduit body Pullbox TYPE ANGLE Horizontal Inside Vertical Outside Vertical Horizontal Vertical Reducer Horizontal Vertical Left Horizontal Right Horizontal Concentric 30.90.60.45. and Adjustable 30.90.

and special parts (conduit bodies._ _______________ Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation Appendix E Eden Symbol Generation Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for raceway straight sections. Symbol Processor File A symbol processor file is the controlling function or logic used to produce the raceway straight sections. Eden provides drawing commands called primitives. To review or modify the symbols in this library.).) Every Raceway symbol must contain a symbol processor definition and at least one of each of the following: Placepoint (EE attachment point) Datum point (EE RCP point) Graphical element E: Eden Symbols 513 .lib and resides in win32app\eerway\eden. and special parts. use the delivered Eden processes. fittings. For additional information about the Eden symbol language. you should be familiar with a standard ASCII editor like vi or emacs. The library and its path are defined using the EE Configure command. pullboxes. You do not need a programming background to write Eden programs.). see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. etc. The delivered symbol library is called eden. However. (See the chapter entitled Eden Processes for more information about running these processes. You can write Eden code using whatever case conventions make it easiest for you to read. Primitives allow you to construct complex symbols by using a combination of simple commands (place_line. fittings. etc. draw_arc.

========================================================================= ! ! Symbol Name: HEL ! ! Description: Horizontal Tray Elbow.eq. extension. val4. val5. radius. ! ========================================================================= SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’HEL’ #DESC = Tray Horizontal Elbow r8 halfwid. you should have consulted the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide or have taken a course in Eden symbol generation. height.0 . angle . 0.0 . angle height halfwid extension radius ORG BND1 BND2 EXT1 EXT2 ARC = = = = = = 19 20 21 22 23 24 = = = = = DIMENSION[4] DIMENSION[21] DIMENSION[22] / 2.0) then Call ABORT ( 0 ) Endif Call Begin ( NOHOLE ) Call Begin ( SURFACE ) ! ! ! Add dimension of tray to radius radius = radius + halfwid ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Calculate distances distance variables val1 val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 = = = = = = bendpoint on primary oneline primary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline extension point on primary oneline primary distance to extpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to extpoint on bent oneline 514 . 0. val1.eq. val2. 0.or.0 DIMENSION[23] DIMENSION[25] NUMPTS = 4 If ( halfwid . val6 ! ! ! Get Dimensions Required to create the horizontal elbow._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . height .eq. val3.February 2003 The best way to explain how a symbol processor file works is to show an example: Before creating an Eden symbol processor file. with or without extensions. angle.or.

Point[0] ) Point[0]. 0. 0. (Point[3]. Define_Point ( Point[EXT2]. NORMAL ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2. Point[i]. val5. 0) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. 0 ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. Point[0]. -val4. Point[ORG]. 0 ) Do i = 1. (Point[4]. NUMPTS. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. Point[0] ) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT1] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[BND1]. Point[0]. 0. 0. height. 0 ) 0. 0 ) 0. Point[0]. halfwid. val3.0. Point[ARC] ) Call Rotate_Orientation( 180. Point[0]. 1 Call Define_Point( Point[NUMPTS+i]. Point[0].0 ) val1 * DSIND( angle ) val1 * DCOSD( angle ) val1 + extension val4 * DSIND( angle ) val4 * DCOSD( angle ) Eden Symbol Generation Define bendpoints (point2 and point3) and bend origin (point4) Define_Datum_Point( DP[1]. Point[0]. height. 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) ) ) ) ) ) Define Placepoints Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[ORG]. Define_Point ( Point[ORG]. 0.ne. val2. -halfwid. val6. NUMPTS. 0. -val1. Point[BND2]. Point[1] ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0 ) Endif 515 . 0. radius. Define_Point ( Point[BND1]. 0. 0. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. Define_Point ( Point[EXT1]. 0. 0. Point[0]. 0 ) then Do i = 1. 0. 0. -halfwid.-extension. 0 ) Draw First Extension E: Eden Symbols If ( extension ._ _______________ Appendix E: radius val1 = val2 = val3 = val4 = val5 = val6 = ! ! ! Call Call Call Call Call Call Call ! ! ! = radius + halfwid radius * DTAND( angle / 2. halfwid. Point[0]. Define_Point ( Point[ARC]. (Point[2]. Define_Point ( Point[BND2]. Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1. 0 ) 0. Point[0]. 0. Point[0] ) ! ! ! Define cross section points Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND1] ) Call Call Call Call ! ! ! Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. 0. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. -val1.

Point[2]. NUMPTS. height. 0 ) ! ! ! Draw Second Extension If ( extension . For more information see the description of databases in the Workflow and Procedures chapter. 0 ) then Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[ORG]. 0 ) Do i = 1. 0 ) 0. 0 ) Endif Stop End The first line of this file should always be: SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’<name>’ The last two lines of the file should always be: Stop End This line defines the symbol name. Point[1]. (Point[2]. Point[0]. NUMPTS. 1 Call Define_Point(Point[NUMPTS+i]. 516 . 0) Enddo Call Call Call Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1.ne. 0 ) 0. 0 ) 0. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. 0. 0. extension. 0. -halfwid. halfwid. (Point[3].Point[3]) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[ARC] ) Call Draw_Revolved_Shape ( EL_LINESTR. 0.February 2003 ! ! ! Draw revolved shape Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[1]. (Point[4]. 0 ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. Point[0]. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. NUMPTS. Point[0].Point[ARC]) Call Call Call Call Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. the name of the symbol should correspond with the ee_symbol in the part table. 1. When defining parts in the reference database. -angle. 0 ) Do i = 1. Point[0]. -halfwid._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . height.Point[BND2]. 0. Point[i]. Point[1] ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. halfwid.

EE Raceway fills the DIMENSION array with values extracted from the reference database.ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table .... .... Dimension 25 Spec Table ._ _______________ Appendix E: The symbol in the example defines the symbol name as Tray Horizontal Elbow. It uses Placepoints to define the point by which you can place a fitting using manual placement. and radius from the global array DIMENSION. extension. . Eden Symbol Generation DIMENSIONS The DIMENSION structure contains specific information that has been extracted from the database and passed through to Eden....... In general.... 50 Height Width Extension Transition Radius Dimension 1 Dimension 2 . ..ee_dimension_2 . For a description of which database columns are associated with what dimensions.......ee_out_wid Spec Table ...... width..ee_dimension_25 E: Eden Symbols These are from the secondary specification (if one exists): 51 52 53 Height_2 Width_2 Extension_2 Spec Table .. .ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table . The elbow is drawn as a surface of revolution. . EE Raceway uses a Datum Point to define the location of the RCP relative to the symbol.. . height... The RCP is defined in the active location with the active orientation...ee_extension Spec Table . Spec Table ... Then the placepoints are defined at either end of the elbow. If the fitting has extensions.... they are drawn as a surface of projection of a line string.....ee_extension 517 ... For specification-driven parts....ee_radius Spec Table .. the one-line will pass through a placepoint on the symbol and will terminate at the RCP..ee_dimension_1 Spec Table . The creation of the horizontal elbow symbol is fairly straightforward given a knowledge of Eden primitives.....ee_transition Spec Table .. see the table immediately following this description.. the structure is as follows: Dimension 1 2 3 4 11 What Three Line Type Three Line Subtype Three Line Qualifier Angle Length From Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated These are from the specification table: 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 .... while other critical points are defined relative to the origin..ee_out_wid Spec Table . The symbol derives the values for angle.

....... ... Part Table ......ee_dimension_60 518 .ee_dimension_1 Part Table ..ee_dimension_1 Spec Table ..... . Spec Table . ........................February 2003 54 55 56 57 .. .. .ee_radius Spec Table ....ee_dimension_25 The following structure is used for special parts: Dimension 26 27 ....... .... .... ....... 80 Transition_2 Radius_2 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 . .. Dimension 25 Spec Table ............. .ee_transition Spec Table ........... Dimension 60 From Part Table ....ee_dimension_2 .......ee_dimension_2 .............. ........... . 80 What Dimension 1 Dimension 2 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Appendix F: EE File Structure Appendix F EE File Structure F: File Structure This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. By default. It identifies those files you can modify. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to \win32app\ingr. 519 .

The following files exist under the . The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Any file followed by an asterisk (*) is an executable. EE Nucleus will reside under the /usr#/ip32/eenuc directory. /usr/ip32/eenuc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eenuc/config: /usr/ip32/eenuc/data: /usr/ip32/eenuc/db: 520 . The product may reside on any file system.February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line./eenuc directory: Any file followed by a slash (name/) is a directory..

EErc – File containing global symbol definitions.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. The files are grouped by directory.def – product definition file. problems. eenuc/ — README – file containing description of product features and any fixes. — remove. and EE WPD._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eenuc/doc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/forms: EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eenuc/msg: /usr/ip32/eenuc/sym: The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. comments. — legend – copyright notice file. The EE shell script sets up variables specifying the location of MicroStation 32. and then invokes the EE environment. etc. bin/ – contains the EE shell script and the environment process. C100 for C100 executables or C400 for C400 executables. INFORMIX. 521 .txt – File containing release notices. — . — product. — EEnotice. EE Nucleus.

The file assigns MicroStation 32 variables. — eeqpr – script to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. — risql – EE reporting utility. — eeprj – environment process. This file can be edited. config/ – Contains the file that assigns and exports any required variables. 522 . — 132_header – file to allow printing in 132 column format. INFORMIX variables. — dba_shell – shell executed around dba_rpt._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — eemgr – system manager environment process. — EEmgr – Electrical Enginner manager environment shell script. — infx_ol – file used for compression of on-line INFORMIX databases. — assign – shell script that assigns and exports any required variables. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. — reeprj – remote environment process. — print. Also kills stray processes.February 2003 — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server.dat – ASCII file for output file management. — EE – Electrical Engineer environment shell script. — menu_shell – shell executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. — infxcompress – file used for compression of standard engine databases. — create_db – create database process. and product variables. — clip – clears interprocess communication left after a process finishes. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — mount – supports less disk installation.sh – shell script to create mscolumns table for reference database. — mscrecol.

EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure 523 . — lessd. db/ – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib).txt – EE project setup information._ _______________ Appendix F: — manager. — ustn_tsk – DB Access file. — dba* files – DB Access files. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. sym/ – contains EE symbol files. doc/ – directory that contains documentation. — eepsp.txt – less disk information.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. msg/ – contains EE Nucleus message files. forms/ – directory that contains all the environment forms.

/usr/ip32/eerway: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eerway/cfg: /usr/ip32/eerway/config: /usr/ip32/eerway/data: 524 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway.

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/db: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn: /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn/seed: /usr/ip32/eerway/doc: /usr/ip32/eerway/eden: /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source: 525 .

February 2003 /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source/help_graphics: /usr/ip32/eerway/mdlapps: /usr/ip32/eerway/menus: /usr/ip32/eerway/msg: /usr/ip32/eerway/report: 526 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The files are grouped by directory.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Raceway from the machine.def – product definition file. cfg/ – Contains the application menu configuration files. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. — remove. problems. eerway/ — README – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. unload drawing.cfg – EE Raceway menu configuration file. — load – processor to load the project database. — menu. and clean database processes. etc. 527 . — assign – shell script that defines and exports any required variables. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. config/ – Contains the file that defines and exports all variables required by EE Raceway and those MicroStation 32 variables required by EE Raceway. These files can be modified. — product. bin/ – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. comments._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/sym: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/tmp: delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product.

Also contains . — rway_bar – bar menu for schematic commands.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. function key menu. available cell libraries.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. and any design files delivered with the product. — eden. You can supply additional menu files.s – master help source file. — process. This may be customized.dat – controls standard report management.cmds – command file for EE commands invoked by MicroMenu. — help_rway. — rule_chk._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — mstr_rway.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. db/ – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. This may be customized. 528 . msseed. — help_rway.hp – help pointer file. — seed/ – contains the available seed design files. Also contains all symbol and icon files required to support delivered menus. – – seed. Attaches the function bar menu. — report.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file.dat – controls rule check report management.dat – controls Eden processes. — help_graphics – contains the graphics used in on-line Help.s – help source file. dgn/ – Contains the seed file directory. and cell library. Sample . help_source/ – contains the text and source files required to support on-line Help. eden/ – contains the Eden symbol library.lib – the Eden symbol library file.hp – master help pointer file containing pointers to both MicroStation 32 and EE Raceway Help. doc/ – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases.February 2003 — eden. menus/ – Contains the all menus (panel and bar) supporting the product. — mstr_rway.dat – controls process management. — rway.

sym – symbol file for the bar menu.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. — rwaybar.pnl – panel menu source file. — status. This file can be extended. — prompt. report/ – Contains the source (. – merge_pnl – panel menu file. tmp/ – Holds any temporary files.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. — rwaypnl.msg – message file containing messages for status field.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. — error. This directory also contains the available precision input forms. EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure msg/ – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands. – rway_pnl – panel menu palette file. — command.bar – bar menu source file. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added.sym – symbol file for the panel menu. — alias. — rway_pnl/ – contains the rway_pnl binary menu files. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — rway_prj. 529 . The source files may be edited by the user. prompting messages. There is an . sym/ – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports.ace and an . — rway.arc file for each report listed below.ace)and compiled (. — annot_form – form file for annotation. — rway. — rway_ref. The software requires this directory. and logo.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added._ _______________ Appendix F: — merge_pnl/ – directory containing the merged panel menu consisting of EE Raceway and MicroStation.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 530 .

report.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.dat. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. and print. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. # # eden.Path.dat file controls the scrolling list for the options available through the system manager menu.dat control the scrolling lists for the Process. Rule. rule_chk.-O.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # 531 . Report.\ | Enter option (-l=list or -o=insert). # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.dat rule_chk. The manager.dat..dat #ident "@(#)Eden processes:eden.. You can add defaults to this screen by modifying the file. Rule._ _______________ Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files Appendix G Customizing Environment Files This appendix contains printouts of the following files as they are delivered with EE Raceway: File eden. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # Change History: # Added the ability to list/extract user functions 31-May-95 # Compile EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. .) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt.%EDEN_LIB%. reports or rule checks or change their names from what is delivered. . eden.dat process.dat 13. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.bat -c \ | Enter library name .dat # This file is stored under the %EE_RWAY%\data directory.Default..dat..Path. respectively. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable. Report. and Output menus.dat report.dat print.dat Location win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data G: Customizing Environment process.Switch | . \ | Enter symbol source file .1 0.. and Output.dat manager.. You may want to write your own processes. This section describes the syntax needed to modify the scrolling list for the Process.Default.

..bat -eu \ b | Enter library name ..bat -l \ | Enter library name .%EDEN_LIB%.. Extract EDEN User Function From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden...bat -s \ | Enter library name . \ | Merge from library name ..bat -e \ n | Enter library name .February 2003 # # Delete EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden...%EDEN_LIB%.bat -d\ | Enter library name .bat -C \ # | Enter library name . # # # Extract EDEN Symbol From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden..notepad. # # # Compress EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden..%EDEN_LIB%.bat -m \ | Merge into library name . \ \ | Enter symbol name .._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .%EDEN_LIB%.%EDEN_LIB%.. # # | E n t e r e d | Enter symbol file name.. # # # Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -u \ | Enter library name . \ | Enter symbol name . # # E Edit EDEN Symbol File | %EE_RWAY% tor......%EDEN_LIB%. \ a t | Enter symbol name . 532 . # # # List EDEN User Functions | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.. d # e n # .%EDEN_LIB%. # # # List EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # #Create Parameteric Help Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.

%EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # NOTE: Many processes run off the project or reference schema (or both). # # Load Database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\load. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. any customized processes written should read these symbols in the # process instead of passing them on the command line. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt.exe \ | Enter design name.Path.<password> if a password is keyed in on the project form.exe \ | Enter design name. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.-f \ | Enter envelope name.. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable. This was # done to handle schema passwords.Switch | .Path.Default.exe # # Create Interference Envelope (default name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.-e G: Customizing Environment 533 . These symbols # are exported by the EE environment when a project is entered. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. # Two environment symbols have been set up for these schemas: EE_SCHEMA # for the project schema and EES_REFDB for the reference. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.1 0.-f # # Create Interference Envelope (given name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.-F # # Unload Sheet | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # # Cleanup database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.%RWAY_DGN%.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.%RWAY_DGN%._ _______________ Appendix G: process.%RWAY_DGN%.dat #ident "@(#)data:process.exe \ | Enter one design name. .%RWAY_DGN%. # # process.Default.dat 13.. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.. The password will # have to be handled accordingly.-f # # # Unload Design | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.exe -s \ | Enter sheet.. # So.exe \ | Enter design name. . # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_SCH%\data directory...dat process. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. The symbol is exported as # <schema_name>.

) as the delimeter.dat # The syntax of this data file : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt..%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. .0 (EE Raceway) 6/1/92" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file..February 2003 report.dat #ident "@(#)data:report.%EE_SCHEMA% \ | Enter low range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) \ | Enter high range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) # # Raceway Conduit Body report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Material takeoff report | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.1 0.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | mto_rpt \ | Enter project schema. # The second field is the command field.dat 7.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials by volume| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. .Default | .cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom_v \ | Enter project schema. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.%EES_REFDB% # # 534 .cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib dummy %EE_RPTDB% \ | cond_body \ | Enter Reference schema. # # Project drawing list | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # # They are: # Prompt. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | drwlst \ | Enter project schema.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom \ | Enter project schema. # # report. # The third field is the name of the report which can be a global symbol # or a file name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

%EE_SCHEMA% # # G: Customizing Environment 535 . Default | .Default # The default can be a global symbol or file. # The second field is the command field. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. # # Material takeoff blank part ID’s | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | blank_ids \ | Enter project schema. # # rule_chk._ _______________ Appendix G: rule_chk.dat #ident "@(#)data:rule_chk...dat 13. .) as the delimiter # # They are: Prompt.dat # The syntax of this data file is : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (. . # The third field is the report name which can be a global symbol or file.dat rule_chk.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.1 0. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.

PATH.dat #ident "@(#)env_data:print.default..DEFAULT.. # TO SCREEN| SCREEN # # Local line printer # Local Printer| lp # # NQS print command to print to a laser printer # Laser Printer 80 columns | qpr -t text\ | Enter queue name..1 0.dat # This file is stored under %EE_NUC%\data directory. The command "vaxprint" # could be a shell script or an exported shell function. # (The path is not relevant).dat 21. # The first column of comment line must be #. # # print.-q # Laser Printer 132 columns | %EE_NUC%\bin\eeqpr \ | Enter queue name.._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .path and switch. # The third field is made up of four parts: prompt. # The titles are the messages on the scrolling list..February 2003 print.0 (EE Schematic) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.. # #VAX Line Printer| vaxprint # 536 . # # This is an example of a way to print to a VAX.SWITCH. This field should be used to pass # information to the command. A file name is automatically appended to # the command as the last parameter. # The command can be any command to output a file. # The syntax of this data file is : # TITLE | COMMAND | PROMPT.

.. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (... .dat 21.Default. _ r # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted p # t # .Path. G: Customizing Environment 537 . # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.INFORMIX Online | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infx_ol -T compress d # Create mscolumns table | %EE_NUC%\bin\mscrecol. Edit database | %EE_NUC%etnt -l %EE_NUC%\db\mgrdba_lib \ x | Enter schema name.dat #ident "@(#)env:manager.Path..Switch | .0 (EE Nucleus) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.) as the delimeter n # # They are : b # Prompt._ _______________ Appendix G: manager. -s e # # m #Compress database .dat # This file is stored under the %EE_NUC%\data directory.Switch a # The default can be a global symbol or file.INFORMIX SE | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infxcompress -T compress # d # b e #Compress database .1 0. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.dat manager. . # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt..Default. # # manager. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.cmd \ |Enter schema name.

February 2003 538 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

If you were to add this example to the alias. Since the EE Raceway software has a reserved set of names for each Raceway command which are hard-coded into the EE Raceway software. if the sample alias entry (in the file below) were added to alias. the command name key-ins in the file will invoke the commands to which they correspond.cmd file This appendix contains a description and printout of the alias.cmd file. The alias. and a list of EE Raceway command names and the hard-code for each command. just as would the key-in EERWAY Delete Element.cmd file.cmd file is an ASCII file located in win32app\ingr\eerway\msg._ _______________ Appendix H: alias. any alias you add to this file must not match any of the command name key-ins or hard-coded names listed below. You do not need to add entries to the alias. The example in the alias.cmd.cmd # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # 13.cmd file.cmd file Appendix H alias. then the key-in EERWAY Remove Element would invoke the command EERWAY Delete Element. For example. To the left of the equal sign (=) in this example is the user-definable alias key-in name. you would need only to key in r e to invoke the command. The fixed (hard-coded) command name is to the right of the equal sign.1 0.cmd file (the # symbols indicate comment lines): #ident "@(#)rdmsg:alias.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" To create an alias for an EE Raceway command add an entry to this file consisting of the alas and the hardcode for that command in the following format: <alias> = <hardcode> The list of possible hardcodes follows: Command Name ———— EERWAY Active OLT Parameters EERWAY Add System Group EERWAY Annotate Element EERWAY Annotate Group EERWAY Annotate Title Block EERWAY Clone Element EERWAY Clone Group EERWAY Conduit Sizing EERWAY Copy Element EERWAY Copy Group EERWAY Create Cell EERWAY Delete Coincident RCPs EERWAY Define Duct Cross Section Hardcode ——– rwp addsysg annotate anntgrp anntblk clone cloneg rtwform cpele cpeleg crecell coinrcp ductform 539 . You can use any text editor to modify the file.cmd file explains how to create an alias for a particular command.cmd file contains instructions for adding an entry. H: alias. the format of such an entry. The alias.cmd file The following is a print-out of the alias. a sample entry. You need to key in just enough of the key-in name to make it unique.

February 2003 # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY Delete Duplicate One Lines Delete Element Delete Group Delete Title Block Design Parameters Display Element Info Display Entity and Mslink Display Fitting Info Display Run Info Display Sector and Word Display System and OLT Display Type and Asid Edit Manual Fitting Exit Fitting Environment Element Fitting Environment Group Group Control Highlight Asid Highlight Entity and Mslink Highlight Graphic Group Highlight Propagation Errors Highlight Sector and Word Highlight System Elements Insert One Line Vertex Insert RCP Levels Control Load Database Minimize Joints Minimize Joints Group Modify One Line Move Element Move One Line Segment Move One Line Vertex Move Title Block OLT Definition Place Drop Point Place Equipment Pointer Place Manual Fitting Place One Line Place Title Block Propagate Element Propagate Group Propagation Control Remove Fitting Remove One Line Vertex Remove RCP Replace System Group Rotate Cross Section Route Around Vessel Run Reports Run Rule Checks Set Active OLT Set Active OLT Parameters Set Active Point Set Active System Set Conduit Sizing Attributes Set Symbology Control Symbology Control System Definition Text Defaults Toggle Spider Display dupols dltele dlteleg dlttblk ueleform eleinfo prtrlnk tlfinfo runinfo prtsw prtsysol prtasid manedit rexit rulefit rulefitg grpform hiasid hirlnk higg hiprerr hisw hisys insolvert addrcp levels loaddb minjnt minjntg modol mvele mvolseg mvolvert mvtblk oltdef plcdpnt plctoeqp manform plcol plctblk prjele prjeleg propform rmfit rmolvert rmrcp repsysg rotcs rtvess runrpt runrul actolt setact actpnt actsys setcsa setgsc symbform sysdef txtdef togspider 540 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Appendix H: # # example: EERWAY Remove Element = dltele alias.cmd file H: alias.cmd file 541 .

February 2003 542 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

cfg active mmenus ee_rway:rway.) Below is the file as it is delivered in the product directory: m.ammfile. It is run automatically when you enter the EE Raceway environment.amm m. The rway.cmd The file rway..prAttaching EE Raceway Menus.._ _______________ Appendix I: rway.cmd is the MicroMenu (umenu) command file that is used to attach the EE Raceway menus. You can disable any of these features by commenting out the line(s) that enable the feature.cmd Appendix I rway. If you do not want the rway.cmd file to be executed. you can comment out the export variable RWAY_CMD using the EE Configure command. (Place a pound sign (#) in front of any line you do not want executed.cmds 543 . This file is located in the directory path win32app\eerway\db and activates the rway. add mmenus ee_rway:menu.pr I: rway. MicroStation reads this file and processes the commands as if keyed in by the user.cmd file may also be edited by the user.

February 2003 544 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The EE Raceway reports report on the project database. i. All EE Raceway reports are compatible for use with either RIS Report-Writer (RISRPT) or DB Access (DBA). It is used as a "default" schema to enter DB Access.. This information will be helpful if you want to use a delivered report as a template for a customized report. Any RISsupported relational database. and the RIS Report-Writer Reference Guide.[wtr_p5] [-?] -s <schema name> Returns a usage statement like the one listed above._ _______________ Appendix J: Reports Appendix J Reports This section describes each report delivered with EE Raceway. J: Reports -l <template library> -t <report template> -M <menu template> -w <where clause> 545 . layout. both. It specifies the attributes used in the report and describes some of the internal operation behind report generation. RIS Dataview or RIS Report Writer are all supported by this processor. in some cases. This is the name of any current RIS schema. It doesn’t have to be the schema your report is running off of. Usage: dba_rpt [-?] -s <schema> -l<template library> [-t<template>|-M<menu template>] -w<where clause> -o<output file> -S<schema list> [-F<database find>] [wtr_p0]. the reference database and. The name of the menu you wish to run from your menu template library. RIS Report Processing A report processor is provided with EE Raceway to run RIS-based reports.e. "where name = ’joe smith’ and number = 32". All EE Raceway reports are currently written for RIS-DBACCESS. This is the library of templates created to run reports from. Report templates created through DB Access. Project Dataview. Created through DB Access. The name of the report you wish to run from your report template library. Documentation explaining how to create and compile customized reports with RIS-DB ACCESS is available in the DB ACCESS Reference Guide. the Project Data View Reference Guide. Used to restrict the report output to a certain type of condition. and print conditions. or RIS Report-Writer this is your report source code. is supported.. either local or remote.

(The current standard is that the output filename be the same as the template name.) This is the list of schemas your report actually runs through.. The first parameter is read into wtr_p0.February 2003 -o <output filename> All reports have a hardcoded.rpt" added to the end..) 546 . and will be picked up as defaults if switches are not used.e. * selects one character string from the database based on the select statement entered (i.. with a ".[wtr_p5] When you create a template.. be careful of how your list looks before you develop a report template. Certain variables may be exported. They are: DBA_SCHEMA (the "-s schema"._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . since all EE Raceway reports were developed with the project schema listed first and the reference schema listed second. second. etc. "select value_a from table_b where. and use a schema from the schema list. A default schema used to enter RIS) DBA_SCHEMA_LIST (schema list the report runs off of) * DBA_LIB (the report template library) It is useful to export these variables before entering DB Access. etc. whatever that schema’s position was in that list (first. third. If you wish to override this name. RIS Dataview or RIS Report-Writer to create or alter existing templates. up to a maximum of six parameters (wtr_p5). * (The schemas in this list need to be in the same order as they were in DBA_SCHEMA_LIST when the report was originally developed.) the report template will look at the schema in that same position when it is executed.") and places the result into the third parameter (wtr_p2)) These are parameters that can be passed to a report template. and referenced by the literal string "wtr_p0". Example: "-S prj_schema ref_schema". Thus. The correct order is <project schema> <reference schema>.. -S <schema list> -F <database find> [wtr_p0].. the "-o" option can be used.. default file name that they write to.

J: Reports 547 . filename. 2. dba_rpt .the RIS process. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. Information Output: Drawing. 3.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) drawing. Formats information into readable form._ _______________ Appendix J: Project Drawing List (drwlst) Project Drawing List (drwlst) This report lists all drawings currently loaded in the project database. Project Database drwlst (RIS) . drawing_type. found in $EE_NUC/bin. This file: Selects the desired database tables. sheet. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib drwlst template. load_date. and sorts them by sheet name. ref_db. Selects the desired columns from those tables.sheet Associated Software/Files 1.

a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_part. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib mto_rpt template.February 2003 Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_ol_type. ee_tl_subtype. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. ee_out_width. dba_rpt . ee_tl_type. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. 3. ee_out_width. system_name Straight. ee_out_ht_diam. description Fitting. Project Database mto_rpt . 548 . Formats information into readable form. found in $EE_NUC/bin._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_tl_length. ee_ol_type. ee_out_ht_diam. Information Output: System.the RIS process. 2.

ee_part. ee_tl_type. dba_rpt . This file: Selects the desired database tables.the RIS process. ee_tl_subtype. ee_ol_type. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_out_width. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. Project Database rway_bom . used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom template._ _______________ Appendix J: Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. 2. ee_out_width. ee_tl_length. description Fitting. found in $EE_NUC/bin. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. Information Output: Straight. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. Formats information into readable form. ee_ol_type. J: Reports 549 .a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. 3. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_out_ht_diam. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID.

Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. The output is only for a specified volume from the input parameters. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. For instance. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example.February 2003 Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. 550 .

a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_tl_length. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_tl_type. dba_rpt . ee_out_width.the RIS process. ee_part. ee_tl_subtype. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom_vol template. ee_ol_type. Selects the desired columns from those tables. 2. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1.Appendix J: _ _______________ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) Information Output: Straight. description Fitting. ee_out_width. Formats information into readable form. found in $EE_NUC/bin. Project Database rway_bom_vol . J: Reports 551 . ee_out_ht_diam. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. 3. ee_ol_type. This file: Selects the desired database tables.

ee_out_width. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. 2. ee_tl_type.February 2003 Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables whose part id (ee_part) information is blank. 552 . ee_out_ht_diam. Formats information into readable form. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. Information Output: System. 3. ee_tl_length.the RIS process. system_name Straight.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_out_width. ee_part. ee_out_ht_diam. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib blank_ids template. found in $EE_NUC/bin. Project Database blank_ids . dba_rpt . description Fitting. ee_ol_type. ee_ol_type. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Selects the desired columns from those tables. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_tl_subtype.

refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Guide. It can also be used to display information about any existing schemas. and dropping RIS schemas. RIS initiates that particular action by displaying one of the forms defined below. then information about that schema is displayed. If you select one of the schemas in the list. When you select Cancel (X). RIS Schema Manager terminates. 553 . For more detailed information on the RIS Schema Manager. any active secondary forms are erased. and the RIS Schema Manager rereads the risschema file. This form consists of a list of all the schemas known to RIS and several buttons corresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager. When you select Reset. You can access RIS Schema Manager from EE Database Utilities or by clicking Start > Programs > RIS version number > RIS Schema Manager._ _______________ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager Appendix K RIS Schema Manager K: RIS Schema Mgr. changing. If you select any of the buttons. The RIS Schema Manager is a stand-alone utility for creating.

or by choosing a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Schema Information form. You can specify a schema in two ways: either by keying in the schema name in the Schema Name field. with the exception of the Schema Name field.February 2003 Schema Information Form This form is. 554 . It reads information about existing schemas._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . a read only form.

You can enter database-specific information on the Create Schema form using one of three methods: 1. 3. select Run to create the schema. If you select one of the databases. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas for a database. The value you selected originally moves to the bottom of the list. Select the Display Databases button. This form creates new RIS schemas. information about that database is entered into the Create Schema input fields. select one of the Network Protocol fields. A form listing all the known RIS databases is displayed. 555 . If the selected database type requires additional information. Key in all information in the input fields. Selecting the Force button forces the system to create the schema despite corrupted data or other errors it may encounter. This is your only alternative if the schema is created on a database which is unknown to RIS._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Schema Form Create Schema Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. The database-specific information about that schema is entered in the Create Schema input fields. its value will be replaced with the value of the field below it. input fields for that information display. Selecting the Local Machine button fills the Node Address field with the addresses of the local machine. To change the order of the Network Protocol fields. Select an existing schema on the RIS Schema Manager form. Once you have entered all necessary information. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Reset clears all input fields on the form. and corresponds directly to the RIS create schema statement. 2.

You must enter both the original and new passwords to modify the schema password. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. When you have entered all necessary information. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Alter Schema Form This form performs three functions: it modifies the schema password. select Run to alter the schema. enter the new addresses in the Node Address fields. only those gadgets associated with the action are enabled. To select a schema to drop. you need only to enter the new password. This action can also be used to change the order of the fields or to change the order of the protocols. Selecting Run drops the schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . while selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. the user password. and the schema node. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. 556 . either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. To modify the schema node. To select the schema to be altered.February 2003 Drop Schema Form This form drops RIS schemas. Selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. When you select one of these options. To modify the user password.

and displays one of the subforms defined in following sections. and indexes defined for the schema specified in the schema name field. Selecting Reset cancels any subforms. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Data Definition form._ _______________ Appendix K: Data Definition Form Data Definition Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. The form buttons represent the data definition actions of the Schema Manager. then you must enter it before the subforms (Create Table. and whether or not nulls are allowed in the column are displayed for each column in the table. views. If the selected schema requires a password. and Alter Table) will accept input. You can specify a table either by keying in the table name in the Table Name field. This form consists of a list of all the tables. Table Information Form This form displays the definition of the specified table. Drop Table. The column position. A field to search for a specific column is also provided. 557 . and clears the list. Selecting any of these buttons initiates an action. column name. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Table Information form. or by choosing the table from the list on the Data Definition form. column type.

Selecting the Mode Reset button clears the form mode. The column to be dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. column definitions can be modified. The column to be modified must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. This form has two sets of Control buttons. Select Cancel (X) to exit the form. Drop Column. the new column is inserted in front of the chosen column. in the upper right corner of the form. 558 . Select the Mode Run button to modify the column. The Create Table operates in three modes which are represented by the three buttons: Insert Column. The ability to load existing table definitions into the form exists just to provide a template or starting point for a new table. or chosen from the list on the Data Definition form. If the name of an existing table is entered into the Table Name field. If a column is chosen in the table definition list. Select Reset to clear the form. The Create Table form is used only to create new tables.February 2003 Create Table Form This form creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. while choosing the Mode Run button actually causes the action to take place. which behaves as expected. In Insert Column Mode. which is used to execute and reset the different modes of the form. Then there is the second set. There is the usual set._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . It cannot be used to modify existing tables. columns can be dropped from the table definition. referred to as the Mode Control buttons. In Drop Column Mode. In Modify Column Mode. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. Once the table definition is complete. Select the Mode Run button to drop the column. These three buttons place the form in a particular mode. and Modify Column. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. the definition of that table will be loaded into the Create Table form. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list. Select the Mode Run button to insert the column. select Run to create the table. new columns can be added to the table definition. This can be useful when creating several similar tables.

This form behaves in the same way as the RIS Alter Table command. K: RIS Schema Mgr. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. 559 . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. The table to be dropped can be specified by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition form. Alter Table Form This form alters existing tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. It can only append one new column to an existing table._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Table Form Drop Table Form This form drops tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. Selecting Reset clears the form. Once the new column is defined. select Run to alter the table. Selecting Reset clears the form. Selecting Run drops the table.

and it also allows you to specify which RDBMS(s) your schemas can use. Additionally. 560 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Set Form This form allows you to toggle the database mode ANSI setting on and off. Selecting Reset clears the form settings. an error-checking mechanism that ensures that the data EE reads from a remote risschema file is correct. Selecting Reset clears the form.February 2003 Schema File Form This form locates the risschema file that you are using on the network. it provides a Checksum Schema File option. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form.

Although you can use multiple files. If the filename is not a full pathname. The parameters file describes the network address and filename of the schema definition file. Multiple files often result in a large number of inconsistencies. The locate schfile command in the interactive utility can be used to put the appropriate entry in the parameters file. the schema definition file will be created or used on the local machine. O for Oracle. The schema definition file consists of database and schema entries which are associated by a DBID (database ID) key value. and D for DB2 The database name as in the create schema statement. not a name) The name of the schema The database user name The database user password (encrypted) L: Schema Definition NETADDR SCHNAME USR USRPASS 561 . The values found in the create schema option clause. If there is no network address given. the lock file must be replaced manually.2 The network address (must be an address. There can be multiple schema entries for each database entry. The schema file is accessible only if the schema lock file exists. the schema lock file is not replaced as it should be. Currently supported values are X for XNS. D for DNP (DECnet). A line separates entries. The location of the schema definition file must be in the ris/parameters file on the client machine. Here is a description of the fields in the schema definition file: DBID DTYPE DBNAME PARMS PROTOCOL The database ID.LCK extension. I for Ingres. T for TCP/IP. If the lock file does not exist. It is stored in a central location on the network and is used by all RIS client programs to ensure that all RIS clients use the same set of schema definitions. Sometimes when RIS is abnormally terminated. The name of the schema lock file is the same as the schema file with the addition of the . It must be a name or pathname as required by the dbms. currently supported values are X for Informix. referencing the file risschema in the directory where RIS was installed. Access to the schema file is controlled by the presence of another file. it is still advisable to use only one schema file. In these cases. then the schema file is in use. The communication protocol to be used to communicate with the database. RIS will look for the file in the directory where RIS was installed on the given machine. The parameters file is shipped with a default schema definition file specification._ _______________ Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File Appendix L RIS Schema Definition File The RIS schema definition file maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. L for LU6. This file is the schema lock file. a unique key to identify the database The database type.

155 PROTOCOL= NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– DBID=1 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b. The network protocol that RIS uses to get to the IBM machine where the DBMS resides. This value is case-sensitive. The name the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the mode that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine.February 2003 ARCH OS ENV The system architecture that the RIS/DBMS runs on.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129. NET_PROTOCOL RIS_LU or HOST_LU MODE HOST_PROGRAM A schema file must be readable and writable by all users. There are two logical units. The operating system that the RIS/DBMS uses. This value is case-sensitive. This value is case-sensitive. The LU names are generated when RIS is installed. Following is a sample schema definition file: CHECKSUM:1249378903 TIMESTAMP:728930074 ——————————————————————————– DBID=2 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample_ref PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b.2 and the default value is lu6. the CICS transaction name.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129.2. This value is case-sensitive.142. All users must be able to create and delete files in the directory where the schema file is located. the name of the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the logical unit that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. This value is case-sensitive. The name the IBM System Administrator called the RIS server when it was installed on the IBM. The environment that the RIS/DBMS uses.142.135. The valid value is s370 and the default value is s370. The valid value is mvs and the default value is mvs.135. the other on the IBM. one on the Clipper._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .155 PROTOCOL= 562 . The valid value is cics and the default value is cics. The valid value is lu6.

Currently. All these entries are created by the create schema statement.zW%wU5yg)U:IeK9tGB6R@Ezn:˜>’k BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=1 RIS Schema Definition File L: Schema Definition Note that there is a list of protocols in the database entry. If the file is corrupted or removed._ _______________ Appendix L: NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample_ref USR=ee USRPASS=pz_-!=%#oa/#@?%qHt%h&jXJ2vj(tyeY%i)pV BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=2 ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample USR=ee USRPASS=’<j8.H:. they can be recreated by reissuing the create schema statements. This allows for additional protocols in the future. 563 . only the first protocol in the list will be used.

February 2003 564 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

will prompt you to re-enter the password for verification. Once SYS_PASSW_FILE is set. SYS_PASSW_FILE=d:\users\EEpasswd where \users is the path and \EEpasswd is the password file name. the EE Manager form displays: 565 . if you are entering the environment for the first time. M: EE Manager EE Manager will prompt you for a password and. Make sure the directory path to the password file exists. To run EE Manager. For detailed information on setting environment variables. Once you have successfully entered your password. the environment variable SYS_PASSW_FILE must be set to a complete path of a password file. It is a process separate from the EE environment and should only be run by a system manager or by someone who has a working knowledge of the overall EE system._ _______________ Appendix M: EE Manager Appendix M EE Manager EE Manager is an environment created specifically for system manager functions. The password file will be created the first time you enter EE Manager using the file name you specified. see Appendix N. double click on the EE Manager icon to display the Verify Password form.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . It uses DB Access to query and edit tables. and update rows. delete rows.February 2003 The password can be a maximum of 8 characters and is not case sensitive. 566 . In this Appendix Edit Database edits any schema that exists in the RIS dictionary.

select and confirm the Edit database option from the System Manager menu. The number on the button changes to reflect the row. or edit the value displayed in the field. From this screen you can edit the current find criteria._ _______________ Appendix M: Database Edit Functions Database Edit Functions To enter the Database Edit environment. These buttons include various Query functions. and functions which enable you to change. If no find criteria exist. and insert a row or group of rows. Release the mouse button to display the row. To go directly to a certain row. You can place the screen cursor at any point along the slide bar and press <D> to move the slide bar button directly to a new row. A universe is located by selecting Process Query in the Database Edit environment. delete. A group of rows that match the current "query" criteria is called a universe. this command finds all rows in the current table. press and hold the middle button on the mouse and drag the button. Select the arrows to move forward and backward through the rows in the universe. 567 . Process Query — Searches the database to find all rows of the current table that meet the find criteria. Field Descriptions Initialize Query — Initializes (clears) the current find criteria. or load find criteria from a file in the attached library. which allow you to search the database. place the screen cursor on the slide bar button. M: EE Manager Buttons at the bottom of the Database Edit form provide functions for manipulating the attached relational database. save the current find criteria as a file to the attached library. which shows the current find criteria. Edit Query — Displays the Edit Query screen. Current Row — Controls the display of rows in the current universe.

Selecting Add Query puts the screen in Add Query mode. any key-in in the screen menu is added as find criteria and is NOT made as a change in the database. You can toggle individual fields ON or OFF by selecting the field’s corresponding column name on the Database Edit screen. You can either edit the displayed value or select the right side of the field (a small box with dashes). The following are the available relational operators: = != < > <= >= !! : equal to (default) : not equal to : less than : greater than : less than or equal to : greater than or equal to : substring search The AND/OR toggle lets you establish either a logical AND or OR operation. 568 . When you select Update Active. Add Query columns. As long as this command is active._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can also use the Update Active command to enter information for a new row when attaching new linkages in graphics. Update Active — Lets you enter data without changing the displayed row in the database. Add Query — Used with the AND/OR toggle and relational operators to establish find criteria. Fields On/Off — Toggles all column fields ON or OFF. Change All — Changes the value for one or multiple columns for all rows in the current universe. Delete All — Deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon user verification. You can select a relational operator from the list to make it the active relational operator. Fields with these key-in modes are placed only when you customize a screen menu. the Database Edit screen has only Change Row fields.February 2003 Review — Generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe. AND finds any rows that contain both the previous find criteria and any current column value you specify. Multiple column searches are processed in order. which overrides the key-in mode for Key Columns. OR finds any row that contains either the previous find criteria or any current column value you specify. You can generate a review for all rows with database linkages to graphic elements within a fenced area in a design file. and Update Active fields. A box containing a list of the various relational operators displays. Relational Operators let you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than. When you are certain the data is correct. You can use the Update Active command to enter the column values you want for a row and then Insert Row to create a row with the displayed information. you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database. with logical AND having precedence over logical OR. Insert Row will not create a new row if a column is a SERIAL column (INFORMIX) or if it has a UNIQUE INDEX and a displayed column value duplicates the value for an existing row. Insert Row — Inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. The field under the AND/OR toggle lets you edit the active relational operator. you can use the Insert Row command to add the displayed data as a row to the database. Change Row — Activates the Change Row mode. By default.

_ _______________ Appendix M: Delete Row — Deletes the displayed row from the database upon user verification. Database Edit Functions M: EE Manager 569 .

February 2003 570 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Variable — The field next to this label displays the Environment Variable name when any row is selected in the list menu.cfg is located. Reset — The Reset button writes the contents of the ee. Field Descriptions Enter the EE File Name — The field below this label contains the complete path and filename where the current configuration file ee.cfg file. Value — The field next to this label displays the value of the Environment Variable when any row is selected in the list menu. 571 ._ _______________ Appendix N: EE Configure Appendix N EE Configure EE Configure is a process created specifically for setting environment variables for EE Raceway on a Windows NT platform. Descrip — The field next to this label displays the description associated with the selected Environment Variable. Delete — The Delete button deletes the corresponding variable and its value from the list. This process is separate from EE Environment and allows changes to the value of a variable in the ee. Set — The Set button writes the corresponding variable and its value to the list. Double-click on the EE Config icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. N: EE Configure User Environment Variables — The list below this label contains the list of all the environment variables along with their path.cfg file to the list.

if any. click on OK to accept the changes and to overwrite the ee. click on the Delete button.cfg file. Click on the Set button to accept the new value. This same field can be used to add a new variable. Click on Cancel to disregard any changes. continue the same process as above.February 2003 Browse — The Browse button lets you select the required ee. the Configure EE Environment form displays the list of user environment variables and their corresponding value. appears in the Descrip field. 5._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4. To delete the variable. 6.cfg file. The description. Steps 1. Select the environment variable you want to change from the User Environment Variables list. 8. 572 . The corresponding value of the environment variable appears in the Value field. 2. The variable will no longer appear in the User Environment Variables list. The User Environment Variables list now contains the new value for this variable. The name of the environment variable appears in the Variable field. To edit the values of other variables. 3. 7. When complete. Edit the entry in the Value field. Double click on the EE Configure icon.

beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. it controls the message fields. A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations. the menus. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field. active depth Glossary active process application software batch processing batch queue branch point cancel button N: EE Configure cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group._ _______________ Glossary absolute path name The sequence of directories. character client column command confirm button 573 . In network operations. A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. or channel for moving requests. An attribute of a database table. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel. A group of columns defines a table in a database. A queue. A branch point allows for placement of branch components. NFS. unlike system software which runs other software. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu. A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. See also path name and relative path name. Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). All network operations (database. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. Software designed to meet specific needs. created through NQS. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option. and the keyboard. and then manipulated as individual elements.

A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube. interpreted. coordinates core files cursor data button data entry field data point database database table default delete delimiter device 574 . Normally. that is. and Z axes of the design cube. bus errors. identify and accept elements. The image files written by System V for a number of reasons. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. to accept previously selected elements. To remove. An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. for example. For example. or Z axis. and floppy disk. and user-generated quit signals. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area.0. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points. disk drive. a component onto which a user cannot log. A separating mark or space. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated. you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere.February 2003 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. and to select commands from forms and menus. Also known as key-in field. or erase. illegal instructions. or processed by a specific program. the most common of which are memory violations._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. place elements. and activate windows and perform window manipulations. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system.0. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. A nonaddressable component of a network. tape drive. Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar. Y. Y. and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder. though this is not required. eliminate. whereby points are located by traversing the X. destroy. The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0.

A pictorial representation or image. A relational database management system supported by RIS. that responds to information. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. or positive. An object (project. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives. A relational database management system supported by RIS.) of interest about which information is stored. a list of the data available for that field is displayed. Glossary A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field. a symbol that graphically identifies a command. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east. domain dragging easting entity envelope file file specification filename form full path name N: EE Configure gadget A portion of a form. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. difference in longitude. a field. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands._ _______________ directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas. drawing. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. and so forth. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. including the file name. Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS. A path name that tells the system where to locate a file. element. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information. or a checklist. When selected. such as a button. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. See also relative path name. See interference envelope. header hierarchy icon Informix Ingres interference envelope 575 . a relational database table. you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation.

or it can mean the connected system. the Current Command field. Also known as a data entry field. or alias. to which you can snap._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations.February 2003 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured. A graphic representation or schema. key key-in field keypoint keyword menubar message area model network NFS node node address node name northing 576 . A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. and the Key-in field. including vertices. An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. A point on an element. a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file. that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. the Prompt field. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control. A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. Network File System. It is divided into the Command Status field. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system. A name. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network.

A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane. A relational database management system supported by RIS. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to the resources. RDB reference database relative path name rotate 577 . See also path name and absolute path name. NQS Glossary Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view parameter path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. and z-axes intersect. the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues. but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary. In coordinate geometry. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance. but is level. y. Network Queuing System. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. See also absolute path name and relative path name. the point where the x. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response. label descriptions. A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes. or indicate a specific point in the design file. To turn. Reference Database. commodity libraries. having no elevations or depressions. graphics symbology. vendor’s catalog data. and is three-dimensional. to change the angular orientation._ _______________ nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping. The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. job specifications. The point at which the coordinate system is placed. The sequence of directories leading to a file. path name PDS pipe queue N: EE Configure place data point plane To identify a specific element. report formats and other information of a similar manner.

The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes. One collection of column values for a table.February 2003 row A unit of related information in a table.z). NFS. that are stored in an attribute. A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. and weight. y. solid. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type.y. to change between two alternatives. modifying. The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor. including color. Language developed by IBM for creating. Data. generally represented as a line. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. The software uses virtual memory to store data. Views are created with their own x. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction. See also active depth. rubberbanding schema schema file server Structured Query Language SQL style surface symbology table toggle user name values variable vector view virtual memory 578 . A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. style. dash-dot. while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you. either entered by the user or determined by the software. All network operations (database. This means that unneeded files and data. The defined area of vision on a screen.y plane of the view is parallel to the screen. A name that provides access to an account on the system. The x. the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. To switch. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computer’s internal memory. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. and z axes. The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube. A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. In network operations. The display style of an element. and so forth. the software can perform processing more quickly. Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data. A collection of data for quick reference. and querying relational databases. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. stay on the disk until they are called for.

_ _______________ working directory The directory from which you are accessing files. Glossary N: EE Configure 579 .

February 2003 580 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

415. 234 override button 180._ _______________ Index A access column 179. 539 alter schema form 556 table form 559 angle active 256 annotate element 178 access column 179. 234 model 285 one-line 178. 233 RCP 178 annot_form 529 application manager information 27. 290 activate design volume coordinate system 320 plant coordinate system 320 active angle 256 one-line type parameters access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 save to memory 289 select 290 parameters 146 point coordinates display 121 define 145 active coordinate system 320 add query 568 systems 245 airway place 132 alias. 234 by group 233 clear button 180. 234. 425 approval status codelist 432 archive form 46 option 86 archive project network protocol TCP/XNS 46 remote node name/address 46 asid id display 316 highlight 309 assign 522. 235 display toggle 179. 550 bin/ 521. 527 attributes default 430 setting raceway 256 automatic fit 151 propagation 298 size 151 B background 522 bar commands palette 98 basic concepts database 115 drawing 108 propagation 113 setup 27. 110 workstation skills 26 batch 522 bill of materials 549 by volume 72. 234 select button 180. 527 blank part ids 552 C cable code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 Index N: EE Configure 581 . 234 list column 179.cmd 529. 327. 235 source column 179. 235 override keys 179. 109.

February 2003 cable (continued) size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 cardinal point codelist 433 cell create commands 269 drop point 277. 275. 235 one-line type parameters 291 clip 522 clone element 188 by group 239 codelists 432 approval status 432 cardinal point 433 drawing type 433 manual fitting 433 one-line type 434 RCP type 435 system 435 three-line qualifier 437 subtype 437 type 436 units 438 vendor 438 wire/cable code 439 color 441 configuration 440 insulation type 444 voltage 443 codelists (continued) wire/cable size 440 yes/no 445 coincident RCP checks 209 color parameters 256 combine coincident RCPs 209 command palettes 97 command. 271 cfg/ 527 change all 568 row 568 change system parameters 221 changing one-line type 294 parameters one-line type 289 propagation 297 raceway 256 symbology 264 system 295 cleanup database 340 clear annotate element 180. 276 model 271 library 269._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .msg 529 commands construct point 123 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 Commands Integrated 368 compile eden symbol 349 compress eden symbol library 359 conduit place 132 place stub up 167 seamless tubing 114 sizing 155 attributes 268 config/ 522. 278. 279 equipment pointer 274. 527 construct point 123 construction class display 306 control number 165 set symbology 262 symbology 264 coordinate system design volume 320 plant 320 show active 320 coordinate system 320 coordinates display 121 copy clone element 188 by group 239 element 184 by group 231 menu 43 option 78 582 .

275. 527 database 321. 332 batch file 335 palette 102 procedures 427 project 115 reference 115 relational 427 report 326 rule checks 329 setup 33 database (continued) utilities 50 RIS schema utilities 51 update project schema 52 update reference schema 55 db/ 523. 279 equipment pointer 274. 522 cross section ductbank definition 164 rotate 140 rotation angle 256 scale factor 256 crosses 195 cutback mode 150 D data definition form 557 files 522. 276 model 271 menu 39 option 61 schema form 555 tables 558 drop mode 558 insert mode 558 modify mode 558 three-lines 194 create_db 428._ _______________ create cell 269 drop point 277. 278. 528 dba_rpt 522 dba_shell 522 DbEdit 567 defaults attributes 430 raceway 256 RCP key 257 text 266 define active point 145 duct cross section 164 group 226 one-line type 260 parameters 146 raceway defaults 256 system 258 delete all 568 duplicate one-lines 211 eden symbol 351 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 menu 44 one-line vertex 217 option 79 RCP 214 design commands 129 conduit sizing 155 define duct cross section 164 file command menu bar 96 insert one-line vertex 160 insert RCP 138 option 63 palette 99 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 manual fitting 147 one-line 132 rotate cross section 140 route around vessel 135 set Index N: EE Configure 583 . 425 cleanup 340 edit 567 add query 568 change all 568 change row 568 current row box 567 delete all 568 edit query 567 initialize query 567 insert row 568 process query 567 review 568 toggle 568 update active 568 load 323.

279 keys 431 place 142 schema form 556 table form 559 ductbank cross section definition 164 place 132 duplicate one-line checking 211 DVCS 320 E eden/ 528 eden example 514 list functions 355 mode 113 eden (continued) option 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 347 compile symbol 349 compress symbol library 359 delete symbol 351 edit symbol file 366 extract symbol 361 extract user function 363 list symbol library 353 list user functions 355 merge symbol libraries 357 symbol compile 349 compress library 359 delete 351 edit file 366 extract 361 generation 513 list library 353 merge libraries 357 processor file 513 user function extract 363 eden. 278._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 234 one-line type parameters 290 document organization 19 outline 25 purpose 19 downloading 29 drawing process 108 setup 110 type codelist table 433 drop point create cell 277.February 2003 design (continued) set (continued) active parameters 146 unload 336 design volume coordinate system 320 dgn/ 528 directory structure 520 display annotation 306 asid id 316 construction class 306 element information 301 element type 316 field 121 link 317 one-line type 318 screen 93 sector/word 315 system 318 toggle annotate element 179.dat 528 edit eden symbol file 366 manual fitting 198 model annotation 285 query 567 EE configure 571 databases 425 environment 35 forms archive 46 restore 48 manager 565 menus 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 nucleus file structure 520 raceway file structure 524 584 .

84. 79. 81. 80. 527 eden symbol processor 513 password 565 purge 81 rway._ _______________ ee. 275.bar 529 eeconfig 522 eemgr 522 eeprj 522 eeqpr 522 EERWAY command menu bar 96 environment 59 create 61 design 63 eden 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 reports 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75. 86. 78. 87. 89 palette 97 palettes 97 elbows 195 elements annotate 178 by group 233 clone 188 by group 239 copy 184 by group 231 delete 212 by group 251 display information 301 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 identifying 103 modify commands 173 modifying 175 move 186 placing 129 propagate 194 by group 241 type display 316 engineering units 267 enter menu 40 environment EE 35 EE Raceway 59 variables 422 environment rules for fittings 446 environments graphics palettes 97 equipment pointer create 274.msg 529 errors messages 377 propagation 314 extend/reduce run 125 extract eden symbol from library 361 eden user function from library 363 F field routed raceway 161 filename highlight asid id 309 highlight link 312 files data 522. 83. 82.cmd 543 seed English 528 metric 528 structure EE nucleus 520 EE raceway 524 fittings 195. 276 keys 431 place 144 error. 512 delete 216 edit/insert manual fitting 198 environment rules 446 place by rule 207 by group 243 place manual fitting 147 floppy/network toggle 86 Index N: EE Configure 585 .

290 eden symbol library 353 user functions 355 load 527 database 323. 361 eden user function 363 eden user functions 355 link display 317 highlight 312 list column 179. 271 eden symbol 353. 234. 119 keys 430 drop point 431 equipment pointer 431 one-line 430 override 115 RCP 431 L levels set active 299 library cell 269. 332 batch file 335 lock model 282 M main form EE archive 46 restore 48 586 . 357. 567 input precision 119 insert one-line vertex 160 RCP 138 row 568 installation 27 databases 33 downloading 29 Integrated Commands 368 palette 97 Using 369 interference detection 118. 344 introduction 25 J joints minimize 219 by group 248 K key-ins precision 104._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 359. 264.February 2003 force 555 forms/ 523 forms maximize/minimize 120 precision input customizing 417 function eden library 355 G graphic symbology 262.hp 528 help_rway. 342. 266 graphics environment palettes 97 group annotate 233 copy 231 define 226 delete 251 minimize joints 248 propagate 241 H help_graphics 528 help_rway.s 528 help_source/ 528 highlight element by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 horizontal spacing 165 I identifying elements 103 IGDS toggle 83 increase size only 157 increase/decrease size 157 information about elements 301 initialize query 157.

_ _______________ main menu EE 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 EERWAY create 61 design 63 eden 67 processes 64 report 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75 manual fitting edit/insert 198 part codelist table 433 place 147 material takeoff 548 maximize form 120 menu. 529 mslink display 317 highlight 312 Index N: EE Configure 587 .sh 522 msg/ 523.cfg 527 menus 91 command menu bar 96 directory 528 EERWAY command menu bar 96 menu_shell 522 merge eden symbol libraries 357 merge_pnl/ 529 merge_pnl 529 messages display fields 93 error 377 MicroMenu umenu 543 midpoint on segment 123 minimize form 120 minimize joints 219 by group 248 model annotate 285 move annotation 283 commands 280 using 281 create model cell 271 lock 282 unlock 284 model commands palette 101 modify 173 add systems by group 245 annotate element 178 by group 233 clone element 188 by group 239 combine coincident RCPs 209 copy element 184 by group 231 define group 226 delete duplicate one-lines 211 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 edit/insert manual fitting 198 elements 175 group commands 223 define group 226 minimize joints 219 by group 248 move element 186 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 one-line route 204 palette 99 place fitting by rule 207 by group 243 propagate element 194 by group 241 reference schema 451 remove RCP 214 replace systems by group 246 modify element palette 98 modify group palette 100 move element 186 model annotation 283 move/move to toggle 121 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 mscrecol.

February 2003 msseed. 234. 48. 179. 55 file 565 PCS 320 PDS reference model from 372 review attributes 371 review clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 percent fill 157 percentage of raceway changing 221 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 field routed raceway 161 fitting by rule 207 by group 243 manual fitting 147 588 .s 528 N network/floppy toggle 86 new users database preparation 427 nucleus file structure 520 O one-line annotate 233 changing sizes 178. 290 one-line type parameters 291 setting 263 P palettes bar commands 98 database 102 design 99 EERWAY 97 Integrated Commands 97 MicroStation commands 98 model commands 101 modify 99 modify element 98 modify group 100 runtime setup 101 setup commands 100 utilities 102 parameters active 111 active angle 256 color 256 one-line type 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 propagation 297 raceway 256 set active 146._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .hp 528 mstr_rway. 235 keys 115. 233 delete duplicates 211 vertex 217 insert vertex 160 keys 430 modify route 204 move segment 190 move vertex 192 place 132 route around vessel 135 type codelist table 434 define 260 display 318 parameters 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 priority 434 set active 294 types 110 output option 89 override button annotate element 180. 289 part verification 297 password echo toggle 46. 52.dgn 528 mstr_rway.

527 receive option 84 reduce run 125 reducers 195 reeprj 522 reference database 115 schema description 454 guide 25 schema 510 description 430 modifying 451 updating 449 Index N: EE Configure 589 . 527 project database 115 schema description 487 drawing list 547 schema general description 448 update 449 prompt.dat 522. 344 load database 332 batch file 335 option 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 unload design 336 sheet 338 processing toggle 53._ _______________ place (continued) one-line 112. 536 priority 434 procedures 107 process query 157.dat 528. 297 sketch 113. 527 product. 533 processes 331 cleanup database 340 eden 347 interference detection 342. 65 processor file 513 product menu 42 removal 521. 567 process.def 521. 55. 132 RCP 138 stub up 167 placepoint 150 plant coordinate system 320 precision input 119 active point coordinates display 121 construct point 123 customizing 417 display fields 121 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 move/move to toggle 121 key-ins 104 prerequisite 26 print. 297 parameters 111 part verification 297 setup 297 style 297 purge option 81 Q query add 568 edit 567 initialize 567 process 567 R raceway defaults set 256 field routed 161 processes 331 RCPs 112 combine coincident RCPs 209 default key 257 delete 214 insert 138 keys 431 type codelist table 435 weight 257 README 521.msg 529 propagate 113 automatic propagation 298 element 194 by group 241 fittings 195 highlight errors 314 modes 297 eden 113.

cmds 528 rwayh_pnl 529 rway.sym 529 rway_prj. 550 blank part ids 552 database 326 directory 529 material takeoff 548 option 70 project drawing list 547 templates 546 restore form 48 option 87 restore project from archive TCP/XNS toggle 48 XNS/TCP toggle 48 review PDS attributes 371 PDS clash 375 RIS 115.pnl 529 rwaypnl. 487 drop 556 file 560 590 . 327. 527 rename option 82 replace systems by group 246 report. 534 reports 117. 535 runs 112 runtime setup 287 display element information 301 palette 101 propagation setup 297 set active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 system 295 rway_bar 528 rwaybar.tbl 529 rway_ref._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 reference PDS model 372 relational databases 427 interface system (RIS) 426 report processing 545 relational interface system (RIS) alter schema 556 alter table 559 data definition 557 drop schema 556 drop table 559 schema creation 555 schema file 560 set 560 table creation 558 table information 557 remove one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 script 521.tbl 529 S save to memory 289 scale factor cross section 256 schema 115 create 555 definition file 561 fields 561 description 454.sym 529 rway. 545 bill of materials 549 by volume 72.cmd file 543 rway. 426 procedures 427 schema manager 553 alter schema form 556 alter table form 559 create schema form 555 create table form 558 data definition form 557 RIS (continued) schema manager (continued) drop schema form 556 drop table form 559 force 555 schema file form 560 schema information form 554 set form 560 table information form 557 schema utilities 51 rotate cross section 140 orientation 151 rotation angle cross section 256 rule checks database 329 option 73 templates 546 rule_chk.dat 528.dat 528.

109 unlock model 284 setup commands palette 100 sheet unload 338 show active coordinate system 320 size changing one-line size 178.dgn 528 select button annotate element 180. 234 SPEC process 507 specification 507 specification tables 510 start-up sequence 92 status.msg 529 straights 195 structure EE Raceway 524 file 520 stub up 167 subsystems 295 sym/ 523. 529 symbol eden compile 349 compress 359 delete 351 extract 361 list library 353 merge libraries 357 file edit eden 366 generation 513 example 514 processor file 513 symbology 110 changing 264 control 264 Index N: EE Configure 591 . 449 project 449 reference 449 utilities 51 screen display 93 seamless tubing 114 sector/word display 315 highlight 307 seed/ 528 seed. 233 sizing conduit 155 sizing attributes 268 sketch mode 113 skills workstation 26 software downloading 29 source column 179._ _______________ schema (continued) information form 554 modifying reference 451 names 450 project 448 reference 430 update 428. 235 one-line type parameters 290 send option 83 set 560 active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 parameters 146 point 145 system 295 conduit sizing attributes 268 defaults 256 symbology control 262 text defaults 266 setup commands 253 conduit sizing attributes 268 create cell 269 define one-line type 260 system 258 lock model 282 model 280 model annotation 285 move 283 propagation 297 set raceway defaults 256 symbology control 262 setup (continued) set (continued) text defaults 266 symbology control 264 system manager 27.

unl files 509 unload 527 design 336 sheet 338 unlock model 284 update active 568 schema 428._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 55 processing 53. 65 tools reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 review PDS clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 tray place 132 tray_part table 511 tray_spec table 510 typefaces 21 U umenu 543 undelete 80 units codelist table 438 engineering 267 working 104 . 109. 425 replace systems group 246 set active 295 system percentage changing 221 T tables codelists 432 information form 557 TCP/XNS protocol archive project 46 TCP/XNS toggle restore project from archive 48 templates reports 546 rule checks 546 text defaults 266 set 266 text nodes 266 text strings 266 nodes 266 strings 266 three-line codelist table 436 create 194 qualifier codelist table 437 subtype codelist table 437 tmp/ 529 toggle construction display on/off 306 IGDS 83 network/floppy 86 password echo 46. 52. 449 project 52. 48.February 2003 symbology (continued) control (continued) set 262 system 110. 55. 449 reference 55. 449 upgrading workstation 28 user function eden extract 363 utilities 303 display element type and asid id 316 link 317 sector/word 315 system and one-line type 318 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 option 75 archive 86 copy 78 delete 79 output 89 purge 81 receive 84 rename 82 restore 87 send 83 undelete 80 palette 102 reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 592 . 415. 295 add 245 codelist table 435 define 258 display 318 manager information 27.

_ _______________ utilities (continued) review PDS clash 375 schema 51 toggle construction display on/off 306 window to named PDS item 374 V vendor codelist table 438 specification 507 vertical spacing 165 vessel routing around 135 volume bill of materials 72. 327. 110 symbology 110 systems 110 working units 104 workstation skills 26 upgrading 28 wyes 195 X XNS/TCP toggle archive project 46 Index N: EE Configure 593 . 550 W weight RCP 257 window to named PDS item 374 wire code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 wireway place 132 workflow 107 databases 115 drawing process 108 drawing setup 110 eden symbol generation 513 one-line types 110 parameters 111 place one-line 112 propagation 113 propagation parameters 111 reports 117 setup 109.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 594 .

** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005B. .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200005C For PDS version 07.02.00.

.........................................................................................................................3) .............. 599 Utilities ............................... 617 Rotate Group......................................................................................................................................................EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Table of Contents PDS Electrical Raceway Environment ................................... 611 Mirror Element ..........4)...... 619 Rotate Copy Group ........................................... 598 Load Reference Schema ........... 633 EE Nucleus File Structure .... 625 Move Group......... 609 Rotate Copy Element................................................................................................................. 623 Mirror Copy Group............... 602 Modify Element Commands (replaces 9................................................................2) .............................................................................................................. 637 596 ................................................................................................................ 631 EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) ........................................................................................................................................................2)................................................................ 629 EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) ................................................................................ 601 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5................... 613 Mirror Copy Element............................................................................................. 597 Modeling........................................................................................... 607 Rotate Element............................................................................................................................. 634 EE Raceway File Structure................... 621 Mirror Group ........................................................................................................................... 615 Modify Group Commands (replaces 9............................................................................................................................................. 627 Annotate Model................................................................................................................................................................................................... 628 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16...........................................

PDS Electrical Raceway Environment When you select the Electrical Raceway Environment command on the PD_Shell form. Utilities – Allows you to access EE Raceway commands for EE Raceway processes. 597 . Commands Modeling – Allows you to open a design file in the PDS Raceway modeling environment. Load Reference Schema – Allows you to update the Raceway reference schema. the EE Raceway Environment form displays. EDEN symbols. reporting. and rule checks.

Steps 1. Select a design area from the list.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Modeling This option allows you to select a design file to open in the modeling environment. The Raceway Designer form displays. 2. Click Accept. 4. 598 . The selected model displays in MicroStation. Select a model from the list. 3. Click Accept.

or to modify the tables in an existing RIS schema to conform to the structure of a given . The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition. — Load those tables that have unique index numbers with data from the . You can use this command to update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information. CMD File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the CMD file that defines which .unl files that are listed in the .Load Reference Schema This option allows you to update the reference schema for the active project.sql file. SQL File Path – Specifies the file path of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. SQL File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.sql file that has a different structure from the original .unl files to load into which tables. keeping column data where column names match. — Modifies existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the .sql file. the process loads it only if the table is empty. If a table lacks a unique index.sql file. 599 . Field Descriptions Reference Schema – Specifies the reference schema for the active project. the command makes the following changes: — Adds new tables listed in the .sql file.cmd files. SQL Filename – Specifies the file name of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. If you update the schema with a .

CMD Filename – Specifies the file name of the CMD file that defines which . 600 .unl files to load into which tables.unl files to load into which tables.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 CMD File Path – Specifies the file path of the CMD file that defines which .

Refer to sections 4 and 14 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Report. Rule – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. EDEN.Utilities This option accesses the EE Raceway Process. and Rule commands. Commands Process – This command accesses all available EE Raceway processes. Refer to section 4 and Appendix J of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Refer to sections 4 and 15 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Report – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. EDEN – This command allows you to design and maintain your own symbols for Raceway elements. These reports contain information on the project and reference databases. 601 . These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. Refer to section 5 and Appendix J for more information on this command.

EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. and Mirror Copy commands on the Modify Element and Modify Group palettes • Move Group command on the Modify Group palette See the following text for details.1 version of the document).4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 103-108 in the PDS 7. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. Mirror. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Rotate Copy. The following information has been modified: Rotate. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. 602 . • This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5.

then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. then selecting Palette. 603 . or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu. This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation.Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.

Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. 604 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu. then selecting Modify from the resulting menu.

then selecting Palette. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. then selecting Modify Group Commands. 605 .

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. then selecting Palette. Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. 606 .

to review or edit element annotation. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. then selecting Palette. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate one-lines in your raceway model. You can use individual commands to move. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. onelines.Modify Element Commands (replaces 9. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. Mirror. 607 . and so forth). Annotate Element — Places. The following information has been modified: Rotate.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 181-182 in the PDS 7. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. and delete specified elements. and three-lines. including RCPs. copy. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. then selecting Modify Element Commands. reviews. within the design file. three-lines. and Mirror Copy commands See the following text for details.1 version of the document). Rotate Copy. annotation. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. • The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file.

Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. and elements associated with it. Rotate Copy Element — Copies an element and rotates the copy to a specified location in the design file. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. Mirror Copy Element — Copies an element and flips the copy about a specified point in the design file. 608 . Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Rotate Element — Rotates an element to a specified location in the design file. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. from the design file. Mirror Element — Flips an element about a specified point in the design file. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element.

and annotation. three-line fittings. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. equipment pointers. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. You can use this command to move one-lines. If an RCP is rotated. see Precision Input Form. All associated annotation. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. drop points. reject input. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. and equipment pointers will also be moved.Rotate Element This command rotates individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. accept input. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. you can locate elements. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. route one-lines. Using the form. 609 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. three-line fittings. and exit a command. For detailed information about precision input. RCPs. To change the angle. All associated annotation. If a one-line is rotated. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field.

The system highlights the specified element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The element rotates to the specified position. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. 5. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The Specify Rotation form displays. 3. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Click Accept. Identify the element you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select the Rotate Element command. The Rotate Element precision input form displays. the system displays the message Element not found. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. Steps 1. 2. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 610 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. 4.

To change the angle. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. route one-lines. At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.Rotate Copy Element This command creates rotated copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. and exit a command. You can use this command to copy and rotate one-lines and their associated elements. see Precision Input Form. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. Using the form. accept input. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. 611 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane.

The element copy displays at the specified position. 4. The system highlights the specified element. 612 . Identify the element you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Select the Rotate Copy Element command.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Steps 1. 5. Click Accept. the system displays the message Element not found. 3. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The Rotate Copy Element precision input form displays. 2. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. The Specify Rotation form displays.

About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. and annotation. If an RCP is rotated. reset a command action. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. All associated annotation. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. equipment pointers. For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. toggle among the three axes (Primary. select the field and type a new angle. You can use this command to mirror one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If a one-line is mirrored. To change the displayed angle. three-line fittings. route one-lines. and equipment pointers will also be moved. see Precision Input Form. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. At any point during this operating sequence. three-line fittings. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. you can locate elements. and equipment pointers will also be moved. RCPs. All associated annotation. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. reject input. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. To reset a 613 . accept input.Mirror Element This command flips individual raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. drop points. To change the displayed axis. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Secondary.

If you do not locate an acceptable element. Select the Mirror Element command. 4. Identify the element you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. 2. 3. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 5. Steps 1. Click Accept. The element rotates to the specified position. Specify the point about which to mirror the element. 614 . The Mirror Element precision input form displays. The Orient Mirror form displays. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the element. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The system highlights the specified element. the system displays the message Element not found. The message disappears when you identify a valid element.

Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. Steps 1. accept input. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. select the field and type a new angle. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. You can use this command to copy and mirror one-lines and their associated elements. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Secondary. 615 . Select the Mirror Copy Element command. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Using the form. and exit a command. reject input. The Mirror Copy Element precision input form displays. To change the displayed axis. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. To change the displayed angle. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point.Mirror Copy Element This command creates mirrored copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. toggle among the three axes (Primary. For detailed information about precision input. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. reset a command action.

3. 616 . Identify the element you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. 4. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. The Orient Mirror form displays. Click Accept. Specify the plane on which to mirror the element. 5. The system highlights the specified element. the system displays the message Element not found. The element copy displays at the specified position. Specify the point around which to mirror the element.

Mirror. and delete elements of specified groups. and to review or edit element annotation. then selecting Modify Group Commands. • The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. You can use individual Modify Group commands to move.1 version of the document). You can also propagate onelines in a particular group using these commands. and so forth). The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. 617 . and Move Group commands See the following text for details. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. annotation. The following information has been modified: Rotate. Mirror Copy. Rotate Copy.3) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 229-230 in the PDS 7.Modify Group Commands (replaces 9. three-lines. copy. then selecting Palette. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model.

Rotate Copy Group – Copies and rotates some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. reviews. Mirror Copy Group – Copies and mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. Mirror Group – Mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. 618 . Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Topics Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. Rotate Group – Rotates some or all elements of a specified group to a new location in the design file. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Annotate Element by Group — Places. Move Group – Moves some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group.

and annotation. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. route one-lines. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. equipment pointers. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. accept input. All associated annotation. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. To change the angle. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. three-line fittings. and exit a command.Rotate Group This command rotates a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Using the form. 619 . Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. All associated annotation. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. drop points. If a one-line is rotated. You can use this command to move one-lines. you can locate elements. RCPs. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. If an RCP is rotated. three-line fittings. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. reject input. and equipment pointers will also be moved.

620 . Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. Steps 1. Click Accept. The system highlights the specified group. 5. 4. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. If you do not locate an acceptable group. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. The Specify Rotation form displays. For groups in Single Element mode. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The Rotate Group precision input form displays.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. Identify the group you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. 2. Select the Rotate Group command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the system displays the message Group not found. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 3. The group rotates to the specified position.

Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. Using the form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 621 . At any point during this operating sequence. reject input. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Steps 1. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane.Rotate Copy Group This command creates a rotated copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. Select the Rotate Copy Group command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can locate elements. To change the angle. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. and exit a command. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. accept input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Precision Input Form. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane.

622 . If you do not locate an acceptable group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. 4. The Specify Rotation form displays.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 The Rotate Copy Group precision input form displays. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. Click Accept. The group copy displays at the specified position. the system displays the message Group not found. For groups in Single Element mode. 2. The system highlights the specified group. 3. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. Identify the group you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. 5. The message disappears when you identify a valid group.

It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. and equipment pointers will also be moved. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. If an RCP is rotated. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. All associated annotation. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. All associated annotation. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. accept input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To change the displayed axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. route one-lines. To reset a 623 .Mirror Group This command flips a group of raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. Using the form. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. select the field and type a new angle. toggle among the three axes (Primary. and exit a command. If one-lines are mirrored. three-line fittings. Secondary. To change the displayed angle. three-line fittings. reset a command action. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal.

624 . The Orient Mirror form displays. The system highlights the specified group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. Identify the group you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. The group moves to the specified position. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 3. 5. the system displays the message Group not found. For groups in Single Element mode. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. 2. Specify the point about which to mirror the group. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the group. Select the Mirror Group command. Steps 1. 4. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Mirror Group precision input form displays. Click Accept.

Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. see Precision Input Form. Steps 1. Secondary. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. and exit a command. select the field and type a new angle. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. 625 . reset a command action. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. route one-lines. accept input. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements. Select the Mirror Copy Group command. Using the form. To change the displayed axis. The Mirror Copy Group precision input form displays. For detailed information about precision input. To change the displayed angle. toggle among the three axes (Primary. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.Mirror Copy Group This command creates a mirrored copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis.

The message disappears when you identify a valid group. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. Specify the plane on which to mirror the group. the system displays the message Group not found. The group copy displays at the specified position. 4. Click Accept. 3. 5. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. Identify the group you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. The Orient Mirror form displays.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. For groups in Single Element mode. 626 . Specify the point around which to mirror the group. The system highlights the specified group.

Steps 1. The Move Group precision input form displays. Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. route one-lines. If you do not locate an acceptable group. accept input. 4. the system displays the message Group not found. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. Specify an origin point from which to move the group. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 2. 627 . For detailed information about precision input. Specify a placement point to which to move the group.Move Group This command moves a group of raceway elements to a new location in the design file. The group moves to the specified position. 3. Select the Move Group command. Identify the group you intend to move and accept it with <D>. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. The system highlights the specified group. and exit a command.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Annotate Model Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (p. Select the Annotate Model command. If the user does not specify a sheet number. 285 in the PDS 7. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. The following information has been modified: Automatic sheet number See the following text for details. The Annotate Element form displays. will prevent such duplication. 4. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. Steps 1.1 version of the document). • This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. 628 . If you want to display the annotation in the model. however.dgn file name of the raceway model. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. 3. Select Confirm to accept the new annotation. If you toggled Display to On. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. The Load Database process. 2. —OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. the sheet number is automatically set to match the .

and Locate toggles See the following text for details.Reference PDS Model (replaces 16.1 version of the document). then. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 372-373 in the PDS 7. then. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. click Attach. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. The following information has been modified: Display. Snap. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. 629 . click Attach.

Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. Attach – Attaches a reference model. or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. Snap.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. 630 . Snap.

Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 631 . and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. PROJECT_LOCATION.exe utility in the \eenuc\bin folder to add the new pds_east.1 version of the document). use EE Configure to verify that values are set for EERD_TBLS. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 487 and 500 in the PDS 7. it is necessary to use the ee72upg. The following information has been modified: PDS coordinates in Panel table • Note about ee72upg.exe file See the following text for details. panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. Before running the upgrade utility. • This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. and EE_SCHEMA. Note: For project databases created with EE Raceway versions prior to 7. and pds_elev columns to the panel and msconfig tables of the existing project database. pds_north. Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name.2.

pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 pds_east pds_north pds_elev real real real no no no yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment. ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. 632 . ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table.

It also describes the contents of directories and some files. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to /win32app/ingr/.1 version of the document). The following information has been modified: Windows folder listings replace CLIX directory structure See the following text for details. By default. It identifies those files you can modify.EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 529-540 in the PDS 7. 633 . The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. • This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway.

The product may reside on any file system. The following files exist under the .\eenuc directory: \eenuc \eenuc\bin \eenuc\data \eenuc\db \eenuc\doc \eenuc\font \eenuc\forms 634 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line.. EE Nucleus will reside under the win32app\ingr\eenuc directory. The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation.

bin – contains the EE executable files and the environment process. problems. comments. — remove.exe – command used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. eenuc — readme. INFORMIX. — EEnotice. etc. — .txt – file containing description of product features and any fixes. The files are grouped by directory. EE Nucleus.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background.txt– copyright notice file. and EE Raceway.\eenuc\help \eenuc\msg \eenuc\share \eenuc\sym The following list gives a brief description of some of the files.txt – File containing release notices. — create_db – create database process. — dba_shell. The EE executable files set up variables specifying the location of MicroStation. and then invokes the EE environment. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. 635 . — license.cmd – command executed around dba_rpt.

— eeprj. — print.cmd – command to create mscolumns table for reference database.exe – environment process.cmd – command executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. doc – directory that contains documentation. help msg – contains EE Nucleus message files.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. — Eemgr. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. — manager.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — ee72upg. — reeprj – remote environment process. — mscrecol. forms – directory that contains all the environment forms. — menu_shel. 636 . — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. db – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). — eeqpr.exe – Electrical Engineer manager environment executable.dat – ASCII file for output file management.bat – batch file to print 132 column reports to the laser printer.exe – executable command that updates the EE Raceway Project Database. share sym – contains EE symbol files. — dba* files – DB Access files.

EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway. \eerway \eerway\bin \eerway\data \eerway\db \eerway\dgn 637 .

The files are grouped by directory. problems.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 \eerway\doc \eerway\eden \eerway\mdlapps \eerway\msg \eerway\report \eerway\sym \eerway\tmp Delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files.txt – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. eerway — readme. 638 . comments. etc.

Sample . and clean database processes.dat – controls standard report management. — load – processor to load the project database. — rway_schma.dgn – displays the structure of the EE Schema.— remove.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. These files can be modified. Also contains . and any design files delivered with the product. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations.dat – controls Eden processes. unload drawing.dat – controls rule check report management. 639 . — process. dgn – Contains the seed file directory. — unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. — rule_chk. — eden. bin – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. available cell libraries. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. db – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. — report.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided.dat – controls process management.exe – executable file used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process.

dgn – explains the structure of the Raceway views.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_view. 640 .

eden – contains the Eden symbol library. — error. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field.— seed – contains the available seed design files. 641 .msg – message file containing all messages for the command field.lib – the Eden symbol library file. — prompt. This may be customized. doc – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. This may be customized.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. mdlapps msg – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands. — seed. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — eden. — alias. This file can be extended. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — command. — msseed.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file.

and logo. The software requires this directory. — rwaybar. This directory also contains the available precision input forms. — rwaypnl. — status. 642 . There is an .arc file for each report listed below. prompting messages.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables.sym – symbol file for the panel menu.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_prj.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports.ace)and compiled (.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. tmp – Holds any temporary files. report – Contains the source (. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library. The source files may be edited by the user.ace and an . These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — rway_ref. sym – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus.msg – message file containing messages for status field.

630 reference schema load. 626 modify. 605 modify element. 629 Modify Element commands. 612 Rotate Copy Group command. 606 PDS reference model. 616 modify. 620 rotate copy. 612 file structure EE. 608 Modify Group commands. 599 Rotate Copy Element command. 630 Load Reference Schema command. 614 Mirror Group command. 599 Mirror Copy Element command. 624 mirror copy. 622 Rotate Element command. 634 EE Nucleus. 602 Intergrated Commands. 618 move. 624 model annotate. 622 intergrated commands Reference PDS Model. 626 Mirror Element command. 604 design. 616 Mirror Copy Group command. 610. 614 mirror copy. 620 schema load reference. 618 runtime setup.Index annotate model. 638 element mirror. 602 model commands. 602 EERway. 638 group mirror. 607 modify. 601 643 . 607 setup. 606. 635 EE Raceway. 608 modify group. 618 Move Group command. 630 Reference PDS Model command. 629 Annotate Model command. 608 rotate copy. 605 EE Raceway. 635 Raceway file structure. 604. 629 EE file structure. 634 Nucleus file structure. 628 rotate. 628 palettes bar commands. 599 utilities. 610 Rotate Group command.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful